English G7 PDF

Learning Package
Grade 7 English
First Quarter
Grade 7 English Learning Package 1

To our dear learners,
Welcome to a new year of discoveries and explorations!
This package is intended to assist you in your journey into

using English in making and transferring meanings. This set of
materials will help you:
1. explore real-life themes, tasks, and situations;

2. expose you to a balance of literary and informative texts;
3. engage you in an interplay of print and non-print resources;
4. enrich your grammar awareness; and
5. enhance your information management skills.
We encourage you to take good care of this material. Your

responsibility in using and maintaining it will be appreciated by the
succeeding generations of learners.
Have a meaningful journey!
The Learning Area Team

for Languages and Multiliteracies

Lesson 1
Valuing Our Elders’ Wisdom
YOUR GOALS
This lesson allows you to appreciate the wisdom of our ancestors that
continues to influence our experiences. Discover how their proverbs serve as
guideposts towards strengthening our values. You must aim to:
1. Express whether a statement is true or false based on what you know.

2. Recognize differences in voice levels and speech patterns.
3. Determine words or expressions in a selection that are similar or opposite.
4. Use information presented in an article to infer, to evaluate, and to express
critical ideas.
5. Discuss the features of proverbs, their intended purpose, and the setting during
which they were produced.
6. Use appropriate volume and enunciation in a given communication situation.
7. Identify the unique features and properties of oral language.
8. Observe rules on subject-verb agreement.
9. Recognize the features and codes of the library‘s information sources.
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. True or False?
On a half-sheet of paper, write T if the statement is true according to what you

know and F if it is false. Be ready to explain your answer with a partner.
_____ 1. Philippine literature existed even before the Spaniards came.
_____ 2. Proverbs express the unending wisdom of the old.
_____ 3. Proverbs communicate only traditional beliefs and values.
_____ 4. The form of proverbs is chiefly poetic.
_____ 5. It is difficult to preserve proverbs.

Task 2. What did they say?
Complete the grid below as you listen to the recording.
Recording Descriptions Descriptions

of the Speaker’s Voice of the Speaker’s Message
Task 3. Similar or Opposite?
In terms of meaning, a word may be synonymous (similar) or antonymous

(opposite) to another. Form the correct pairs of synonyms and antonyms used in the
selection.
compiled native ancestors gathered

comprehensive limited complex brief
elders simple lengthy indigenous
Synonyms Antonyms
YOUR TEXT
Words of Wisdom
Damiana L. Eugenio, the mother of Philippine Folklore compiled and edited what
may very well be considered as the most comprehensive collection of proverbs in our
country. There is a limited number of works like this in existence. She spent a lifetime
collecting pieces of folk literature that reveal our ancestors‘ wisdom. When she gathered
proverbs from various areas in our country, she declared that our elders lived by simple,
yet very meaningful rules of righteous living. In fact, she asserted that even the
Spaniards who colonized our country noticed how proverbs formed part of the native
spirit. Spanish missionaries were found to have translated such proverbs and other oral
expressions in Spanish in order for their fellow religious people to learn our indigenous
languages. By doing so, they were able to interact with the early Filipinos their and
eventually introduce the Catholic faith.
Proverbs are brief instructive expressions that suggest a specific action,
behavior, or judgment. Referred to by some scholars as ―the wisdom of many and the
wit of one‖, they are commonly written in the form of short assertions or poetic two-liners
which have rhyme. It is interesting to note that people are easily struck by proverbs
when they are woven in conversations or writings. This is perhaps because they have
the power to teach people the more essential truths about life and the complexity of
living. Compared to lengthy narrations, descriptions, or argumentations, proverbs are
able to effect quickly a change in view or disposition.
In Filipino, proverbs are called salawikain or sawikain. They prescribe norms,

impart a lesson, or emphasize traditions and beliefs in a community. In the anthology of
Damiana L. Eugenio, she classified proverbs into six categories: (1) proverbs
expressing a general attitude towards life and the laws that govern life; (2) ethical
proverbs recommending certain virtues and condemning certain vices; (3) proverbs
expressing a system of values; (4) proverbs expressing general truths and observations
about life and human nature; (5) humorous proverbs and (6) miscellaneous proverbs.
Below are examples of each category.
1. Proverbs expressing a general attitude towards life and the laws that govern life
Walang ligaya sa lupa na di dinilig ng luha. (Tagalog)

There is no earthly joy that is not watered with tears.
Say liket ban-bantayey ermen. (Pangasinan)

Joy is always guarded by sorrow.
Ang kapalaran ko di ko man hanapin, dudulog lalapit kung talagang akin.

(Tagalog)
The good fortune which is intended for me will come even without my seeking it.
2. Ethical proverbs recommending certain virtues and condemning certain vices
Walang utang na di pinagbayaran. (Tagalog)

No debt remains unpaid.
Dai mo pagpaagahan an magigibo mo ngonyan. (Bikol)

Do not put off for tomorrow what you can do for today.
Ayau mo in kahui pila‟a ha kawa‟an mo bunga. (Tausug)

Do not cut the tree to get the fruit.
3. Proverbs expressing a system of values
Ti nasadot a baro cas carne a nadangro. (Ilokano)

A lazy young man is like foul-smelling meat.
Ang mga tulo singgot sa taong mangguibuhaton paga bayran gayud sa

guihapon. (Boholano)
Every drop of perspiration of an industrious man will be rewarded accordingly.
Isa ka tuig nga tiponon, isa ka takna wagwagon. (Hiligaynon)

It takes only a moment to squander what took a year to save.
4. Proverbs expressing general truths and observations about life and human
nature
Huli man at magaling, ay naihahabol din. (Tagalog)

A good thing is never too late.
Ti saan a matimtemec, nauyong no macaunget. (Ilokano)

The quite person is slow to anger but terrible when aroused.
Ing mayap a babai, maiguit ya karing rubi. (Pampango)

A good woman is worth more than rubies.
5. Humorous proverbs
Ang gugma sang tigulang daw igui nga nagakamang. (Hiligaynon)

The love of an old man is like a snail that crawls.
Ako kanhi cabalyero nga wala‟y kabilinggan; pagdawat sa matrimonio, sa

hinanali ng lawas mingniwang. (Cebuano)
I was formerly a gentleman without a care at all, but when I got married, my body
shrank and became small.
Kay tagal nanindahan, kabili-bili‟y balindang. (Tagalog)

After shopping for a long time, he ended up with a poor purchase.
6. Miscellaneous proverbs (typically expressive of specific realities to a certain

area)
Ing matudtud a pemangca e na balu lebasa‟ ng sapa. (Pampango)

The sleeping boatman does not know the streams he has passed.
Mapipia nu sumavat ka a maysaosaod su sagap as canu caviden mu du

calawangan q manalamad su among. (Ivatan)
It is better to go home and weave a net than to stay on the shore and watch the
fish.
Dica agcapcapoy no bassit ti inapoy; dica agnengnengneng no bassit ti

diningdeng. (Ilokano)
Don‘t be too slow if there‘s only a little rice; don‘t be too shy if there‘s only a little
viand.

Our proverbs are not only witty expressions. They are also our cultural treasures.
As we continue to use them in various spoken or written forms and as we explore ways
of representing them in graphic, musical, or dramatic modes, we facilitate their
preservation. And through these, we strengthen our identity as a people.
YOUR DISCOVERY TASKS
Task 1. Locate, Reflect, Evaluate!
Locate information in the selection to determine whether each statement is true

(T) or false (F).
_____ 1. Only a few people work on compiling folk literature.

_____ 2. Proverbs and other forms of folk literature were introduced
by the Spaniards.
_____ 3. Our ancestors‘ proverbs served as guideposts for upright living.
_____ 4. All proverbs are poetic and figurative in nature.
_____ 5. Proverbs may have geographical origins.
_____ 6. People react to the meaning of proverbs quite quickly.
_____ 7. Proverbs are more superior than other literary forms
in expressing messages.
_____ 8. If proverbs can instruct, they can definitely prescribe.
_____ 9. It is impossible to classify and categorize our numerous proverbs.
_____ 10. Our proverbs reflect a lot of things about our culture and identity.
Task 2. Classify!
Use Damiana Eugenio‘s system to classify the following proverbs. Use the given
codes.
G – proverbs expressing a general attitude towards life and the laws that govern life
E – ethical proverbs recommending certain virtues and condemning certain vices
V – proverbs expressing a system of values
T – proverbs expressing general truths/observations about life and human nature
H – humorous proverbs
M – miscellaneous proverbs
____ 1. Matibay ang walis, palibhasa'y magkabigkis.

A broom is sturdy because its strands are tightly bound.
____ 2. Sa taong walang takot, walang mataas na bakod.

To a fearless person, no fence is high enough.

____ 3. Kung ano ang puno, siya ang bunga.
Whatever the tree, so is the fruit.
____ 4. Aanhin pa ang damo, kung patay na ang kabayo.

What good is the grass if the horse is already dead.
____ 5. Kung may isinuksok, may madudukot.

If you save, you have something to withdraw.
____ 6. Ang magalang na sagot, nakakapawi ng pagod.

A respectful retort wipes away weariness.
____ 7. Ang hindi marunong magmahal sa sariling wika, daig pa ang

malangsang isda.
He who does not love the national language is worse than a smelly
fish.
____ 8. Ang mabigat ay gumagaan, kung pinagtutulungan.

A heavy burden is lightened if everyone participates in carrying it.
____ 9. Ang buhay ay parang gulong, minsang nasa ibabaw, minsang nasa
ilalim.
Life is like a wheel; sometimes you are on top, sometimes you are in
the bottom.
___ 10. Ang pili ng pili, natatapat sa bungi.

One who is choosy ends up with the least attractive choice.
Task 3. Tune in!
Copy the table below on a half-sheet of paper. As you listen twice to a short
dialogue, write your observations and notes under the appropriate columns.
Characteristics Characteristics Quality of Conversation Difficulties in Listening

of Student’s Voice of Elderly’s Voice of the Speakers

Task 4. Are You Sure?
Study each sentence below. If Leo, a student, said it is grammatical and you are
sure it is true, write ‗correct‘. If he said it is ungrammatical and it is indeed true, rewrite
the sentence. Do the same if Leo said it is grammatical but actually, it is not.
Sentence Leo said, it is… Your Analysis
1. Folk literary forms from our regions are varied. grammatical
2. The researcher with all his assistants explain such claim to be true. ungrammatical
3. It was emphasized that the number of folk literary forms have increased. ungrammatical
4. The research center which published related reports supports the observation. grammatical
5. The researcher, accompanied by local translators were able to gather proverbs. grammatical
6. There are still many questions about folk literature that need to be answered. grammatical
7. Folk literature, including oral forms remain a source of ethnic knowledge. ungrammatical
8. The translations of folk literature helps us overcome difficulties in understanding. grammatical
9. A compilation that contain folk literature has to be given recognition. ungrammatical
10. The government with the help of private groups promotes folk literature research. grammatical
Task 5. Sentence Writing
Using the information that the chart below provides, write two sentences that
observe the subject-verb agreement rule for each of the cases listed. Use a half sheet
of paper for your answers.
Highlights of the Hornedo P. Sanlaksa Foundation Proverbs Collection Project
Researcher Team Members Number of Proverbs Area

Simeon L. Cruz 9 students, 2 translators 245 Northern Luzon
Candida O. Ramos 4 students, 4 translators 164 Eastern and Western Visayas
Conrado F. Santos 16 students, 5 translators 1,104 Central and Southern Luzon
Estrelita J. Perez 8 students, 3 translators 987 Northern and Western Mindano
Dominador Q. Factor 12 students, 12 translators 2,135 Central Luzon and Central Visayas
Case Sentences
A/The number
There is/are
Intervening phrase
Intervening clause
YOUR FINAL TASK
A Glorious Past
Locate the items found in the list in the appropriate section/s of our library.
Provide the other needed information. Complete the statements that follow the grid.
Write your answers on a whole sheet of paper.

I looked for… I discovered… I located the information
in the…
a unique non-Tagalog proverb
information about the indigenous group
or region where the proverb is from
a news report or feature article about
the chosen group or region
Based on the information I gathered, I gained three important insights:
1. __________________________________________________________
2. __________________________________________________________
3. __________________________________________________________

Lesson 2
Searching for Our Beginnings
YOUR GOALS
This lesson prepares you to appreciate diversity in our culture. Discover how
stories from varied regions in our country reveal ideals, customs, and beliefs regarding
our place in the world. You must aim to:
1. Express your awareness of diversity in our culture.

2. Enhance your production of critical vowel and consonant sounds.
3. Classify words to associate its meaning with another word.
4. Use information presented in a creation story to infer, to evaluate, and to express
critical ideas.
5. Use a variety of tones for an oral interpretation of a literary text.
6. Determine the use of precise words to create objectivity in written language.
7. Observe rules on subject-verb agreement.
8. Assign meanings to verbal geography or landmarks of a myth.
9. Locate information through the school library‘s catalogue system.
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. Identifying Our Fellow Filipinos
Brainstorm with a partner to determine who our fellow Filipinos are and where
they reside in our country. Match items in columns A, B, and C then write your answers
on a one-fourth sheet of paper.
A B C
__, __ 1.
Ethnic Group and Province Region
A. Maranaws in Lanao A. Western Visayas

__, __2. del Norte
B. Ilongots in Cagayan B. Cagayan Valley
C. Negritos in Capiz C. Autonomous

__, __3. Region of Muslim
Mindanao

Task 2. Knowing Further Our Fellow Filipinos
Complete the chart below. Use a whole sheet of paper.
WHAT I KNOW WHAT I WANT TO KNOW

What do you know about the… What else do you want to know about them?
Maranaws?
Negritos?
Ilongots?
Task 3. Our Unique People
Read quietly the short article below to locate information that will help you
determine whether you will agree or disagree to the following statements.
1. The Filipinos are uniquely diversified.

2. The Filipinos are religious in nature.
3. The diversity of the Filipinos in culture, language, and religion is a hindrance to
the country‘s unity and progress.
4. The strength of the Filipino culture lies in the resiliency of its people who
overcame the colonizers‘ oppressive rule.
5. Acceptance of differences in culture, belief, and language can only start with
awareness.
The People of the Philippines

by the Philippine Tourism Promotions Board
1
The Filipino is basically of Malay stock with a sprinkling of Chinese, American,
Spanish and Arab blood. The Philippines has a population of 70 million, and it is hard to
distinguish accurately the lines between stocks. From a long history of Western colonial
rule, interspersed with the visits of merchants and traders evolved a people of a unique
blend of east and west, both in appearance and culture.
2
The Filipino character is actually a little bit of all the cultures put together. The
bayanihan or spirit of kinship and camaraderie that Filipinos are famous for is said to be
taken from Malay forefathers. The close family relations are said to have been inherited
from the Chinese. The piousness comes from the Spaniards who introduced Christianity
in the 16th century. Hospitality is a common denominator in the Filipino character and
this is what distinguishes the Filipino. Filipinos are probably one of the few, if not the

only, English-proficient Oriental people today. Pilipino is the official national language,
with English considered as the country's unofficial one.
3
The Filipinos are divided geographically and culturally into regions, and each
regional group is recognizable by distinct traits and dialects – the sturdy and frugal
llocanos of the north, the industrious Tagalogs of the central plains, the carefree
Visayans from the central islands and the colorful tribesmen and religious Moslems of
Mindanao. Tribal communities can be found scattered across the archipelago. The
Philippines has more than 111 dialects spoken, owing to the subdivisions of these basic
regional and cultural groups.
4
Some 80 percent of the population is Catholic, Spain's lasting legacy. About 15
percent is Moslem and these people can be found basically in Mindanao. The rest of the
population is made up mostly of smaller Christian denominations and Buddhist.
5
The country is marked by a true blend of cultures; truly in the Philippines, East
meets West. The background of the people is Indonesian and Malay. There are
Chinese and Spanish elements as well. The history of American rule and contact with
merchants and traders culminated in a unique blend of East and West, both in the
appearance and culture of the people of the Filipinos, or people of the Philippines.
Task 4. Loud and Clear!
Enhance your pronunciation of a few critical vowel and consonant sounds based
on some parts of the article. You will be guided by your teacher.
Set A: Words
[I] [i]
bit unique
kinship east
basic appearance
archipelago camaraderie
Philippines fifteen
[s] [ʃ]
spirit Spanish
stock population
sturdy Indonesian
scattered distinguishes
some kinship
Set B: Phrases
1. a little bit of all the cultures

2. spirit of kinship
3. East meets West
4. Chinese and Spanish
5. people of the Philippines
Set C: Sentences
1. The Filipino character is actually a little bit of all the cultures put together
2. The bayanihan or spirit of kinship and camaraderie that Filipinos are famous for
is said to be taken from Malay forefathers.
3. Each regional group is recognizable by distinct traits and dialects – the sturdy
and frugal llocanos of the north, the industrious Tagalogs of the central plains,
the carefree Visayans from the central islands and the colorful tribesmen and
religious Moslems of Mindanao.
4. Some 80 percent of the population is Catholic, Spain's lasting legacy.
5. The history of American rule and contact with merchants and traders culminated
in a unique blend of East and West, both in the appearance and culture of the
people of the Filipinos.
YOUR TEXT
The Origin of This World (Maranao)

from the Anthology of Philippine Myths by Damiana L. Eugenio
1
According to Maranaw folklore, this world was created by a great Being. It is not
known, however, who exactly is this great Being. Or how many days it took him to
create this world.
2
This world is divided into seven layers.
The earth has also seven layers. Each layer is
inhabited by a different kind of being. The
uppermost layer, for example, is the place we
are inhabiting. The second layer is being
inhabited by dwarfs. These dwarfs are short,
plump, and long-haired. They are locally known
as Karibanga. The Karibanga are said to
possess magical powers. They are usually
invisible to the human eye. The third layer of the earth which is found under the sea or
lake is inhabited by nymphs. These nymphs also possess certain magical powers. It is
stated in the story of Rajah Indarapatra that he met and fell in love with the princess-
nymph with whom he had a child.
3
The sky also consists of seven layers. Each layer has a door which is guarded
day and night by huge mythical birds called garoda. The seventh layer of the sky is the
seat of heaven which is also divided into seven layers. Every layer in the sky is
inhabited by angels. Maranaws believe that angels do not need food. They all possess
wings with which they fly.
4
Heaven which is found on the seventh layer of the sky is where good people‘s
spirits go after death. Saints are assigned to the seventh layer while persons who
―barely made it‖ are confined to the lower most layer which is found at the bottom of
heaven.
5
It is in heaven where we find the tree-of-life. On
each leaf of the tree-of-life is written the name of every
person living on earth. As soon as a leaf ripens or dries
and falls, the person whose name it carries also dies.
6
The soul of every person is found in tightly
covered jars kept in one section of heaven. This
particular section of heaven is closely guarded by a
monster with a thousand eyes, named Walo. Walo, in
addition to his thousand eyes, has also eight hairy
heads. The epic Darangan speaks of Madale,
Bantugan‘s brother and, Mabaning, Husband of
Lawanen, entering this section and retrieving the soul
of Bantugan.
Task 1. Word Webs
Attach as many words you can find in the selection which you could associate
with each idea featured in each box. Use a whole sheet of paper for your webs.
heaven
earth
tree of life


(T) or false (F). Write your answer on a one-whole sheet of paper.
_____ 1. Everything has its own place in heaven or on earth.

_____ 2. Even monsters have a place in heaven.
_____ 3. The nymphs, unlike the Karibanga, have magical powers.
_____ 4. The number seven is a significant detail in the narrative.
_____ 5. Angels can fly.
_____ 6. The heaven in the selection accommodates saints and sinners.
_____ 7. There is a reward for good people in heaven.
_____ 8. The narrative is close to the accounts of other stories of origin of the
world.
_____ 9. Death as explained in the narrative is a natural occurrence.
_____ 10. The Maranaw story of the origin of the world is unique.
Task 3. Show It, Say It!
Reflect on the following series of questions:
What is it that you found puzzling,

interesting, intriguing, or strange in the
story? Is it similar to your belief of how
the world began? Why or why not?
Illustrate and color the puzzling, interesting, intriguing, or strange part that
you found in the story then explain your answer in not more than five sentences
on a whole sheet of paper. In your explanation, consider:
1. avoiding informal expressions;

2. using facts from your recall of information; and
3. using more nouns and adjectives than verbs and adverbs.
Be guided by the rubrics below.
Way to go! (11-15 points) Just fine! (6-10 points) Nice try! (1-5 points)
The illustration shows an interesting The illustration shows an interesting The illustration is not as interesting
and orderly play of images and colors. but not so orderly play of images and and orderly. The images and colors
The explanation observed the three colors. The explanation observed only seem unrelated. The explanation
considerations and demonstrated two of the three considerations very observed only one of the three
careful and correct language use and adequately. A few lapses in language considerations very adequately. A
mechanics. use and mechanics can be seen. number of lapses in language use and
mechanics can be seen.

Task 4: Tune Up Your Tone!
Use the given scale and chart to examine the performance of each group for this
part of the lesson. Copy the chart on a half sheet of paper. You will be guided further by
your teacher.
Rating Meaning
5 Maximum effort and control
4 High effort yet less control
3 Moderate level of performance and no control
2 Low level of performance
1 Needs improvement
Mood R A T I N G
Group of the Volume Tone Clarity Pauses Facial Blocking/ Total
Group Expression Stance
1
2
3
4
5
6
Task 5. Watch Out!
Study the following sentences. Write C if the sentence observes correct subject-
verb agreement. If it does not, write I. Write your answers on a one fourth sheet of
paper.
1. Ritual and magic are common elements in myths.

2. Each man and woman is controlled by a powerful being in many myths.
3. Every deity has magical powers.
4. Every myth and legend have unique features.
5. Somebody is shown as more powerful in creation stories.
6. The gods nor the goddess play favorite among the humans.
7. Many of the themes in myths were used already in movies.
8. All myths is regarded as stories from oral tradition.
9. Neither a myth nor a legend explains the full nature of creation.
10. Either the historians or the mythologist are coming to the lecture.

Task 6. Practice Makes Perfect!
Below is an exercise based on the contents of the article The Maranao Tribe
from Lake Lanao. Specify the verb, which will agree with its subject in each sentence.
Write your answers on a one fourth sheet of paper.
The Maranao, together with the Illanun and Maguindanao ____ 1. (is, are) an
indigenous Muslim group in Mindanao in southwestern Philippines. Their culture and
identity ____ 2. (reflects, reflect) general features of Southeast Asian tribes. Each of
these, however, ____ 3. (has, have) developed unique traditions.
Every historian or anthropologist who ____ 4. (studies, study) Mindanao tribes
____ 5. (has, have) given common observations about the Maranao. Almost all
Maranaos ____ 6. (is, are) Muslims, but some who live in the hills around Lake Lanao
____ 7. (follows, follow) a version of Islam reflecting pre-Islamic beliefs and practices.
Many scholars ____ 8. (emphasizes, emphasize) that the Maranao, who ____ 9. (is,
are) the first inhabitants of the shores of Lake Lanao, still ____ 10. (inhabits, inhabit)
this region.
The name Maranao ____ 11. (means, mean) "People of the Lake" or "Lake
Dwellers". Both ____ 12. (refers, refer) to the natives who settled around Lake Lanao.
Neither photographers or a writer ____ 13. (was, were) ever able to capture in images
or words the beauty of this lake. Lake Lanao, with the Maranaos living around it ____
14. (continues, continue) to be an attraction and source of inspiration. More importantly,
the spirit of the Maranaos ____ 15. (thrives, thrive) because of its existence.
Task 7. Extra, Extra!
Below is a student‘s draft of an introduction for an article about diversity in the

Philippines. If a sentence observes proper subject-verb agreement, write C. If it does
not, rewrite the sentence. Write your answers on a half sheet of paper.
(1) Each tourist or guest who come to the Philippines is always amazed by our
cultural diversity. (2) Every island and region highlights a unique adventure. (3) A
variety of traditions, dishes, celebrations, and many others are offered to both local
and foreign travelers. (4) Our rich past and our promising future are discovered by
every guest almost every day and everywhere in the country. (5) For this reason,
tourism experts, along with the Department of Tourism believes that “It‟s more fun
in the Philippines!”

(6) Northern Philippines boast of its old Spanish flavor, from architecture to
culinary traditions. (7) There are much pleasure to discover in the coasts and
shorelines of Central Philippines. (8) In Southern Philippines, one discovers the
rich Islamic backgrounds of our country. (9) Nobody has ever experienced
boredom in hopping from one island to another. (10) Either pleasure or warm
insights is taken home by every visitor in our shores.
YOUR FINAL TASK
What’s the difference?
Can you tell the difference between and among a myth, a legend, and a folktale?
To answer this, search for useful information in our library. Be guided by the Dewey
Decimal System to ease your search. The system is made up of ten classes introduced
by a range of numerical codes used to write a reference material‘s call number.
000 – Computer science, information and general works

100 – Philosophy and psychology
200 – Religion
300 – Social sciences
400 – Language
500 – Science (including mathematics)
600 – Technology and applied Science
700 – Arts and recreation
800 – Literature
900 – History and geography
Accomplish the chart below. After finding the materials you need, complete the
chart with the information that you have gathered and answer the series of questions
that follows. Create your chart using a one-whole sheet of paper.
Reference Usual Time or Topics

Location Principal Sample
Form (Dewey Decimal Class) Length Period Depicted
Characters Titles
Shown
Myth
Legend
Folktale
How would you define a myth using the information you have gathered? Does
the story The Origin of This World by the Maranaws qualify as a myth? Why or why not?

Lesson 3
Explaining Our Beginnings
YOUR GOALS
This lesson allows you to understand some forms of conflict in our world.
Discover a new perspective on how you can manage and help others resolve a conflict.
You must aim to:
1. Express opinion concerning given scenarios.

2. Listen critically to match shifts in stress and intonation with intended meaning.
3. Create a story map.
critical ideas.
5. Use proper stress and intonation in dialogues.
6. Differentiate literary and academic writing.
7. Observe rules on consistency of tense.
8. Analyze the elements of creation stories, their intended purpose, and the setting
during which they were produced.
9. Use the card catalog, the online public access catalog, or electronic search
engine to locate needed sources.
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. What’s the conflict?
Identify the problem scenario or form of differing or opposing view, belief, or

situation shown by each set of picture and caption. Write your answer on a half sheet of
paper.
1. 2. 3.
A: I think it was a good teleserye. The game of my team is at 3:00 p.m. Taking care of my brothers is boring. I told
B: I didn‘t like it at all. today and so is my Math remedial class. mother I want to go out with my friends.
Problem Scenario: Problem Scenario: Problem Scenario:

_________________________ _________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________ _________________________
_________________________ _________________________ _________________________

Task 2. Oh No!
Listen to three dialogues and complete the chart below. Create your chart on a
whole sheet of paper. You may use words or phrases to indicate quality of speakers‘
voices.
Dialogue What is the conflict? Quality of Speakers’ Voices

Student 1 Student 2
1 The student wants to go outside.

The other person _____________.
Lady Guard Man
2 The lady guard ________________.

The other person _______________.
Vendor Buyer
3 The vendor _________________.

The other person _______________.
Task 3. With Feelings
Enhance your understanding of stress and intonation by doing the following

exercises with your teacher and classmates.
A. Use the right stress to distinguish the following heteronyms or words with the
same spelling but with different pronunciations. Apply the right stress on the
syllable written in capital letters.
NOUN VERB
PROject proJECT
CONtent conTENT
COMbat comBAT
CONduct conDUCT
CONvert conVERT
DEfect deFECT
DEsert deSERT
OBject obJECT
PREsent preSENT
REcord reCORD
UPdate upDATE
B. Use the right stress to pronounce the following two- and three-syllable words.
TWO SYLLABLES THREE SYLLABLES

NAtion eMOtion
MOtion eRUPtion
LOtion soLUtion
POtion conDItion
NOtion comPLExion
C. Use the right intonation to achieve the purpose or feeling indicated. Provide the
appropriate stress in the words that are highlighted.
Sentence Purpose/Feeling
You want flowers. State a fact.
You want flowers? Ask a question.
Eric, your friend, gave me flowers. Emphasize the giver.
Eric, your friend, gave me flowers. Emphasize the relationship of the giver
to another person.
Eric gave you flowers? Turn a statement into a question.
Eric gave me flowers! Indicate excitement.
Eric gave me flowers. Indicate boredom or disappointment.
D. With a partner, study how the poem below should be read dramatically. Observe
the appropriate stress and intonation.
Misery
by Langston Hughes
Misery is when your

very best friend
calls you a name she really
didn‘t mean to call you at all.
Misery is when you call

your very best friend a name
you didn‘t mean to call her, either.
Task 4. Of Time and Place
From the words inside the box, choose the one that appropriately substitutes for
the underlined words/expressions. Write your answers on a one fourth sheet of paper.
constantly 1. In the beginning there was no heaven or earth.

uniquely 2. The breeze was forever cool.
abruptly 3. After so many years, they got married.
eventually 4. Immediately after his return from the trip, he called this act to
instantly her attention.
originally 5. The whole place suddenly became cold and desolate.
6. Then from the depth of this formless void, there appeared beyond
two gods. deepness
7. Their abode was in the highest realm of the eternal space. throughout
8. She sits down by a pool near their doorstep. summit
9. He was sailing across the regions of the clouds. adjacent
10. She might be somewhere in the regions above. dwelling

YOUR TEXT
How the World Was Created (Panayan)
1
One of the stories about the creation of the world, which the old folks of Panay,
especially those living near the mountain, do not tire relating, tells us that in the
beginning there was no heaven or earth—only a bottomless deep and a world of mist.
Everything was shapeless and formless—the earth, the sky, the sea, and the air were
almost all mixed up.
2
Then from the depth of this formless void, there
appeared two gods, —Tungkung Langit and Alunsina. Just
where the two deities came from it was not known. However,
it is related that Tungkung Langit fell in love with Alunsina
and, after so many years of courtship, they got married and
had their abode in the highest realm of the eternal space
where the water was constantly warm and the breeze was
forever cool. It was in this place where order and regularity
first took place.
3
Tungkung Langit was an industrious, loving, and kind
god whose chief concern was how to impose order over the
whole confused set-up of things. He assumed responsibility for the regular cosmic
movement. On the other hand, Alunsina was a lazy, jealous, and selfish goddess whose
only work was to sit by the window of their heavenly home, and amuse herself with her
pointless thoughts. Sometimes, she would go down from the house, sit down by a pool
near their doorstep and comb her long, jet-black hair all day long.
4
One day Tungkung Langit told his wife that he would be away from home for
sometime to put an end to the chaotic disturbances in the flow of time and in the
position of things. The jealous Alunsina, however, sent the sea breeze to spy on
Tungkung Langit. This made the latter very angry upon knowing about it.
5
Immediately after his return from the trip, he called this act to her attention
saying that it was ungodly of her to be jealous, there being no other creature living in the
world except the two of them. This reproach was resented by Alunsina, and a quarrel
between them followed.
6
Tungkung Langit lost his temper. In this rage, he divested his wife of powers and
drove her away. No one knew where Alunsina went; she merely disappeared.
7
Several days after Alunsina left, however, Tungkung Langit felt very lonely. He
realized what he had done. Somehow, it was too late even to be sorry about the whole
matter. The whole place once vibrant with Alunsina‘s sweet voice, suddenly became
cold and desolate. In the morning, when he woke up he would find himself alone and in
the afternoon when he came home, he would feel the same loneliness creeping deep in
his heart because there was no one to meet him at the doorstep or soothe the aching
muscles of his arms.
8
For months, Tungkung Langit lived in utter desolation. He could not find
Alunsina, try hard as he would. And so, in his desperation, he decided to do something
in order to forget his sorrows. For months and months he thought. His mind seemed
pointless, his heart, weary, and sick. But he must have to do something about his
loneliness.
9
One day, while he was sailing across the regions of the clouds, a thought came
to him. He would make a big basin of water below the sky so that he can see the image
of his wife, if she were just somewhere in the regions above. And lo! The sea appeared.
However, Alunsina was never seen.
10
After a long time, the somber sight of the lonely sea irritated Tungkung Langit.
So he came down to the Middleworld and created the land; then he planted this with
grasses, trees, and flowers. He took his wife‘s treasured jewels and scattered them in
the sky, hoping that when Alunsina would see them she might be induced to return
home. The goddess‘ necklace became the stars, her comb the moon, and her crown the
sun. However, despite all these Alunsina did not come back.
11
And up to this time, the folks in Panay say that Tungkung Langit is alone in his
palace in the skies. Sometimes, he would cry out of his pent-up emotions and his tears
would fall down upon the earth. The people say that rain is Tungkung Langit‘s tears and
that is why in some localities in the island of Panay, the first rain in May is received with
much rejoicing and sacrifice. Incidentally, when it thunders hard, the old folks also say
that it is Tungkung Langit sobbing, calling for his beloved Alunsina to come back –
entreating her so hard that his voice thunders across the fields and countryside.
Task 1. Character Study
Construct a Venn diagram similar to the one below on a half sheet of paper.
Compare and contrast Tungkung Langit and Alunsina.
Tungkung Langit Alunsina

Determine whether each statement is true (T) or false (F). Beside your answer,
write the paragraph number to support your answer. Write your answer on a one fourth
sheet of paper.
_____ 1. Tungkung Langit and Alunsina lived in a heavenly paradise.

_____ 2. There was no reason for Alunsina to be jealous.
_____ 3. Only Alunsina should be blamed for the loneliness of Tungkung Langit.
_____ 4. The world was created due to the hopelessness of Tungkung Langit.
_____ 5. Tungkung Langit‘s bad temper cost him a significant lot.
_____ 6. Panay‘s idea of creation originated from a happy setting.
_____ 7. How the World was Created is a myth.
_____ 8. The story is not associated with some real experiences in Panay.
_____ 9. The elders in Panay no longer speak of their story of creation.
____ 10. The story speaks more of trust between a couple than of compromise.
Task 3. What if?
Copy the score sheet below on a half sheet of paper. Use the rating scale to
indicate your evaluation of the alternative endings that will be presented.
3 - high level of performance and involvement
2 - moderate level of performance and involvement
1 - low level of performance and involvement
Group No. ________ Date of Presentation: _________________ Evaluator __________________
Evidence of Participation
Member‘s Name Task/Role
Peer Rating Teacher Rating
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1. The best feature of the group‘s performance is _______________________________________.
2. The group could have enhanced further their _________________________________________.
Task 4. Which is which?
Copy the chart on the next page on a half sheet of paper in order to compare and
contrast the two texts that follow.

Text A
One day, a mound of earth shaped was seen growing in the east. After
several years, the mound grew into a beautiful mountain range resembling
Alunsina‟s face and her wonderful hair. The magical breeze whispered to the
unhappy Tungkung Langit that Alunsina grew old and died of sorrow somewhere in
the east. This made Tungkung Langit mournful. As the sun rises in the east, the
shadow of the mountain reminds Tungkung Langit of his dear Alunsina. And as the
shadow fades away at nightfall, Tungkung Langit waters the earth with his tears.
Text B
Geologists observe that many of our mountains and mountain ranges seem
to resemble human-like forms. However, they argue that these earth formations are
the result of various interrelated geological processes such as earthquakes, rock
formations, and even volcanic eruptions. They cited several conclusive research that
detail the formation of such natural wonders. They also conducted experiments that
show how bodies of water have contributed to rock formation worldwide. In the
years to come, scientists expect to generate more data to explain such phenomena.
Aspect Text A Text B
Tone
Style
Choice of Words
Organization of Ideas
Purpose
Intended Audience
Task 5. The Right Source
Use three different information search structures to find a more focused

information source on the following topics. Use a whole sheet of paper for your
complete answers.
Card Catalog OPAC Website

Specific Topic
Call Number Call Number from Search Engine
conflict among children
conflict in families
national conflicts
conflict resolution

Study the consistency of tense in the paragraphs on the following page. On a half
sheet of paper, write C if the sentence correctly observes rules on tense consistency. If
it does not, rewrite the sentence and box the verb, the form of which must show its
correct tense.
Paragraph 1
1
The wide island of Panay was originally inhabited by Negritos or locally called
2
Ati tribe. Their disappearance is due to an innocent agreement they made with the
sultan of Borneo back in 1250 to give up their land in exchange of a hat and gold
3
necklace. Early in the 13th century, Marikudo, a native chieftain, sold the coastal
shores and lowlands to 10 Bornean Datus who escapes from the repression of Sri
4
Vishayan Empire. One of them named Paiburong received the area Irong-Irong,
which is now called Iloilo City, meaning nose-like, as its wide river mouth in the narrow
5
Guimaras Strait appears like a snout. The island lived peacefully until the arrival of
Juan Miguel de Legazpi in 1566 that discovered and developed more towns.
http://www.camperspoint.com/spip.php?article241
Paragraph 2
1
The Filipinos in central Philippines are generally and collectively called
2
Visayans or Bisayans. Hence, the people in Panay, Guimaras and Negros Occidental
3
are referred to as "Visayans" or "Bisayans". Aside from the general names given to
the people of the Visayan region, there are mountain people who lived in the interior
4
mountains of Panay and Negros. In Panay, they were generally referred to as
Bukidnon (literally, "from the mountains") or Sulod (literally, "inside" or "interior").
5
Farming and fishing are the main sources of livelihood in the region until the 1960s.
6
Farmers within the interior mountains of Central Panay employed the kaingin system
7
(slash-and-burn). A bolo and a wooden dibble were all they use for cutting trees and
8
for boring holes to drop rice or corn seeds and legumes into. Most houses have
9
bangkaw (spear) as hunting tool. Hunting greatly decreased in the 1970s with the
gradual disappearance of forests, but kaingin still remained to be the primary form of
farming since the interior mountain are rugged and they have not found the
appropriate technology to harness water.
National Commission for Culture and Arts, http://www.ncca.gov.ph
Task 7. A Polished Finish
Tense consistency is important in writing news reports. On a whole sheet of

paper, revise the following news report so that rules on tense consistency are observed.
1
ILOILO CITY – An award-winning epic-chanter who belonged to an indigenous group
on Panay Island has raised concerns over the depiction of its cultural beliefs and
practices on GMA 7‘s new series, ―Amaya.‖
2
Federico Caballero, 73, an elder of the Panay-Bukidnon community, said that,
while the show may be fictional, the portrayal of its people‘s practices, terms and
3
beliefs are inaccurate. ―Some of the things depicted do not reflect our culture,‖
Caballero tells the Philippine Daily Inquirer.

4
About the Kapuso series, Caballero objected to the characterization of a
supposed binukot (well-kept maiden) – Amaya, played by actress Marian Rivera.
5
In an article posted on the network‘s website, www.gmanews.tv, the show‘s
producers and writers say Amaya‘s character was inspired by the binukot of the
6
Panay-Bukidnon indigenous people. The show, which premiered on May 30, liberally
uses words in Hiligaynon and Kiniray, languages associated with the Panay-Bukidnon
people.
7
Caballero said it was inaccurate, at times offensive, to show supposed binukot
and members of the community half-naked or wearing skimpy clothes. ―Our people,
8
most especially the binukot, are conservative. We wear clothes that hardly expose
skin,‖ he stresses.
Philippine Daily Inquirer. 11 June 2011, http://entertainment.inquirer.net
YOUR FINAL TASK
Think Win-Win!
Locate a news report in a broadsheet that talks about a particular conflict. Study
the nature of the conflict very well. Determine a win-win solution to address the conflict.
Write a short dialogue between the two parties involved that will show how they
arrived at the win-win solution. Use a whole sheet of paper. Attach the copy of the news
report to this sheet. Be guided by the rubrics below.
Way to go! (11-15 points) Just fine! (6-10 points) Nice try! (1-5 points)
The dialogue shows an appropriate The dialogue shows a possible, but The win-win solution is not as
win-win solution in light of the conflict. not entirely appropriate win-win interesting and convincing. The details
The points were logically arrived at. solution in light of the conflict. The seem unrelated and disorganized. The
The writer demonstrated careful and points seem logical but lacking a few writer committed a number of lapses
correct language use and mechanics. more convincing points. The writer in language use and mechanics.
demonstrated a few lapses in
language use and mechanics.

Lesson 4
Learning from Our Beginnings
YOUR GOALS
This lesson helps you understand the value of knowing how things came to be in the eyes of
our ancestors. Everything on earth, good or bad, has its beginnings. Be perceptive, and let the stories of
the past inspire your future. For this lesson, these are your goals:
1. Use definitions to guess given words.

2. Create a graphic organizer for a text read.
3. Observe rules on pronoun-antecedent agreement.
4. Listen to shifts in stress and intonation in identifying important information based on a text.
5. Observe correct sentence stress in reading a text.
6. Use colloquial and informal expressions appropriately in conversations.
7. Locate data using library resources.
8. Write a family genesis using the elements and themes of myths.
9. Give different reasons for writing.
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. The K-W-L Way
The word, ‗genesis‘ plays a central role in this lesson. Hence, it is important that you identify what
you know about this idea by filling out a K-W-L Table. Copy the table on a half-sheet of paper. Under the
first column, write down all the ideas you have about ‗genesis‘. On the second column, write what you
want to know about it. The third column will be completed at the end of the lesson.
‘GENESIS’
What I Know What I Want to Know What I Learned

Task 2. Begin with ‘BEGINNINGS’
Another meaning of the word ‗genesis‘ is the one spelled in the puzzle below. Let the provided
definitions and letter-boxes help you in completing the words. Write your answers on a half-sheet of
paper. After checking, review the word list. Remember what the words mean, because they appear in the
story you are about to read.
A B O D E 1. a place of residence
C U R S E D 2. said hurtful words
H O M A G E 3. special honor or respect shown publicly
R A D I A N C E 4. light or heat reflected by something
E N T R E A T Y 5. a humble request
D I S I N T E G R A T E D 6. broke up into small parts
C A L I P H 7. a title that refers to a successor of Muhammad
E X I S T E N T 8. having reality
G A N T A 9. a form of measurement
A S S E R T E D 10. caused others to recognize one‘s authority or
right by confident and forceful behavior
YOUR TEXT
How does this myth explain the creation of the world and the root of evil?
1
Samal Genesis
1 In the beginning, when there were no creatures yet, there was only the
sea. Floating on this sea was a thing resembling a ball. This was the abode of
God the Most High. When he wanted to bring out his creations, the ball split;
one half of it rose and became heaven (with seven levels) and the lower half
remained and became the earth (with seven levels). Now the sea on which
the ball was floating was called Baharun Nur [Bahar, great waters, mighty
rivers; Nur, light], meaning, this was the ancestor of all which floated on it.
Symbolically, the part which was lifted up was the father, and the grandfather
was the sea on which it floated. Now at the same time of the splitting of the
ball, and as God willed it, all men and all the creatures on earth have already
been believed as being in it.
2 From the time of our ancestors up to the present, the original content of that thing is what we
have been looking for.
Pre-Existent Soul
3 And Nur Muhammad [technical term for the pre-existence of the soul of the Prophet] was then
already risen. When Allah the Most High was already in the highest heaven, he willed and his radiance
scattered and became a man---Nur Muhammad. Now, when the latter became aware of himself, he
asserted that he was God. Looking left and right, he saw that he was alone. So he said to himself,
―There is nobody but me, so I must be God.‖ He then went around, and after walking some distance
1
Domingo, Eugenia. 1999. Philippine folk literature: The myths. p. 98-99.
he said, ―Arastum Murabbikum,‖ meaning, ―I am God.‖ Then all of a sudden, a voice answered, ―Kahal
Bala,” and Nur disintegrated.
4 When Nur disintegrated, all the elements contained in the earth and the heavens were drawn out
of him. All creatures then appeared. From the single light [Nur] was taken the elements that became
the moon, the sun, the stars, the trees, and all living things. They were all there. And this was begun
on a Sunday and was completed on a Friday.
Why God is Hidden
5 After all things had been drawn out of Nur Muhammad, he was made man once again, and God
said to him, ―Don‘t assert that you are God. It is I. But if you don‘t believe, let us play hide and seek.
You hide and I will look for you. Then I will hide and you will look for me. If I can find you and you
cannot find me, then surely I am God.‖ And so they commenced the trial. No matter how hard Nur
Muhammad hid, God always pinpointed him. Then God said, ―Now I will hide.‖ And Nur Muhammad
could not find him. [This is said to be the reason why we cannot see God.]
6 God then summoned the angel, Jibra‘il [Gabriel]. God then said to him, ―Go on to earth and get a
handful of soil.‖ When Jibra‘il descended and tried to pick up some earth. The earth cursed and
refused to be taken, Jibra‘il returned empty-handed, and God said to another angel, Mika‘il, ―You go.‖
When Mikail reached the earth, the same refusal met him. Then the angel, Israfil, took his turn, but the
earth likewise refused. Then the fourth angel, Idjara‘il [Izra‘il or Azra‘el], immediately went down and
forthwith grabbed the earth. One of his fingers was on the west, another on the east, a third one on the
south, and a fourth one on the earth. And he scooped a handful.
7 Then God said to Jibra‘il, ―Make it into a man.‖ When it had assumed the form of a man, Jibra‘il
said, ―My Lord, the man is here, but it cannot speak, and his joints are no t connected.‖
8 Then God said, ―Get a ganta of rice and grind it into

powder and apply it to him.‖ Then the joints were connected and the man
became whole, but he still could not speak. Then God commanded Nur
Muhammad, ―Go inside Adam‖ (for that was the name of the man). But
Nur Muhammad said, ―I refuse. You created Adam from the four elements
(fire, water, wind, and earth), whereas I came from Your light.‖ Then God
said to Nur Muhammad, ―Be willing, for you and I are one, and you can
meet me five times a day during prayer.‖ So Nur Muhammad went inside
Adam through his forehead and Adam became a living man.
9 And God made Adam into a Caliph and commanded all creatures including angels to pay
homage to him. And every creature did, except Iblis (the Evil One) who said to God, ―How can I
worship Adam seeing he was created of four elements whereas I have served you for hundreds of
years.‖ In spite of God‘s entreaty, Iblis continued to refuse. Then, Iblis asked God to grant him four
wishes. First, that he would be the richest of all; second, that he would be the most exalted of all; third,
that he can steal the riches of those who have; and fourth, that those riches he cannot steal, he kills.
And this is the origin of the evil desire for material goods and for worldly fame which leads to envy and
killing. Those whom Iblis enters are led to evil. For he had an agreement with God that those he can
mislead are his and those he cannot are God‘s.

Task 1. The Illustrated Genesis
Illustrations such as the graphic organizers featured below supplement explanations for related
ideas and processes. In drawings like these, lines and arrows present the direction that a process takes.
Illustrations could start from top to bottom or vice versa if the process is linear, whereas a circular design
is more appropriate for cycles. Shapes represent different ideas. Their sizes could symbolize their
importance, while their variations could pertain to their different natures.
The Samal version of the genesis can also be further explained by a graphic organizer. On a
whole sheet of paper, design a graphic organizer that will show the transformation involving the following:
Adam, all elements and living things, ball (God‘s house), God, Nur (as man), and Nur (as light). Use other
appropriate materials to make your work unique and creative.
Task 2. Confirm or Disconfirm
Which of the following information is presented by the text? In your notebook, write the paragraph
numbers that provide the mentioned information.
1. Iblis is a fallen angel.

2. Man originated from Nur.
3. Man originated from God.
4. Iblis originated from God.
5. Nur originated from God‘s light.
6. Evil will continue until the end of the world.
7. All beings on earth came from the house of God.
8. Nur is originally a higher being than Man.
9. Man eventually challenged God because of Iblis‘s evil deeds.
10. Man came to be through the compromise of God and Nur.

Task 3. An Info Hunt
2
Read the following excerpt about the history of Samal.
The Municipality of Samal derived its

name from the Isamals who were its first
inhabitants. The Isamals were brought by
the first and second waves of migration
from the Malay Region of Southeast
Asia, dynastically ruled by a Datu up to
the early part of the American Regime.
The latest ruling tribal Chieftain was Datu
Taganiog who died on January 28, 1948.
Discovery revealed that the latter lived at "Malibasa" (now known as
Peñaplata, the poblacion) where he exercised his general supervision.
The word "Malibasa" meant honorable. The Isamals lived in perfect
harmony as peace-loving people.
What new information does the above text present you?

What about Samal history do you want to know more of?
Learn more about the beginnings of Samal island and its people by using the card catalogue, the
online public access catalogue, or electronic search engine of our school library or any nearby library.
Locate specific resources about the topics, then note down the information that you will get. Be ready to
share this with the class.
Task 4. Exploring the English Language
Read the following sentences. For every number, note the words highlighted through boldface
and underscore. What relationship do the words have?
1. Floating on this sea was a thing resembling a ball. This was the abode of God the Most High.
2. Now at the time of the splitting of the ball, all creatures have already been believed as being in
it.
3. From the single light [Nur] was taken the elements that became the moon, the sun, the stars,
the trees, and all living things. They were all there.
4. Nur was already risen. He then went around.
5. God wanted to bring out his creations.
6. Allah scattered his radiance.
7. The Man is here, but his joints are not connected.
Task 5.1. On a half sheet of paper, write the correct pronoun that agrees with the antecedent in the
3
following sentences . Choose from options provided in the parentheses.
2 2008. n.a. http://samal-island.com/knowsamal.html

3 Born to be IGaCoS. http://samal-island.com/knowsamal.html
1. Visitors can expect to get __________ (his, hers, its, theirs) money‘s worth in Samal.
2. Year-round fiestas allow a tourist to celebrate to __________ (his, hers, its, theirs) heart‘s content.
3. Guests should prepare __________ (his, hers, its, theirs) bikes for Samal‘s vast rugged terrain.
4. Samal‘s shore is lined with coconuts, white sand, and cozy cottages. __________ (his, hers, its, theirs)
resorts offer the best venue to view the sunset.
5. The island offers great choices of unspoiled beaches, while __________ (his, hers, its, theirs)
unspoiled underground caverns can be best explored by foot.
Task 5.2. Complete the composition below by supplying the correct pronoun for the sentences. Write
your answers on a half sheet of paper.
4
The Legend of White Rock
by Rene Estremera
Putting Bato (White Rock) is a popular tourist spot on Samal island. (1) __________ is known not
only for its beauty but for its mystery as well. (2) __________ has puzzled both natives and visitors alike.
A story was once told.
Two friends went up to explore the Puting Bato at eight in the morning. But, (3) __________ were
not able to return home. Six native island dwellers waited for them to descend from the mountain.
(4) __________ patiently waited for the safe return of the climbers.
Hours had passed, but the hikers were still nowhere in sight. The eldest of the natives frowned
with concern. Though (5) __________ had expected this to happen, the incident confirmed one thing. The
supernatural beings spirits known to inhabit this particular island peak have taken (6) __________ victims
again.
The natives remember (7) __________ elders telling stories about a similar pair who climbed the
peak thirty years ago. The pair was not able to return home and was already considered dead by their
relatives.
After six years, the two were seen again descending from the mountain. (8) __________
amazingly bore no signs of aging or physical changes brought after six years of absence.
The natives still patiently waited for a sign. (9) __________ were worried but hopeful. If the lost
pair won't appear, (10) __________ would scale the mountain to search for the hikers. If still unfound,
__________ will see the hikers again, six years from now.
Task 5.3. Imagine that you will invite an international tourist to any of the famous
spots on Samal island. Use your notes in Task 3 (An Info Hunt) in writing a five-to-
seven-paragraph overview of this place. Make sure that you use correct pronoun-
antecedent agreement in your sentences. Underline the pronoun once and
underline its corresponding antecedent twice. Write your answers on a half-sheet of
paper.

Task 6. Samal Tripping
Listen intently as your teacher demonstrates how stress and intonation affect the presentation of
meaning. Next, listen to recording about Samal Island. On a half-sheet of paper, write down important
pieces of information that are signaled by shifts in stress and intonation. You will listen to the recording
thrice, so make sure that you review your answers through careful listening.
Task 7. Read Out (Home Work)
Use what you have learned from the discussion and listening activity on sentence stress and
5
intonation. Observe the rhythm rule guidelines in reading the text below. Practice reading this text at
home, in front of friends or family members, or in the presence of a mentor who can guide you.
Remember to follow the discussed guidelines as you practice. Be ready to present this to class on the
day specified by your teacher.
Generally, Samal Municipality is characterized by uneven

distribution of lowlands, wide expanse of mountain ranges and few
isolated hills. Tayapoc, renowned for its "Puting Bato" or White Stone is
Samal range's highest peak towering at 162 meters above the sea level.
The Sopsopon Plateau lies on its top with an approximate area of 400
hectares.
A number of waterways can also be found in the municipality,

though none of them is navigable. The Hagimit Falls which is
approximately 15 feet high, the Binoling River and several other natural
springs, namely: Supa, Alibungog, Tagbitinao, Tagbitan-ag, Aundanao,
Licup, San Jose and Tagdaliao Springs are among the few popular sites
found in the island.
The historical traces of the name of this developing island town

came to surface from information gathered through investigations and
personal interviews with some native chieftains on how the place got its
name. Based on unrecorded history, the place was sparsely populated
by few farming natives called Isamals who first settled the coastal areas
of the island. There were no known surveyed roads then except for a few
trails and pathways criss-crossing the lowland areas. Thick forest and
green land still covered the island's virgin soil.
Task 8. Know Your Words
Our conversations carry words with different formality levels known as register. Two of these are
colloquial and familiar. Study the definitions below.
Colloquial refers to the level language is used

in everyday speech. This presents a neutral tone, not
so much informal or formal. This is the level used in
ordinary conversations. This is the level used in
speaking with classmates, teachers, visitors, etc.
Familiar is a level of language that reflects the close relationship of the

people speaking. This intimacy is observed in the use of details and personal
references in speech. The authority that a speaker may have on others may also
be observed in familiar language. This is the level used when speaking with
people who are close to us.

Study the examples below and give three more pairs to complete the table. You may use a
dictionary for this task.
Colloquial Familiar
friend chum, pal, bro, sis, buddy
eat pig out, stuff oneself with, wolf
purchase, buy grab, score, get hold of
1. 1.
2. 2.
3. 3.
Task 9. Know Your Words and Speak up!
Part 1
It‘s now time to present the information that you gathered for Task 3 (An Info Hunt). This activity
will let you apply your knowledge on colloquial and familiar language. Get your notes and choose a
paragraph of information from your research.
On a new sheet of paper, write down colloquial words or phrases that present the information you
have to a potential tourist. Then, jot down informal words and phrases that present the same information
to your group of friends. You may use a dictionary or thesaurus for this task. Exchange notes with a
seatmate and review each other‘s answers.
Part 2 – Home Work
As an assignment, have a separate conversation with 1) a student from another year level and 2)
a close relative. Use the notes for this task as your target words and phrases in your conversations with
these people. Be ready to share with the class about how the conversation goes.
Task 10. Is Writing Right?
Form a group. Brainstorm and come up with the following:
Group 1 – Top Reasons for Writing Down Myths
Group 2 – Top Reasons for Writing Down Information
Group 3 – Top Reasons for Writing About One‘s Day
Group 4 – Top Reasons for Writing Literary Texts
Group 5 – Top Reasons for Writing Down Lists

YOUR FINAL TASK
My Family’s Genesis
Get the K-W-L Table that you did for Task 1. Based on discussions, fill out the third
column of the table.
‘GENESIS’
What I Know What I Want to Know What I Learned
Settling in a new location or making a mark in a specific place is usually challenging. Several
adjustments have to be made and problems have to be solved. Hence, these genesis stories of
relocation, starting anew, or establishing beginnings are good materials for myths. Review the information
presented by your K-W-L Table. Use these points as springboard for your next activity.
Ask your parents or grandparents about how they or their ancestors settled in the place where
they are now. Research in the library to enrich the information from your elders. Use your imagination to
transform your gathered information into your family‘s genesis. Write a family myth in a series of three
five-to seven-sentence paragraphs. Apply your knowledge of pronoun-antecedent agreement. Include an
appropriate graphic organizer that shows the major events in the myth. You will be graded according to
the following rubrics.
20 - Correct use of language for coherence

20 - Creative use of story elements (i.e. characters, setting, conflict, etc.)
20 - Accurate display of grammar, especially of pronoun-antecedent agreement
20 - Effective use of gathered information (i.e. from elders and from library sources)
10 - Appropriate use of language register
10 - Creative use of graphic organizer
100%

Lesson 5
Recalling Our Ancestors’ Beliefs
YOUR GOALS
Lesson 5 will help you discover how your ancestors explained the world around them. You
will relate these olden stories with the current situation in your world. Consequently, you will realize that
the stories of before remain relevant in today‘s modern world. For this lesson, you must aim to:
1. Deduce the advantages and disadvantages of a given situation through the help of various
graphic organizers
2. Infer the meaning of symbols from the text
3. Use context clues to get the meaning of given words
4. Compare and contrast the three legends
5. Explain the value of knowing the consequences of one‘s actions
6. Distinguish between colloquial language and slang
7. Read texts using the appropriate intonation pattern
8. Present resolutions in correct simple sentences
9. Locate information in different sections of the library
10. Respond to ideas, issues, and concerns presented in the reading selections
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. My Multi-Layered Sky
On a half sheet of paper, write all the ideas that you associate with the word ‗sky.‘ Write your
answers around the drawing. Draw lines to connect them to the cloud. Copy the model below.
Sky

Task 2. What would life be like?
Imagine how life would be like if we have a sky that is low. Copy the graphic organizer below on a
sheet of paper. List the advantages and disadvantages inside the corresponding arrows.
1.
2.
3.
Disadvantages Advantages
Sky
1.
2.
3.
YOUR TEXT
In all these stories, what is the reason that made the sky rise?
Why the Sky Is High

(Tagalog)
In the early days, when the sky was still low, two brothers named Ingat and Daskol lived with their
parents on earth.
As their names indicate, Ingat was careful in everything he did and was therefore his father‘s right
hand man. He was always helping with the work in the field and his parents were very pleased with him.
On the other hand, Daskol did his work sloppily. In the absence of a daughter in the family, the
house work came to be Daskol‘s responsibility. He fetched water, cleaned the house, and did the
cooking. He also did the pounding of the palay that his father and Ingat harvested. Even in pounding,
Daskol lived up to his name. Half of the grain he pounded scattered and fell to the ground. Being naturally
lazy and impatient, he did not like the work of pounding rice.
One day, Daskol had to pound a greater quantity of palay than usual. He was irritated because
every time he raised the pestle higher, and every time it hit the sky, the sky would be raised. In his hurry,
Daskol did not notice that the sky was rising. When he finished pounding the rice, he looked up and
discovered that the sky had risen and it is where it is today.
Why the Sky Is High

(Iloko)
In the olden days, the only people on earth were a man and a woman. One day, they ate venison
which the man had brought home from hunting. But because the bones were very big and they wanted to
eat the marrow, they thought of pounding the bones. The woman removed her comb and necklace and
hung them on the low sky. But whenever she pounded, she would hit the sky. So she requested the sky
to rise higher. It thundered and the sky rose higher. Still the pestle hit the sky. So the woman again asked
the sky to go higher. It thundered and the sky rose higher. Still the pestle hit the sky. So the woman
again asked the sky to go higher. Again it thundered and the sky rose as high as could be. When the
woman remembered what she had hung, it was too late. They became the moon and the stars.
Why the Sky Is High
(Hiligaynon)
In the olden days the sky was so low---so low that it could be reached by a stick of ordinary
length. The people in those days said that God had created the sky in such a way that he could hear his
people when they called to him. In turn, God could send his blessings to earth as soon as men needed
them. Because of this close connection between God and his subjects, the people were provided for, and
they did not need to work.
Whenever they wanted to eat, they could simply call God. Before their request was made, almost,
the food would be on the table; but after the expulsion of Adam and Eve, God made men work for their
own living. With this change in their condition came the custom of holding feasts, when the men would
rest from their labors.
One day one of the chiefs, Abing by name, held a feast. Many people came to enjoy it. A sayao,
or native war-dance, was given in honor of the men belonging to the chief, and it was acted by men
brandishing spears. While acting, one of the actors, who was drunk, tried to show his skill, but he forgot
that the sky was so low. When he darted his spear, he happened to pierce the sky, and one of the gods
was wounded. This angered God the Father: so he raised the sky as we have it today far from the earth.
Task 1. Guess Through Context
Below are some of the words in the selection. Copy the table on a half-sheet of paper. Guess the
meaning of each word. Do this by going back to the text and searching for context clues (i.e. other words
or phrases that point to the meaning of a word). Write your inferred definition on the column labeled „My
Guess‟ and write down helpful context clues under Column 3. When you‘re done, wait for the signal to
confirm your guesses through the help of a dictionary. Write the dictionary definition on Column 3. Write
an insightful sentence related to the text read on Column 4.
My Guess Context Clues Dictionary Definition Sample Sentence

1. sloppily
2. pestle
3. venison
4. marrow
5. expulsion

Task 2. Before and After
Review the lives of the characters before and after the sky rose. Copy the graphic organizer
below on a half-sheet of paper. Then, list down your observations inside the arrows.
Before the Sky Rose After the Sky Rose

1. 1.
2. 2.
3. 3.
Task 3. Compare and Contrast
Form groups. Copy the Venn diagram below on a whole sheet of paper. This will help you
compare and contrast the three versions of the legend. Write the similarities on the overlapping areas of
the circles and write the differences on the part outside the overlap. Be ready to present your work.
Tagalog
Version
Hiligaynon Iloko
Version Version
Task 4. Share Your Insights
Find a group. Take out the semantic map you made for Task 1 (My Multi-Layered Sky) and the
graphic organizer you made for Task 2 (Before and After). Bring your semantic map with you as you join
your group. Answer the following questions and be ready to present your answer to the class. Write your
group‘s answers on a half-sheet of paper.
1. What does the sky symbolize in the three selections?

2. Is the rising of the sky a punishment? Why or why not?
3. What are the consequences of having a high sky?

Task 5. What Say You?
Part 1
In Lesson 4, you learned to distinguish between colloquial language and familiar language. For
this task, use your background knowledge on colloquial language to determine its difference with slang.
On a half sheet of paper, classify the items below under the two given categories. Review your answers.
Then, give a definition of slang language based on the entries you have classified under it.
friend chum bro sis

best friend mate classmate ally
sidekick buddy main man associate
Part 2 (Home Work)

Compose a pair of sentences for every given guideline. One sentence should use colloquial
language and the other should use slang. Write your answer on the back of the sheet you used for Part 1.
Compose a/n:
1. Request made by a character to the sky
2. Statement expressing a complaint about a low sky
3. Offensive question that could force the sky rise
4. Exclamatory statement expressing a character‘s reaction upon seeing a high sky
Task 6. Listen Up
Part 1
Listen to the recording that will be played. Answer the questions that the teacher will post on the
board. Write your answer on a half sheet of paper.
Part 2
Listen as your teacher models two intonation patterns. Listen to the recording for the second time.
Take note of the intonation patterns observed by the speaker on the sentences. Identify the intonation
pattern used for every statement that your teacher will identify. Use the symbols below. Write your
answers on the same sheet of paper you used for Part 1.
 Rising intonation  Falling intonation

Listen as the teacher plays the recording one last time. Review your answers. Remember how
the intonation patterns sound.
Task 7. Ozone Press-Con
Your teacher will play the role of United Nations Representative for Ozone Protection. You will
simulate a press conference where students like you get to express their ideas about the destruction of
the ozone layer.
Part 1-Preparation
On a sheet of paper, formulate three short sentences : 1) a sentence that asks a question, 2) a
sentence that expresses a reaction, and 3) a sentence that offers an encouragement. Review your
sentences. Practice reading them aloud with the proper intonation pattern. Work with a partner. Check
each other‘s sentences and intonation patterns.
Part 2-Press Conference

Participate in the press conference. Raise your hand and say an appropriate sentence when it is
relevant in the discussion. Deliver your sentence naturally.
Task 8. Save the Ozone!
Read the text below.
How to Protect the Ozone Layer
―Any long trip begins with a first step.‖ To raise consciousness is the first step to protect our
damaged ozone layer. You should be responsible. Do simple ways to save our ozone layer. This will
reduce levels of pollution and money. Consider the following tips.
 Buy energy saving gadgets and bulbs.

 Maintain clean air-conditioning. Malfunctioning air-conditioning emits CFCs.
 Use alternative means of transport. Try riding buses or bicycles. Try walking.
 Opt to buy a refrigerator or an air-conditioning unit without CFC.
 Reduce the use of your car and other gadgets.
 Buy energy saving gadgets and bulbs.
The text above presents tips to protect the ozone layer. The concise presentation of information
makes the tips easy to understand and remember. The structure of the sentences also aids you in
remembering the message. This is because the message is presented using simple sentences.
Answer the following questions on a half sheet of paper.

1. What are the main parts of a simple sentence?
2. When is it appropriate to use simple sentences?
3. Which two sentences in the text would you consider as good
examples of simple sentences?
Task 7. Grammar Review
Exercise 7.1
Below are some more tips to protect the ozone layer. Rewrite them to simple sentences. Write
your answers on a half-sheet of paper.
1. Avoid using fire extinguishers with halogenated hydrocarbon since it is very aggressive substance for
the ozone layer.
2. Avoid buying insulating material made up of CFC. Instead you can use dark chipboard cork that
performs the same function and does not contaminate the environment.
3. Report whether you know that products with bromomethane are used in some sown fields and crops
because these substances are contaminating.
Exercise 7.2 (Home Work)
Research at the library on the consequences on the ozone layer destruction. Compose a five-to-
seven-sentence paragraph that presents four to five harmful effects of a damaged ozone layer. Make
sure that your work has all the parts of a simple paragraph. Write this on a half sheet of paper.
Task 8. A Library Trip
Know more about the sky and the ozone layer by exploring the different areas of your library.
Copy the table below on a half-sheet of paper. Go to the library. Identify the library section/area where
you can find the information on Column 1. Take down the source title, author, and call number. Work
quietly.

Library Source
Section
Where Given
Title Author Call
Info Can be Number (if
found applicable)
1. Word history of ‗sky‘
2. Other versions of
―Why the sky is high‖
3. News clipping about
the environment
4. A video
documentary about the
ozone layer
5. Online article about
saving the ozone layer
Task 9. The State of Our Skies

Work with a buzz partner. Answer the given questions as a pair. Be ready to share your answers
with the class. Write your answers on a half-sheet of paper.
1. Recall the conflict in the three legends you read and the issues about the ozone layer.
What are the similarities or differences that they share?
2. How do you think would the characters in the legend adjust to the current environment
where there is a hole on the ozone layer? How do you think would people like you live in a
world where the sky is low?
3. Recall the associations you presented in Task 1 (My Multi-Layered Sky). Since the ozone
layer is roughly a layer of the sky, what could a gaping hole in the sky symbolize?
4. What three realizations have you made from the discussions in this lesson?
YOUR FINAL TASK
A Better Me, A Better World

Remember that our actions always have consequences. This is reflected by the three legends
and the texts about ozone layer destruction. Be more aware of the effects of your actions by writing down
a list of ten resolutions: five of which should be personal, while the other five should concern the
environment. Write these in bulleted/numbered form. Use simple sentences for your resolutions. A one-to-
three-sentence elaboration of every resolution should be included. Consider the example below. Do this
on a whole sheet of paper. You may add relevant drawings and photos to your work. Be prepared to read
your work with the proper intonation pattern in class.
Example: I will jog once a week.

Who doesn‘t want to be healthy? I need to shed off 5 pounds to meet my ideal weight target.
Criteria for Evaluation:
20 Value of insights (as related to all the texts read)

20 Correct construction of simple sentences
20 Grammar and Coherence in writing
20 Reading with proper intonation pattern
10 Use of proper language register
10 Creativity and resourcefulness in presenting an environment-friendly output
100

Lesson 6
Revisiting My Past
YOUR GOALS
This lesson takes you to the experiences of the past that determines our present. Discover
this past by knowing the origin of things and how it affects us as a people. After revisiting the past, you
must be able to:
1. Use pictures and context clues to get meanings of words and phrases
2. Determine how pitch, phrasing, and pacing affect understanding of a message
3. Observe the right pitch, phrasing, and pacing when reading texts or passages aloud or
participating in conversations
4. Use appropriate idiomatic expressions in a variety of basic interpersonal communicative
situations
5. To organize ideas in the myths using comparison-contrast chart
6. Formulate correct simple sentences
7. Recognize the various sections of the library
8. Use materials in the different sections in the library
9. Write a five-to-seven sentence paragraph on information gathered
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. Word of Mouth
a. Below is a group of related words. What image do these words create? Draw it in the box.
famine drought parched sear

barren

b. This is a breechclout. Who
usually wears it? What
material is it made of?
c. Corrupt government officials, who are accused of usurpation of power, are not trusted by people.
What are examples of actions showing usurpation of power?
d. People express remonstrances against this usurpation of power by corrupt officials. How do
people show their objections or oppositions to this practice?
e. Justice is tarried when the filing of cases is delayed. What word in the sentence is synonymous
with tarried?
Task 2. Memory Lane
What are the different colors of rice? Listen to the teacher as he or she reads ―The Rice Myth‖
(Bohol). While listening, take note of the following:
1. events that explain why rice is white and red

2. pitch, phrasing, and pacing demonstrated by the teacher
YOUR TEXT
The Rice Myth

(Bohol)
Task 1. Check It Up
Answer the following questions:
1. What was the condition of Bohol during that time?

2. What did Sappia do to help the hungry people of Bohol?
3. How did the white and red rice come to be?
Task 2. Mean What You Say
1. Form small groups with at least six members.

2. Discuss the lines by identifying the emotions felt by the characters and by describing the
conditions of things in the story.
3. Assign members who will read paragraphs 1-3, 4, and 5-6.
4. Practice reading your parts.
5. Present a choral reading of the text to the class.

Task 3. Filling the Gaps
Read silently the Ibaloi, Tagalog, and Nabaloi versions of ―The Origins of Rice.‖ Take note of the
similarities and differences among these versions (including the Bohol version).
Task 1. Establishing Links
1. Complete the table on the different versions of ―The Origin of Rice.‖
Bohol Ibaloi Tagalog Nabaloi

Situation of things
in the beginning
Gods/goddesses
Humans
Purpose of creation
Manner of creation
Results of creation
2. Answer the questions below.
a. In what aspects are the four versions similar and different?

b. What traits did the gods/goddesses show?
c. What do the stories say about the relationship between humans and their gods/goddesses?
d. Share your answers with the class. Support your answers by reading lines from the versions.
e. Make use of appropriate pitch, phrasing, and pacing for your class to understand more your
message.
Task 2. Finding Meaning
1. Idiomatic expressions are common phrases or sayings whose meanings cannot be

understood by the individual words or parts. One kind of idiomatic expressions is the phrasal
verb. Below are examples of these expressions and their meanings.
Idiomatic expressions (phrasal verbs) Meanings

Care for To show likeness or fondness
Carry out To do, to practice
Go on To continue
Take part To participate
Take pity To show compassion or kindness for
Win over To gain support
2. Use the given idiomatic expressions in meaningful sentences.

3. As a homework, look for at least five idiomatic expressions and their meanings. Also, use
each expression in a sentence. Use a table for your answer.

Idiomatic Meanings Sentences
Expressions
4. Form groups of five.

5. Using your assignment, make a pictionary of idiomatic expressions. Be creative.
Task 3. Making It Simple
Below are sentences about the myths you have read. Underline the simple subject and encircle the
simple predicate in each sentence.
1. The people hunted fruit and fish for their food.

2. ―All the fires in the village shall be extinguished.‖
3. Sappia bared her bosom and squeezed a drop of milk into the weeds.
4. Kabunian and Bugan enjoyed the canyao in their magnificent house.
5. ―I am weak and old and cannot find my food.‖
Task 4. Supply and Demand
Read through the passage. Fill in the blanks with appropriate subjects or verbs to complete it.
Choose your answers from the box.
the world they Filipino have reduced
spends minimize adds it
THE SIGNIFICANCE OF RICE IN THE PHILIPPINE SETTING

(an adaptation)
Rice is the staple food of the Filipinos.

1.__________ consume about 33,000 tons of rice daily.
Approximately, 80% of the total population
2. __________ almost 1/4 of their income on rice
alone. Thus, a slight 3. __________ in the price of this
commodity will greatly affect the standard of living for
most Filipinos.
Currently, 4. __________ is experiencing a
global food crisis. There has been an increase in
demand for rice all over the world especially in China, Africa, the Middle East and India. Because of this,
the top exporting countries of rice 5. __________ their exports significantly to keep domestic prices low
and to counter inflation. The Philippines, being the world‘s top importer of rice, is directly affected by the
global crisis.
Source: Academics, Research and Development Department of Ateneo Economics Association, 2008 May 31. ―THE
SIGNIFICANCE OF RICE IN THE PHILIPPINE SETTING”. Analyzing the Rice Crisis in the Philippines. Retrieved January 22,
2012 from http://ateneoeconomics.wordpress.com
Task 5. Talk of the Town
1. Choose a topic from the list.

a. Rice varieties
b. Rice dishes
c. Fast food chains offering unlimited rice
d. Rice in every Filipino meal
e. Rice and Filipino superstitions
2. Write down ideas you want to share about your chosen topic. To make these ideas clear, use
simple sentences.
3. Share your ideas by doing the following:
a. Form a small group of five members.
b. Give every member a time to share his/her ideas.
c. After each sharing, ask questions for clarifications or give additional information.
YOUR FINAL TASK
Task 1. Library Visit

With your group mates, work on the task assigned to you.
Group 1: a. Go to the General Reference Section of the library.

b. Using the atlas, locate at least seven rice-producing countries.
c. Find out what is common among these countries.
d. Make a visual presentation of your answers.
Group 2: a. Go to the Filipiniana Section of the library.

b. Research on popular dishes in the Philippines.
c. Write the names of these dishes and the provinces and regions they are from.
d. Find out what makes these dishes popular.
e. Make a poster promoting these dishes.
Group 3: a. Go to the Serials Section of the library.

b. Go through newspapers and magazines and look for exotic dishes.
c. Determine if these dishes will be appealing to Filipinos‘ taste buds.
d. Create a menu featuring these exotic dishes.
Task 2: The Living Past

1. After doing the research activities, what have you learned about our values as a people and
the richness of Filipino culture?
2. Write your answers in a well-written five-to-seven sentence paragraph. Express your ideas in
simple sentences.
3. Give your paragraph a title.

Lesson 7
Connecting to My Past
YOUR GOALS
This lesson makes you understand how our ancestors lived in the past as well as makes us
appreciate the richness of our own culture. As you relate to the past, you must be able to:
1. Use pictures and context clues to get meanings of words and phrases
2. Determine the effects of facial expressions and eye contact in understanding a message
3. Observe the right oral language conventions when inquiring about, summarizing, or reacting
to what has been listened to, read, or observed
4. Use appropriate idiomatic expressions in a variety of basic interpersonal communicative
situations
5. To organize ideas in the legends using comparison-contrast chart
6. Formulate compound sentences
7. Use archives, vertical files, and electronic databases to locate information
8. Write a five-to-seven sentence paragraph on information gathered
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. More Than Words
a. An orchard is a place where fruit trees are grown.

Inside the box, draw fruit trees that can be seen in an
orchard.
b. Give the meaning of the words in bold letters in the

following sentences.
i. The little children are cautioned not to play near

the construction site.
ii. Children who usually misbehave are called rascals.
iii. As a penalty for their disobedience, the children
are asked to help planting seedlings.
An orchard
c. Underline the word synonymous to goddess.
The goddess of the mountain provided the people with all their needs. She was their (hostess,
patroness, priestess).
Task 2. Do You Remember?
Have you heard of or read legends about how monkeys came to be? Listen to the teacher as he
or she reads ―The First Monkey‖ (Iloko). While listening, take note of the following:
a. characters
b. setting
c. plot
d. facial expressions and eye contact shown by the teacher
e. pitch, volume, phrasing, intonation, and stress used in the oral reading
YOUR TEXT
The First Monkey

(Iloko)
Task 1. Get It Right
1. What did the goddess ask the girl to do?

2. Why was the girl punished by the goddess?
3. What does the story explain?
Task 2. Say What You Mean

1. Find a partner.
2. Discuss the lines by identifying the emotions felt by the characters in the story.
3. Take turns in reading aloud the speaking lines in the text.
4. Use appropriate facial expressions and eye contact in delivering the lines.
Task 3. Making Links
Read silently the Maranao and Tagalog versions of ―The First Monkey.‖ Look for the similarities
and differences among these versions (including the Iloko version).
Task 1. Finding Connections
1. Complete the table on the different versions of The First Monkey.
Iloko Maranao Tagalog

Main character/s
Characteristics
Problem/Conflict
Resolution
2. Answer the questions below.
a. What are the similarities and differences among the stories of ―The First Monkey‖?
b. What characteristics of humans are shown in the three stories? Do you believe that humans
have these characteristics?
c. Share your answers with the class. Make sure that they understand your message by stating
clear ideas, supporting your arguments, and making use of appropriate facial expressions,
eye contact, and effective oral language.

Task 2. Clearing the Way
1. There are different ways of saying things. One of which is using idiomatic expressions. Below
are examples of idiomatic expressions used in the texts. Guess their meanings based on the
sentences.
a. ―Take this cotton, clean it, and make out of it a dress for yourself.‖
b. He decided to pay the old man a visit.
c. He quickly gathered some stones which he threw at the children.
d. They begged of him to punish the selfish old man.
e. For everything that she wanted to eat was provided for her by her patroness.
2. In triad, complete the comic strips by supplying the speaking lines with the following idiomatic
expressions. Be creative. Give your strip an appropriate title.
Idiomatic Expression Meaning

Catch on To understand
Look over To examine
Hand in To submit
Pick out To choose
Cope with To adapt
Task 3. To Become One
Match the sentences in column A with those in column B to form meaningful sentences. Use and, or, but,
and for in combining the sentences. Write your sentences on the space provided.
A B
1. Monkeys can be anywhere A. They peel it first.
from just a few centimeter tall.
2. Monkeys never eat a banana B. It is angry at something.
as it is.
3. Monkeys make different C. Some species can grow more
voices, facial expressions, and than a meter tall.
body movements.
4. When the monkey yawns, it is D. They use them to
tired. communicate.
1. _________________________________________________________________________
2. _________________________________________________________________________
3. _________________________________________________________________________
4. _________________________________________________________________________
Task 4. Complete Me
Read through the passage. Supply the blanks with and, or, or but to complete its thought.
Animals in Mythology
(an adaptation)
Since the beginning of human history, people have lived in close

contact with animals and have developed myths and legends about them.
All kinds of creatures play important roles in mythology. A myth can give
special meaning or extraordinary qualities to common animals such as
frogs and bears, 1. ____other creatures found in myths like dragons and
unicorns never existed in the real world.
Animals may serve as substitute for humans or human characteristics. In some legends, animals
perform heroic deeds 2. _____ they may also be the source of wisdom and power.
Animals often have a dualistic quality in mythology. They can be both helpful and harmful to
humans. They provide people with food,3. _____, they can be dangerous. As sources and symbols,
animals represent the mystery and power of the natural world, which can create or destroy
Source: ―Animals in Mythology‖. Myths Encyclopedia. Retrieved January 21, 2012 from http://www.mythencyclopedia.com/Am-
Ar/Animals-in-Mythology.html#b
Task 5. Let’s Talk
1. Work with a partner.

2. Choose one topic from the list that interests you.
a. Animals as humans
b. Scientific view on origin of humans
c. Reward and punishment
3. Take turns in sharing your ideas and in giving your reactions whether you agree or disagree in
what is shared.
YOUR FINAL TASK
Task 1. Digging Up
1. Look for different versions of a legend or a myth.
2. Use library resources such as archives, vertical files, and electronic sources in your research.
3. Summarize the legends or myths using a comparison-contrast chart.
Task 2. Treasuring My Past

1. After reading these texts, what have you realized about our ancestors as creators of these myths
and legends, our values as a people, and the richness of Filipino culture?
2. Write your answers in a well-written five-to-seven sentence paragraph. You may use compound
sentences in expressing your ideas.
3. Give your paragraph an appropriate title.

Lesson 8
Meeting and Being Heroes
YOUR GOALS
This lesson allows you to discover how heroes are made. Know who the
heroes are and what they do in the eyes of our ancestors --- and compare them to the
heroes of today. You must aim to:
1. Explain the effect of posture and bodily gestures in understanding a message

2. Observe rules on proper speaking when inquiring about, summarizing, or
reacting to what has been listened to/read or observed
3. Use appropriate idiomatic expressions in different communication situations
4. Use what you already know to understand what you read/hear
5. Use information presented in an epic to infer, to evaluate, and to express critical
ideas
6. Analyze the elements of epics, their intended purpose, and the setting during
which they were produced
7. Identify the parts of an informative text that make it effective in carrying its
message to the intended audience
8. Respond to ideas, issues, and concerns presented in an epic in a creative form
9. Retell a chosen myth or legend in a series of three five-to-seven-sentence
paragraphs
10. Make compound sentences
11. Use the special collections in the library such as archives, vertical files, and
electronic databases to locate information
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. What Do You Think?
Choose a partner. Take turns sharing your answers to the following questions:
1. Who are heroes?
2. What are the qualities of heroes?
3. What are the powers of heroes?
Be ready to explain your answers to the class.
Task 2. Who Are They?
Watch and listen to the speaker carefully. On a half sheet of paper, complete the
table on the next page as you do this.

Heroes Speaker‘s Gestures
Task 3. Can You Guess?
Fill in the boxes below to form a word from the given story about a heroic brother.
The meaning of the word and the paragraph number where it can be found are provided
to help you accomplish this task. Write your answer on a half sheet of paper.
ACROSS DOWN
1 lead into error (paragraph 2) 2 put under a spell (paragraph 2)
4 defeated, won over (paragraph 3) 3 wild (paragraph 1)
5 courage, bravery (paragraph 3)
6 very violent (paragraph 1)
The Heroic Brother

1
Everyone in the land of Barogan feared the deep dark woods. The people were afraid not only of
savage animals that lived there but of fierce monsters and giants that walked around the forest as well.
2
There were also stories about creatures that could change their appearance to deceive people. One
of these was a serpent that could change into a lady. It had enchanted many of those who explored the
woods. Some of them were turned into stone while the others were put to sleep forever.
3
One day, a man with extraordinary strength went into the forest in search of his missing brother.
Unafraid, he fought every monster and giant with gallantry, until all of them were vanquished. The man
returned home with his brother and the people of Barogan never had to fear the deep dark woods again.
1 2

YOUR TEXT
Ibalon
(Three Heroes of the Bicol Epic)
1
When the hero Baltog came to the rich land of
Ibalon, many monsters still roamed around in its very dark
forest. Baltog, born in Baltavara to the brave clan of Lipod,
was the first to cultivate the fields in the rich land of Ibalon.
2
Then the Tandayag attacked and destroyed
Baltog‘s fields and crops. The Tandayag was a monstrous
wild boar but the hero Baltog was not afraid. One night, he
waited for the Tandayag and wrestled with it with all his
might. The Tandayag had very long fangs. The earth shook
at the Tandayag‘s step. But Baltog was strong and brave.
He was able to pin down the monstrous wild boar and tear
out its mouth.
3
Baltog carried the Tandayag and hung it on a talisay tree in front of his house in Tondol. The
people celebrated when they learned of the victory of their king Baltog. The clans of Panicuason and
Asog came over to marvel at the monstrous wild boar in Ibalon.
4
At that time the hero Handiong came with a band of warriors to the land of Ibalon. Handiong and
his men had to fight thousands of battles, and face many dangers to defeat the monsters. They first
fought the one-eyed giants in the land of Ponon. They fought without rest for ten months until all the one-
eyed giants were killed.
5
They went to the lair of the giant flying fishes called Tiburon which had slimy, scaly, and hardy
flesh and sawlike teeth that could crush rocks. Handiong and his men did not stop until they vanquished
every Tiburon.
6
They tamed the fierce tamaraws. They drove away the giant Sarimaw which was larger than an
elephant and very fierce. They used their spears and arrows to kill all the crocodiles which were bigger
than boats. The savage monkeys were frightened and hid when they
saw the rivers and swamps of Ibalon turn red with blood.
7
Oriol was the hardest to kill. A serpent with a beautiful voice, Oriol could change its image to
deceive enemies. Oriol had escaped every trap and disappeared.
8
All by himself, Handiong looked for Oriol in the heart of the forest. He followed the beautiful voice
and was almost enchanted by it in his pursuit. It is said that Oriol admired Handiong‘s bravery and
gallantry. Thus, the serpent taught the hero how to conquer the monsters until peace came to the whole
Ibalon.
9
Handiong built a town in Isarog and a season of progress followed. Under Handiong‘s leadership,
the people planted rice which they named after him. He built the first boat to ride the waves of Ibalon
seas. Because of his good example, inventors came forth from his people. Ginantong made the plow,
harrow, and other farming tools. Hablom invented the first loom for weaving abaca clothes. Dinahon, an
Aeta, created the stove, cooking pot, earthen jar, and other kitchen utensils. The brilliant Sural thought of
the alphabet and started to write on white rock. It was a golden period in Ibalon when even slaves were
respected under the laws of Handiong.
10
But there came the big flood freed by Unos, with earthquakes and the eruption of the volcanoes
of Hantik, Kolasi, and Isarog. Rivers dried up and the seas receded. The earth parted, mountains sank,
and many towns in Ibalon were destroyed.
11
Then appeared the giant Rabot, half-man half-beast, with terrible powers.
12
Bantong, Handiong‘s good friend, was ordered to kill the new monster in Ibalon. He took with him
a thousand warriors to attack Rabot‘s den. Bantong used his wisdom against Rabot. He did not attack the
giant‘s den right away but instead observed Rabot‘s ways. He saw many rocks around the den. They
were people turned into rock by Rabot.
13
He also learned that Rabot loved to sleep. When Rabot slept very soundly, Bantong was able to
go near him. The giant died with a single stab by the brave and wise Bantong. Ibalon was at peace once
more.
Task 1. I Know It!
Complete the following table as you read the selection. Do this on a half sheet of
paper. Be ready to explain your answers to your classmates.
Hero Enemy/ies How he won over What else he did Traits

his enemy/ies for Ibalon shown
Task 2. Make the Grade!
On a half sheet of paper, make a report card for each hero. Using the given
guide, grade how well each one saved Ibalon. Remark on the heroism of each and
choose the most heroic among them. You may refer to your answers in the previous
task (Task 1, ‗I Know It!‘) to help you do this. Be ready to explain your answers to your
classmates.
GRADE
A – Outstanding
B – Excellent
C – Satisfactory
D – Needs Improvement

Report Card for:
____________________
Name of Hero
Grade
Strength
Courage
Intelligence
Perseverance
Other Traits
Remarks
He is ________ heroic because
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________.
Task 3. Say You, Say Me
Based on your answers in the previous task (Task 2, ‗Make the Grade!‘), discuss
with your group mates who you think is the most heroic among the three characters and
why. After the discussion, rate how well you participated in the task by accomplishing
the given scale on a half sheet of paper.
Action Very much Somehow Not really

I presented my ideas clearly.
I waited for my turn to speak.
I chose the right words to express my
preferences and opinions.
I used appropriate words to agree or
disagree.
I used proper expressions when inquiring.
I chose appropriate words when giving
reasons and explanations.
I used proper expressions to summarize my
ideas.
I used appropriate gestures and posture
when speaking.
I listened to the one speaking.
I paid attention to the speaker‘s posture and
gestures.

Task 4. Then and Now
Read the following text. Fill in the table to show the similarities and differences
between this text and ―Ibalon‖ in terms of topic, setting, purpose, intended audience,
and relevance today. Do this on a half sheet of paper.
Overseas Filipino Workers as Everyday Heroes
1
Overseas Filipino Workers take a huge risk when they travel and work
abroad. OFWs sacrifice a lot in order to give a better life for their families.
They are heroes in their own right because they live to help their families and
sometimes even other people they do not even know, but are in need of their
help and support.
2
Heroes think of other people first before they think of themselves. Heroes are unique individuals
that sacrifice themselves for the sake of others. OFWs face great challenges head on with only their faith,
hope, and determination to carry them through. They strive hard to ensure that their children‘s future
would be bright and that they would live a life that they have dreamed of.
3
What are OFWs made of? They are made of determination, courage, a risk-taking attitude, a
heart of gold, and other qualities that make them everyday heroes to a lot of people. They go beyond
their call of duty to help their families, to help their country and sometimes people in need, even if it
means putting themselves in danger.
4
You do not have to be an OFW to be a hero. You are a hero if you sacrifice a part of yourself to
help other people who are in need. You are a hero if you can make someone else smile despite the trials
and challenges he has. You are a hero if you can make others feel better about themselves. If you do any
of these, then you are a hero in a person‘s heart.
“Ibalon” “OFWs as Everyday Heroes”
Topic
Setting
Purpose
Intended audience
Relevance today
Task 5. Here and There

Read the given excerpt from an earlier retelling in verse of the Bicol epic ―Ibalon‖.
Take note of the underlined phrase.
Sing and tell us of the kings

of… courage
and the war that took place
until the defeat of Oriol.
―Took place‖ in the stanza means ―happened‖. It is an idiomatic expression or

idiom. Its meaning is different from what the individual words literally mean. Idioms are
used for different purposes and in varied situations.
Read the following idioms and their meanings. With a partner, use each idiom in
a sentence. Then identify to whom you will say it and in what situation. Do this on one
half sheet of paper.
1. grab a seat (sit down)

2. zip it (stop talking)
3. at your earliest convenience (as soon as possible)
4. look up to (admire)
5. on cloud nine (very happy)
6. on the ball (alert)
7. a piece of cake (very easy)
8. in a nutshell (as briefly as possible)
9. once in a blue moon (rarely)
10. an act of God (a natural and unavoidable event
that results in great loss)
Sentence with Idiom Person/s Situation

Spoken to

Task 6. Match me!
Make a compound sentence by matching the independent clause in Column A

with the appropriate clause in Column B. To help you do this task, coordinating
conjunctions in bold face have been added at the start of the clauses in Column B.
Do this task on your notebook.
Column A Column B
_____1. Overseas Filipino workers sacrifice a. but not too many are reading
a lot when they work abroad, them.
_____2. Heroes are born every day, b. nor do you have to die to
become a hero.
_____3. Many stories about Philippine c. yet only a few appreciate their
heroes can be found in books, efforts.
_____4. Many Filipinos go overseas to work d. so you can have rice to eat.
_____5. You don't have to be in the front e. and you may be one of them.
page of the news,
_____6. The poor farmer works long and f. or we can start caring more for
hard in the fields others.
_____7. We can keep thinking only of g. for they want to give their families
ourselves, a better future.
Task 7. More, please!
Add an appropriate conjunction and independent clause to make a compound

sentence. Be guided by the given description of the situation or relationship in the target
sentence. Do this with a partner. Write your answers on a half sheet of paper.
1. Reading Filipino epic stories allows the reader to discover a lost culture
rich in magnificence, magic, and bravery. (cause and effect)
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________

2. Philippine epics are usually named after the hero of the story.(addition)
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
3. Some Filipinos don‘t know about their rich cultural heritage. (negation)
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
4. A lot of people think that the Spaniards erased all traces of our epics.
(contrast)
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
5. We should look back at the past. (alternative)
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
6. The Spaniards successfully spread their faith and culture. (surprise)
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
7. Our epics show us where we came from and what we were like before the
coming of the colonizers. (cause and effect)
___________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________

Task 8. Ready, get set, write!
Recall the myths and legends you have read. Choose one and retell it in three
paragraphs. Each paragraph should have three to five sentences. Box the compound
sentences and encircle the coordinating conjunctions in them. Use the given rubric as a
guide.
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
Accuracy of The retelling The retelling The retelling The retelling does
Retelling includes all major includes all major includes all major not include major
points and several points and 1-2 points in the points in the
significant details significant details myth/legend. myth/legend.
in the myth/ in the myth/
legend. legend.
Sequence The retelling The retelling The retelling The retelling of the
captures the captures the captures the myth/legend is out
myth/legend in myth/legend myth/legend with of sequence.
correct sequence in correct several omissions,
with all important sequence with 2-3 but maintains
parts. omissions. sequence of those
told.
Connections/ Connections Connections Connections The retelling

Transitions between events, between events, between events, seems very
ideas, and ideas, and ideas, and disconnected and
feelings in the feelings in the feelings in the it is very difficult to
retelling are retelling are retelling are figure out the
creative, clearly clearly expressed sometimes hard to narrative. Most
expressed and and appropriate. figure out. More clauses are
appropriate. Most independent detail or better incorrectly
Independent clauses in transitions are connected.
clauses in compound needed.
compound sentences are Few independent
sentences are all correctly clauses in
correctly connected by compound
connected by appropriate sentences are
appropriate conjunctions. correctly
conjunctions. connected by
appropriate
conjunctions.
Setting Lots of vivid, Some vivid, The reader can The reader has
descriptive words descriptive words figure out when trouble telling
are used to tell the are used to tell the and where the when and where
reader when and reader when and myth/legend takes the myth/legend
where the myth/ where the myth/ place, but there takes place.
legend takes legend takes isn't much detail
place. place. (e.g., once upon a
time in a land
far,far away).

Character The main The main The main It is hard to tell
character is character is character is who the main
named and clearly named and named. The character is.
described described reader knows very
(through words (through words little about the
and/or actions). and/or actions). main character.
The reader knows The reader has a
and can describe fairly good idea of
what the character what the character
looks like and how looks like.
s/he typically
behaves.
Problem It is very easy for It is fairly easy for It is fairly easy for It is not clear what
the reader to the reader to the reader to problem the main
understand what understand what understand what character faces.
problem the main problem the main problem the main
character faces character faces character faces
and why it is a and why it is a but it is not clear
problem. problem. why it is a
problem.
Solution to The solution to the The solution to the The solution to the No solution is
Problem problem is easy- problem is easy- problem is a little attempted or it is
to-understand and to-understand and hard to impossible to
is logical. There is somewhat understand. understand.
are no loose ends. logical.
Characteristics of The retelling The retelling The retelling The retelling does
a Myth/Legend reflects in reflects in some reflects in little not have any
sufficient detail the detail some detail a few of the detailed reflection
important beliefs beliefs about life, beliefs about life, of the important
about life, the the natural world, the natural world, beliefs about life,
natural world, human beings, human beings, the natural world,
human beings, and other and other human beings,
and other creatures, of the creatures, of the and other
creatures, of the creators of the creators of the creatures, of the
creators of the myth/legend. myth/legend. creators of the
myth/legend. myth/legend.
.
YOUR FINAL TASK
Wanted: Hero for All Seasons
Go to the library and look for another retelling of a Philippine epic. Read it well
and find out the following:
1. what makes the main character heroic

2. what s/he would do about our country‘s problems if s/he were alive today
3. how young people like you can help him/her do so

Summarize all the important information in a cartolina-size poster promoting heroism
among teenagers. Be guided by the following rubric.
CATEGORY 4 3 2 1
Required The poster includes All required Most of the required Some required
Information all required information is on the information is on the information is
information as well poster. poster. missing.
as additional ones.
Labels All items of Almost all items of Many items of Labels are too small
importance on the importance on the importance on the to view OR no
poster are clearly poster are clearly poster are clearly important items are
labeled with labels labeled with labels labeled with labels labeled.
that can be read that can be read from that can be read from
from at least 3 ft. at least 3 ft. away. at least 3 ft. away.
away.
Graphics - All graphics are All graphics are All graphics relate to Graphics do not
Relevance related to the topic related to the topic the topic. One or two relate to the topic OR
and make it easier and most make it borrowed graphics several borrowed
to understand. All easier to understand. have a source graphics do not have
borrowed graphics Some borrowed citation. a source citation.
have a source graphics have a
citation. source citation.
Attractiveness The poster is The poster is The poster is The poster is
exceptionally attractive in terms of acceptably attractive distractingly messy
attractive in terms design, layout and though it may be a bit or very poorly
of design, layout, neatness. messy. designed. It is not
and neatness. attractive.
Grammar There are no There are 1-2 There are 3-4 There are more than
grammatical/ grammatical/ grammatical/ 4 grammatical
mechanical mechanical mistakes mechanical mistakes /mechanical mistakes
mistakes on the on the poster. on the poster. on the poster.
poster.

Lesson 9
Celebrating My Heroes’ Beliefs
YOUR GOALS
This lesson allows you to discover the motivations of heroes when they go on
adventures. Understand that being a hero doesn‘t simply mean doing great deeds. The
intention behind the deed is more important. You must aim to:
1. Explain how people become recognized as heroes.

2. Express your opinion on why seemingly ordinary people do great acts.
3. Show how monsters are symbols of the problems society faces.
4. Decipher the expressions and techniques used in conducting interviews, or even
holding casual conversations.
5. Determine which words do not belong to a set.
6. Decode and use idiomatic expressions.
7. Link the actions and motives of the characters in the given selection.
8. Use non-verbal cues in delivering dialogues.
9. Compose a short but well-written dialogue.
10. Differentiate simple and compound sentences.
11. Use coordinating conjunctions in forming compound sentences.
12. Document your sources when researching for your projects.
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. Heroes and Monsters
On a half-sheet of paper, choose a hero based on the pictures to be shown to

you by your teacher. Explain what that hero is known for. Think of reasons why that
hero committed acts of heroism. Be ready to share your answers.
Next, you will be shown pictures of mythological monsters. Choose a monster
and on the same half-sheet of paper, explain what you know about that monster. Be
ready to share your answers.

Task 2. An Interview
Listen to a recording of an interview on monsters and epic heroes. Complete the

grid below:
What questions did the host ask to get his

guest to give more information?
What did the host say to signal that the

interview is about to move on to another
topic?
What did the guest say to summarize his

main points?
YOUR TEXT
2
Indarapatra and Sulayman
(A Maranao Epic)
A long, long time ago, Mindanao was covered with water, and the sea covered all the lowlands so
that nothing could be seen but the mountains jutting from it. There were many people living in the country
and all the highlands were dotted with villages and settlements. For many years the people prospered,
living in peace and contentment. Suddenly there appeared in the land four horrible monsters which, in a
short time, devoured every human being they could find.
Kurita, a terrible creature with many limbs, lived partly on land and partly on sea, but its favorite
haunt was the mountain where the rattan palm grew and here it brought utter destruction on every living
thing. The second monster, Tarabusaw, an ugly creature in the form of a man, lived on Mt. Matutum, and
far and wide from that place he devoured the people, laying waste to the land. The third, an enormous
bird called Pah, was so large that, when on the wing, it covered the sun and brought darkness to the
earth. Its egg was as large as a house. Mt. Bita was its haunt; and there the only people who escaped its
voracity were those who hid in the mountain caves. The fourth monster was also a dreadful bird, having
seven heads and the power to see in all directions at the same time. Mt. Gurayan was its home and like
the others, it wrought havoc to its region.
So great was the death and destruction caused by these terrible creatures that at length, the
news spread even to the most distant lands – and all nations grieved to hear the sad fate of Mindanao.
Now far across the sea, in the land of the golden sunset, was a city so great that to look at its
many people would injure the eyes of men. When tidings of these great disasters reached this distant city,
the heart of King Indarapatra was filled with compassion, and he called his brother, Sulayman, and
begged him to save the land of Mindanao from the monsters.
2
Ida Y. Patron, Interactive Reading: Responding to and Writing about Philippine Literature, 2002, pp 9-
12.
Sulayman listened to the story and as he heard it, was moved with pity.
―I will go,‖ zeal and enthusiasm adding to his strength, ―and the land shall be avenged,‖ said he.
King Indarapatra, proud of his brother‘s courage, gave him a ring and a sword as he wished him
success and safety. Then he placed a young sapling by his window and said to Sulayman, ―By this tree I
shall know your fate from the hour you depart from here, for if you live, it will live; but if you die, it will die
also.‖
So Sulayman departed for Mindanao, and he neither waded nor used a boat, but went through
the air and landed on the mountain where the rattan grew. There he stood on the summit and gazed
about on all sides. He looked on the land and the villages, but he could see no living thing. He became
very sorrowful and cried out: ―Alas, how pitiful and dreadful is this devastation.‖
No sooner had Sulayman uttered those words when the whole mountain began to move and
shake. Suddenly, out of the ground came the horrible creature, Kurita. It sprang at the man and sank its
claws into his flesh. But Sulayman, knowing at once that this was the scourge of the land, drew his sword
and cut Kurita to pieces.
Encouraged by his first success, Sulayman went on to Mt. Matutum where conditions were even
worse. As he stood on the heights viewing the great devastation, there was a noise in the forest and a
movement in the trees. With a loud yell, Tarabusaw leaped forth. For a moment they looked at each
other, neither showing any sign of fear. Then Tarabusaw used all his powers to try to devour Sulayman
who fought back. For a long time, the battle continued, until at last, the monster fell exhausted to the
ground and Sulayman killed him with his sword.
The next place visited by Sulayman was Mt. Bita. Here havoc was present everywhere, and
though he passed by many homes, he saw that not a single soul was left. As he walked, sudden
darkness fell over the land, startling him. As he looked toward the sky he saw a great bird that was
swooping down on him. Immediately, he struck, and the bird fell dead at his feet; but the wing fell on
Sulayman and he was crushed.
Now at this very moment, King Indarapatra was sitting at his window, and looking out he saw the
little tree wither and dry up.
―Alas!‖ he cried, ―my little brother is dead,‖ and he wept bitterly.
Then, although he was very sad, he was filled with a desire for revenge. Putting on his sword and
belt, he started for Mindanao in search for his brother.
He, too, traveled through the air with great speed until he came to the mountain where the rattan
grew. There he looked about, awed at the great destruction, and when he saw the bones of Kurita, he
knew that his brother had been there. He went on until he came to Matutum, and when he saw the bones
of Tarabusaw, he knew that this too, was the work of Sulayman.
Still searching for his brother, he arrived at Mt. Bita, where the dead bird lay on the ground, and
when he lifted the severed wing, he beheld the bones of Sulayman with his sword by his side. His grief
now so overwhelmed Indarapatra that he wept for some time. Upon looking up, he beheld a small jar of
water by his side. This, he knew had been sent from heaven, and he poured the water over the bones,
and Sulayman came to life again. They greeted each other and talked animatedly for a great length of
time. Sulayman declared that he had not been dead but asleep, and their hearts were full of joy.
After some time, Sulayman returned to his distant home, but Indarapatra continued his journey to
Mt. Gurayan where he killed the dreadful bird with the seven heads. After these monsters had all been
killed, peace and safety had been restored to the land. Indarapatra began searching everywhere to see if
some of the people who hid in the earth were still alive.
One day, in the course of his search, he caught sight of a beautiful woman. When he hastened
toward her, she disappeared through a hole in the ground where she stood. Disappointed and tired,
Indarapatra sat down on a rock when, looking about, he saw near him a pot of uncooked rice with a big
fire on the ground in front of it. This revived him and he proceeded to cook the rice. As he did so,
however, he heard someone laugh nearby, and turning around, he beheld an old woman who was
watching him. As he greeted her, she drew near and talked to him while he ate the rice.
Of all the people in the land, the woman told him, only few were left, and they hid in a cave in the
ground from where they never ventured to come out. As for herself and her old husband, she went on,
they had hidden in a hollow tree, and this they had never dared to leave until after Sulayman killed the
voracious bird Pah.
At Indarapatra‘s request, the old woman led him to one such cave. There he met the headman
with his family and some people. They all gathered around the stranger, asking many questions, for this
was the first time they had heard about the death of the monsters. When they found out what Indarapatra
had done for them, the headman gave his daughter to Indarapatra in marriage, and she proved to be the
beautiful girl whom he had seen at the mouth of the cave.
Then the people all came out of their hiding places and returned to their homes where they lived
in peace and happiness. And the sea withdrew from the land and gave the lowlands to the people.
Task 1. Word Sets
Determine which the word which does not belong to each set. Cross out that
word. Be prepared to explain what the rest of words have in common.
1. ate, consumed, devoured, gobbled, harassed

2. chaos, disaster, havoc, order, mayhem
3. news, reports, tidings, word, values
4. apex, nadir, peak, summit, zenith
5. awful, dreadful, ghastly, indescribable, shocking
6. restored, reawakened, renewed, reneged, revived
Task 2. Say What?
Each sentence has an underlined idiomatic expression. Idioms are words which
have fixed expressions and non-literal meanings. Decide what each idiomatic
expression means.
1. When news about the plight of Mindanao reached King Indarapatra, he did
not beat around the bush. He immediately sent his brother to fight the
monsters.
2. Sulayman, despite being of noble birth, did not hesitate to get his hands dirty.
3. Upon reaching Mindanao and killing the first monster, Sulayman realized that
he had barely scratched the surface of Mindanao‘s problems.
4. Had the monsters closed ranks, they would have been able to defeat
Sulayman.
5. Despite being a king, Indarapatra remained down to earth when he met the
people who hid in the caves.

Complete the table below by writing down the actions taken by the characters in
the story. After filling out the second column, decide what these characters‘ motives
were for taking those particular actions. The first set has been done for you.
Characters Actions Motives

1. The four The monsters wreaked havoc The monsters probably saw the
monsters all throughout Mindanao and humans as sources of food,
their actions drove the people and the attacks that followed
from their homes. made sure that the people
would be too scattered to resist
them.
2. Sulayman
3. Indarapatra
4. The people in the

caves
Task 3. Watch Out!
A. Study the following sentences. Write C if the sentence is a compound

sentence and write S if it is a simple sentence.
1. The epic does not state where the monsters which ravaged Mindanao came
from.
2. The epic also doesn‘t state where Indarapatra and Sulayman came from
either.
3. Some experts say that Indarapatra and Sulayman came from Borneo, and
their arrival represented the Indones wave of migrants to the Philippine
islands.
4. Mindanao was depicted as a troubled land in the epic, and this depiction
seems true even to this age.
5. The people of Mindanao initially fought the monsters, but the monsters were
just too powerful for them to overcome.
6. Sulayman‘s revival is seen as proof of his supernatural heritage.
7. Epic heroes often have supernatural abilities, but they too have weaknesses.
8. The heroes in this epic simply wanted to help people in distress.
9. Indarapatra‘s marriage to the headman‘s daughter explains how his people
came to Mindanao.

10. Many of us see epics as fiction, yet reading an epic often reveals a lot of
truths about the people who created them.
B. Study the sentences below. Each sentence is missing a coordinating

conjunction that will turn it into a compound sentence. Fill in that blank with
appropriate coordinating conjunction.
1. The four monsters came out of nowhere, ____ they began to attack the
people of Mindanao.
2. The people of Mindanao were either devoured by the monsters, ____ they
fled to the caves for sanctuary.
3. The Philippines during this time did not have a central government, ____ nor
did it have a national force.
4. King Indarapatra was a foreigner, ____ he showed a lot of sympathy for the
people of Mindanao.
5. Sulayman managed to kill the giant bird, ____ the bird‘s wing managed to
crush him in the process.
YOUR FINAL TASK
My Hero
Choose a local hero (mythical or real) whom you wish to study more. Go to the
library, conduct interviews, or look for historical markers to get more information about
this hero. Complete the grid below:
The Hero His/Her Great Acts His/Her Motives
I gathered the information about the hero by:

1. ______________________________________________________
2. ______________________________________________________
3. ______________________________________________________

Lesson 10
Becoming a Real Hero
YOUR GOALS
This lesson allows you to continue with your journey into understanding the
rich and colorful Filipino culture as reflected in our local literature. Find out
how the pre-Hispanic Filipinos characterized the epic hero and succeeded in nurturing
the beginnings of Philippine literature. You must aim to:
1. Distinguish between and among the functions of verbal cues such as: repetition,
contradiction, substitution, complementation, and accentuation
2. Use the right oral language conventions when inquiring about, summarizing, or
reacting to what has been listened to, read, or observed
3. Note and explain the use of familiar, colloquial, and idiomatic expressions in oral
communication
4. Identify the characteristics of the epic as a literary form
5. Use information presented in a narrative poem in inferring, evaluating, and
expressing critical ideas
6. Comparing and contrasting the verse and prose versions of a narrative poem
7. Construct simple and compound sentences and organize them into a coherent
text
8. Accomplish appropriate library forms to locate, process, and document resource
information
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. Meet my Heroes
Complete the following table. Pair off and tell your partner about the qualities of your
favorite heroes. Ask each other questions for clarifications.
My Heroes Who they are What they ‘re like
My national hero
My superhero
My day-to-day hero
The modern day hero

Task 2. Meet another hero
Listen carefully to the short text to be played / read to you and be able to identify still
another type of hero.
First listening : Listen for general understanding.

Second listening : Listen for specific details and take down notes.
Now complete the following statement to identify and describe another type of hero.
An ________ hero is the _________character of a _______________ poem.

A narrative poem or an ________ tells of the exploits of the story‟s main
character who possesses _______________ powers which allow him to win
over his opponents and triumph even against monsters and other evil forces.
Task 3. Spot the difference or the similarity
Arrive at the meaning of the italicized word by noting the difference or the similarity
among the words in the set.
1. Clams, snails, shrimps, and lobsters are examples of shellfish except _________.
A shellfish is a creature that lives in the _________ and has a ___________.
2. Sharks, whales, dolphins, and porpoises are all large ocean and sea creatures.
Sharks are most dangerous to man because they are _______-eaters.
Study the following sets of words and their common prefix then guess the meaning of
the italicized words.
1. Overjoyed, overacting, overprotected, overwhelmed

Over- is a prefix which suggests ―too much of something‖. When we say
Cannoyan was overwhelmed with sorrow, we mean she was _____________.
2. Exported, expanded, extended, expelled

Ex- is a prefix indicating ―an outward movement‖. The shark expelled Lam-ang‘s
bones. This means that Lam-ang‘s bones were ______________ by the shark.

YOUR TEXT
An Excerpt from The Life of Lam-ang

(An Iloko epic)3
When the Captain had left, And the signs came to pass:
This is what the brave-man Lam-ang The stairs danced;
Said with a sigh: The kitchen collapsed;
“My wife Cannoyan The stove broke to pieces.

I have been chosen The woman Cannoyan
To dive for shellfish called rarang. The wept.
I have dreamt “My husband Don Lam-ang,

That I shall doubtless be eaten Where can you be now.
By the shark tioan-tioan. There is none I can hire
I shall give you a sign; To look for you.”

The stairs shall dance;
The kitchen shall collapse; The woman Cannoyan then sought help
And found Marcos, the diver.
The stove shall break to pieces.”
When morning came, She then tied the white rooster,
Lam-ang prepared to leave. The yellow-legged hen,
The woman Cannoyan.
Reaching an ideal spot,
He undressed and swam She also leashed the hairy dog
To where the rarang abounds. With the curly locks
Then cradled the white rooster.
He looked through the crystal waters
Then dived for the shellfish She left and soon reached the spot
But failed in his first try. Where his clothes were.
There at the spot where Lam-ang was,
Surfacing, he tried once more to locate
them Cannoyan cried,
And having seen some Overwhelmed by sorrow.
Dived once more— The cock comforted her thus:
Right into the mouth “Mistress, don‟t you worry.

Of the fish, Master Lam-ang certainly shall
A big tioan-tioan shark, live
If they can locate his bones.”
The diver, old man Marcos,

3Eugenio, Damiana L. (2007). Philippine Folk
Dived then.
Literature Series, Vol. 1. Quezon City: UP Press, pp. But he failed to find the bones.
55-57.
The second time he dived,
He found the bones
Where the shark had expelled them.
The cock said:

“Sir, take all the bones and beach
them:
None should be missing.”
And when no more bones could be

found,
The cock examined the bones closely.
He found nothing missing.
The bones of Lam-ang

Having been completed,
This is what he said:
“I shall turn my back

While you cover the bones
With your skirt.”
The yellow-legged hen crowed;

The rooster shook its wings.
And the bones started to move.
The dog with the curly locks

Howled twice
Then clawed the ground
As though to bury the bones of Lam-

ang.
Then the man Lam-ang
Got-up at once.
“How soundly I slept, my wife

Canoyan.
It‟s been seven nights
Since we last slept together.”

Task 1. Meet them; know them
Pair off then complete the grid below for you to learn more about the characters and
their story through their actions. Be guided by the given example.
Character Character’s Purpose of Result of Character’s

action action action quality/ies
reflected by the
action
Lam-ang He dived into the To gather He was eaten He was daring and
water despite the shellfish by the tioan- brave but rather
danger. tioan shark. careless.
Task 2. Meet Lam-ang, the child
The excerpted text you just read only tells you about the ending of Lam-ang‘s story.
Meet him again as a child by reading the following prose version summarizing his story.
The Story of Lam-ang (A Summary)4
Don Juan and his wife Namongan lived in Nalbuan, now part of La Union in the
northern part of the Philippines. They had a son named Lam-ang. Before Lam-ang was
born, Don Juan went to the mountains in order to punish a group of their Igorot
enemies. While he was away, his son Lam-ang was born. It took four people to help
Namongan give birth. As soon as the baby boy popped out, he spoke and asked that he
be given the name Lam-ang. He also chose his godparents and asked where his father
was.
After nine months of waiting for his father to return, Lam-ang decided he would
go look for him. Namongan thought Lam-ang was up to the challenge but she was sad
to let him go. During his exhausting journey, he decided to rest for awhile. He fell asleep
and had a dream about his father's head being stuck on a pole by the Igorot. Lam-ang
was furious when he learned what had happened to his father. He rushed to their village
4 http://tagaloglang.com/Philippine-Literature/Filipino-Epics/biag-ni-lam-ang-buod.html
and killed them all, except for one whom he let go so that he could tell other people
about Lam-ang's greatness.
Upon returning to Nalbuan in triumph, he was bathed by women in the

Amburayan river. All the fish died because of the dirt and odor from Lam-ang's body.
There was a young woman named Ines Kannoyan whom Lam-ang wanted to
woo. She lived in Calanutian and he brought along his white rooster and gray dog to
visit her. On the way, Lam-ang met his enemy Sumarang, another suitor of Ines whom
he fought and readily defeated.
Lam-ang found the house of Ines surrounded by many suitors all of whom were
trying to catch her attention. He had his rooster crow, which caused a nearby house to
fall. This made Ines look out. He had his dog bark and in an instant the fallen house
rose up again. The girl's parents witnessed this and called for him. The rooster
expressed the love of Lam-ang. The parents agreed to a marriage with their daughter if
Lam-ang would give them a dowry valued at double their wealth. Lam-ang had no
problem fulfilling this condition and he and Ines were married.
It was a tradition to have a newly married man swim in the river for the rarang
fish. Unfortunately, Lam-ang dove straight into the mouth of the water monster
Berkakan. Ines had Marcos get his bones, which she covered with a piece of cloth. His
rooster crowed and his dog barked and slowly the bones started to move. Back alive,
Lam-ang and his wife lived happily ever after with his white rooster and gray dog.
Lam-ang, the child
Task 3. Spot the Differences
Recall the events as narrated in the excerpted verse and compare them with how they
were told in the prose version. Explain why there are differences.

According to the verse excerpt: According to the prose summary:
Task 4. Match and check your understanding
Match each question with its answer.
_____ 1a. Who were Lam-ang‘s parents? a. to search for treasure
_____ 1b. Where did they live? b. No, the dog didn‘t express
Lam-ang‘s love for Ines.
_____ 2a. Why did Don Juan go to the mountains? c. Don Juan and Namongan
_____ 2b. What did his enemies do to him? d. He let go of someone.
_____ 3a. Were Don Juan‘s enemies forgiven e. to punish their Igorot enemies
by Lam-ang?
_____ 3b. Were all the enemies killed? f. The enemies were not forgiven.
_____ 4a. Did the dog express Lam-ang‘s g. The dog didn‘t cause the
love for Ines? nearby house to fall.
_____ 4b. Did it cause the nearby house to fall? h. No, they weren‘t all killed.
i. They killed him.
j. Nalbuan
Task 5. Express ideas completely
Copy or construct complete sentences that answer each pair of the above questions.
1a. _______________________________________________________________
1b. _______________________________________________________________
2a. _______________________________________________________________
2b. _______________________________________________________________
3a. _______________________________________________________________
3b. _______________________________________________________________
4a. _______________________________________________________________
4b. _______________________________________________________________
Task 6. Combine ideas
Now combine each pair of statements above using the appropriate connector. Choose
from the following: yet, but, nor, and.
Example: What did Lam-ang do after nine months of waiting?

What did the Igorots do to Don Juan?
Lam-ang looked for his father after nine months of waiting.

The Igorots killed him.
Lam-ang looked for his father after nine months of waiting, but the
Igorots had killed him.
1. _______________________________________________________________
2. _______________________________________________________________
3. _______________________________________________________________
4. _______________________________________________________________

Task 7. The Story of Lam-ang . . . the epic
Find out if The Story of Lam-ang has the qualities of an epic. Go back to the notes you
took down as you listened to the text in Task 2 of Your Initial Tasks and use them to
complete the semantic web below. Support your answers by citing details from the
story. Follow the example and the given legend.
Legend:
Details from the story

Characteristic of an epic indicating the identified
characteristic
Lam-ang’s hen,
rooster, & dog
restored him back
to life.
Has tremendous
vitality, color &
imagination
The Story
of Lam-ang

YOUR FINAL TASKS
Task 1. Meet More Epic Heroes
Did you know that there is a rich collection of Philippine epics? Learn more about them
and enjoy reading the stories and exploits of other Filipino epic heroes. Visit the
Filipiniana section of the library and borrow materials that contain other Filipino epics
such as the Ibalon, a Bicol epic poetry and the Darangan, a Mindanaoan epic. Read
and compare them with The Story of Lam-Ang on the basis of the following:
Title of Place of The epic Epic hero’s unique Epic hero’s

the epic origin hero characteristics adventures
Feel free to expand our list of Philippine epics. Remember to cite your source/s.
Task 2. Retell your favorite epic
Options:
1. Be a modern day bard. Find two classmates whose favorite epic is the same as
yours. Together, retell your favorite epic in class.
2. Retell your favorite epic by summarizing it in two to three paragraphs.
3. Do a 5- or 6-frame comic strip of the epic you enjoyed most.

Lesson 1
How Others See Me
YOUR GOALS
This lesson allows you to begin your journey into understanding yourself
which will hopefully lead you to mastering yourself. You must aim to:
1. Use single word adjectives in describing yourself and your classmates.

2. Explain why your views about yourself may be different from how others view
you.
3. Narrate an incident in your life which is similar to the one found in the selection.
4. Distinguish between figurative and literal language.
5. Unlock the meaning of words as used in sentences.
6. Differentiate a narrative text from other types of texts.
7. Use determiners correctly.
8. Write an anecdote following the features of narrative texts.
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. How I View Myself
On a half-sheet of paper, complete the visual organizer below by writing at five

traits which you believe you have.
WHAT I THINK
OF MYSELF
Task 2. How Others View Me
For this activity, you will need a piece of paper, and some tape. Write your name
at the center of this paper. It is advisable to encircle your name. Once your teacher has
finished giving you instructions, you are to move around the classroom, look for your
classmates, and write only one word on each of their respective papers. That word must
be an adjective which you think best describes that classmate. After five minutes, take
the piece of paper from your back and look at how your classmates described you. Now
compare the descriptions that your classmates wrote for you with those you wrote for
yourself. How similar are they? How different are they?
YOUR TEXT
THE CENTIPEDE
by Rony V. Diaz
When I saw my sister, Delia, beating my dog with a stick, I felt hate heave like a caged, angry
beast in my chest. Out in the sun, the hair of my sister glinted like metal and, in her brown dress, she
looked like a sheathed dagger. Biryuk hugged the earth and screamed but I could not bound forward nor
cry out to my sister. She had a weak heart and she must not be surprised. So I held myself, my throat
swelled, and I felt hate rear and plunge in its cage of ribs.
I was thirteen when my father first took me hunting. All through the summer of that year, I had
tramped alone and unarmed the fields and forest around our farm. Then one afternoon in late July my
father told me I could use his shotgun.
Beyond the ipil grove, in a grass field we spotted a covey of brown pigeons. In the open, they
kept springing to the air and gliding away every time we were within range. But finally they dropped to the
ground inside a wedge of guava trees. My father pressed my shoulder and I stopped. Then slowly, in a
half-crouch, we advanced. The breeze rose lightly; the grass scuffed against my bare legs. My father
stopped again. He knelt down and held my hand.
―Wait for the birds to rise and then fire,‖ he whispered.
I pushed the safety lever of the rifle off and sighted along the barrel. The saddle of the stock felt
greasy on my cheek. The gun was heavy and my arm muscles twitched. My mouth was dry; I felt vaguely
sick. I wanted to sit down.
―You forgot to spit,‖ my father said.
Father had told me that hunters always spat for luck before firing. I spat and I saw the breeze
bend the ragged, glassy threads of spittle toward the birds.
―That‘s good,‖ Father said.
―Can‘t we throw a stone,‖ I whispered fiercely. ―It‘s taking them a long time.‖
―No, you‘ve to wait.‖
Suddenly, a small dog yelping shrilly came tearing across the brooding plain of grass and small
trees. It raced across the plain in long slewy swoops, on outraged shanks that disappeared and flashed
alternately in the light of the cloud-banked sun. One of the birds whistled and the covey dispersed like
seeds thrown in the wind. I fired and my body shook with the fierce momentary life of the rifle. I saw three
pigeons flutter in a last convulsive effort to stay afloat, then fall to the ground. The shot did not scare the
dog. He came to us, sniffing cautiously. He circled around us until I snapped my fingers and then he
came to me.
―Not bad,‖ my father said grinning. ―Three birds with one tube.‖ I went to the brush to get the
birds. The dog ambled after me. He found the birds for me. The breast of one of the birds was torn. The
bird had fallen on a spot where the earth was worn bare, and its blood was spread like a tiny, red rag. The
dog scraped the blood with his tongue. I picked up the birds and its warm, mangled flesh clung to the
palm of my hand.
―You‘re keen,‖ I said to the dog. ―Here. Come here.‖ I offered him my bloody palm. He came to
me and licked my palm clean.
I gave the birds to my father. ―May I keep him, Father?‖ I said pointing to the dog. He put the birds
in a leather bag which he carried strapped around his waist.
Father looked at me a minute and then said: ―Well, I‘m not sure. That dog belongs to somebody.‖
―May I keep him until his owner comes for him?‖ I pursued.
―He‘d make a good pointer,‖ Father remarked. ―But I would not like my son to be accused of dog-
stealing.‖
―Oh, no!‖ I said quickly. ―I shall return him when the owner comes to claim him.‖
―All right,‖ he said, ―I hope that dog makes a hunter out of you.‖
Biryuk and I became fast friends. Every afternoon after school we went to the field to chase quails
or to the bank of the river which was fenced by tall, blade-sharp reeds to flush snipes. Father was away
most of the time but when he was home he hunted with us.
Biryuk scampered off and my sister flung the stick at him. Then she turned about and she saw
me.
―Eddie, come here,‖ she commanded. I approached with apprehension. Slowly, almost carefully,
she reached over and twisted my ear.
―I don‘t want to see that dog again in the house,‖ she said coldly. ―That dog destroyed my slippers
again. I‘ll tell Berto to kill that dog if I see it around again.‖ She clutched one side of my face with her hot,
moist hand and shoved me, roughly. I tumbled to the ground. But I did not cry or protest. I had passed
that phase. Now, every word and gesture she hurled at me I caught and fed to my growing and restless
hate.
My sister was the meanest creature I knew. She was eight when I was born, the day my mother
died. Although we continued to live in the same house, she had gone, it seemed, to another country from
where she looked at me with increasing annoyance and contempt.
One of my first solid memories was of standing before a grass hut. Its dirt floor was covered with
white banana stalks, and there was a small box filled with crushed and dismembered flowers in one
corner. A doll was cradled in the box. It was my sister‘s playhouse and I remembered she told me to keep
out of it. She was not around so I went in. The fresh banana hides were cold under my feet. The interior
of the hut was rife with the sour smell of damp dead grass. Against the flowers, the doll looked incredibly
heavy. I picked it up. It was slight but it had hard, unflexing limbs. I tried to bend one of the legs and it
snapped. I stared with horror at the hollow tube that was the leg of the doll. Then I saw my sister coming.
I hid the leg under one of the banana pelts. She was running and I knew she was furious. The walls of the
hut suddenly constricted me. I felt sick with a nameless pain. My sister snatched the doll from me and
when she saw the torn leg she gasped. She pushed me hard and I crashed against the wall of the hut.
The flimsy wall collapsed over me. I heard my sister screaming; she denounced me in a high, wild voice
and my body ached with fear. She seized one of the saplings that held up the hut and hit me again and
again until the flesh of my back and thighs sang with pain. Then suddenly my sister moaned; she
stiffened, the sapling fell from her hand and quietly, as though a sling were lowering her, she sank to the
ground. Her eyes were wild as scud and on the edges of her lips, drawn tight over her teeth, quivered a
wide lace of froth. I ran to the house yelling for Father.
She came back from the hospital in the city, pale and quiet and mean, drained, it seemed, of all
emotions, she moved and acted with the keen, perversity and deceptive dullness of a sheathed knife,
concealing in her body that awful power for inspiring fear and pain and hate, not always with its drawn
blade but only with its fearful shape, defined by the sheath as her meanness was defined by her body.
Nothing I did ever pleased her. She destroyed willfully anything I liked. At first, I took it as a
process of adaptation, a step of adjustment; I snatched and crushed every seed of anger she planted in
me, but later on I realized that it had become a habit with her. I did not say anything when she told Berto
to kill my monkey because it snickered at her one morning, while she was brushing her teeth. I did not
say anything when she told Father that she did not like my pigeon house because it stank and I had to
give away my pigeons and Berto had to chop the house into kindling wood. I learned how to hold myself
because I knew we had to put up with her whims to keep her calm and quiet. But when she dumped my
butterflies into a waste can and burned them in the backyard, I realized that she was spiting me.
My butterflies never snickered at her and they did not smell. I kept them in an unused cabinet in
the living room and unless she opened the drawers, they were out of her sight. And she knew too that my
butterfly collection had grown with me. But when I arrived home, one afternoon, from school, I found my
butterflies in a can, burned in their cotton beds like deckle. I wept and Father had to call my sister for an
explanation. She stood straight and calm before Father but my tear-logged eyes saw only her harsh and
arrogant silhouette. She looked at me curiously but she did not say anything and Father began gently to
question her. She listened politely and when Father had stopped talking, she said without rush, heat or
concern: ―They were attracting ants.‖
I ran after Biryuk. He had fled to the brambles. I ran after him, bugling his name. I found him
under a low, shriveled bush. I called him and he only whimpered. Then I saw that one of his eyes was
bleeding. I sat on the ground and looked closer. The eye had been pierced. The stick of my sister had
stabbed the eye of my dog. I was stunned. For a long time I sat motionless, staring at Biryuk. Then I felt
hate crouch; its paws dug hard into the floor of its cage; it bunched muscles tensed; it held itself for a
minute and then it sprang and the door of the cage crashed open and hate clawed wildly my brain. I
screamed. Biryuk, frightened, yelped and fled, rattling the dead bush that sheltered him. I did not run after
him.
A large hawk wheeled gracefully above a group of birds. It flew in a tightening spiral above the
birds.
On my way back to the house, I passed the woodshed. I saw Berto in the shade of a tree, splitting
wood. He was splitting the wood he had stacked last year. A mound of bone-white slats was piled near
his chopping block. When he saw me, he stopped and called me.
His head was drenched with sweat. He brushed away the sweat and hair from his eyes and said
to me: ―I‘ve got something for you.‖
He dropped his ax and walked into the woodshed. I followed him. Berto went to a corner of the
shed. I saw a jute sack spread on the ground. Berto stopped and picked up the sack.
―Look,‖ he said.
I approached. Pinned to the ground by a piece of wood, was a big centipede. Its malignantly red
body twitched back and forth.
―It‘s large,‖ I said.
―I found him under the stack I chopped.‖ Berto smiled happily; he looked at me with his muddy
eyes.
―You know,‖ he said. ―That son of a devil nearly frightened me to death‖
I stiffened. ―Did it, really?‖ I said trying to control my rising voice. Berto was still grinning and I felt
hot all over.
―I didn‘t expect to find any centipede here,‖ he said. ―It nearly bit me. Who wouldn‘t get shocked?‖
He bent and picked up a piece of wood.
―This wood was here,‖ he said and put down the block. ―Then I picked it up, like this. And this
centipede was coiled here. Right here. I nearly touched it with my hand. What do you think you would
feel?‖
I did not answer. I squatted to look at the reptile. Its antennae quivered searching the tense
afternoon air. I picked up a sliver of wood and prodded the centipede. It uncoiled viciously. Its pinchers
slashed at the tiny spear.
―I could carry it dead,‖ I said half-aloud.
―Yes,‖ Berto said. ―I did not kill him because I knew you would like it.‖
―Yes, you‘re right.‖
―That‘s bigger than the one you found last year, isn‘t it?‖
―Yes, it‘s very much bigger.‖
I stuck the sliver into the carapace of the centipede. It went through the flesh under the red armor;
a whitish liquid oozed out. Then I made sure it was dead by brushing its antennae. The centipede did not
move. I wrapped it in a handkerchief.
My sister was enthroned in a large chair in the porch of the house. Her back was turned away
from the door; she sat facing the window. She was embroidering a strip of white cloth. I went near, I stood
behind her chair. She was not aware of my presence. I unwrapped the centipede. I threw it on her lap.
My sister shrieked and the strip of white sheet flew off like an unhanded hawk. She shot up from
her chair, turned around and she saw me but she collapsed again to her chair clutching her breast,
doubled up with pain The centipede had fallen to the floor.
―You did it,‖ she gasped. ―You tried to kill me. You‘ve health… life… you tried…‖ Her voice
dragged off into a pain-stricken moan.
I was engulfed by a sudden feeling of pity and guilt.
―But it‘s dead!‖ I cried kneeling before her. ―It‘s dead! Look! Look!‖ I snatched up the centipede
and crushed its head between my fingers. ―It‘s dead!‖
My sister did not move. I held the centipede before her like a hunter displaying the tail of a deer,
save that the centipede felt thorny in my hand.

Task 1. Using Context Clues in finding Synonyms
Encircle the letter of the option that best approximates the underlined word in each sentence.
1. George could only stand in shock as Lilian tramped across the field, her angry eyes latched on to
him.
A. tread heavily B. walked slowly C. limped quickly D. darted past
2. The vendor, hoping to finish selling his goods before noon, ambled toward the group of clueless
tourists.
A. crawled B. sold C. walked D. limped
3. While Jonathan escaped the accident with just a scratch on his arm, his car was badly mangled.
A. spared B. scratched C. returned D. ruined
4. Lourdes watched the performance with apprehension; she felt that anytime now, someone would
make a mistake and the audience would laugh at her class.
A. fascination B. dread C. rapture D. listlessness
5. The mayor denounced the kidnapping of the eight year old year, and vowed that he would do
everything in his power to get the girl back and punish the kidnappers to the fullest extent of the law.
A. condemned B. criticized C. commented D. contorted
6. Kyla‘s lips started to quiver when she heard that her daughter had been kidnapped.
A. close B. open C. shrink D. tremble
7. The prima ballerina snickered when she saw her main rival stumbling over the new dance steps.
A. laughed derisively B. coughed politely C. commented D. parodied
Task 2. Literal or Figurative?

Determine whether each statement below is literal or figurative. Write L if the statement is literal (i.e. there
is no other meaning). Write F if the statement is figurative (i.e. there is an underlying meaning).
1. Berto was tasked by Delia to kill Berto‘s adopted dog.
2. Centipedes often scare people because of how they look.
3. Delia‘s resentment toward Eddie could be traced back to their mother‘s death.
4. Eddie saw his sister as a thorn on his side – something which should be plucked.
5. Eddie‘s feelings toward his sister could be compared to that of an overheated kettle.
6. Eddie‘s sister was stunned when she saw the centipede.
7. Even as a young boy, Eddie already had the instincts of a hunter.
8. For most of the story, Eddie and Delia were like oil and water.
9. Once, Eddie thought that Delia was extending the olive branch to him.
10. Their father often told Eddie and Delia to keep the peace.
Locate information in the selection to complete the table below. Make sure you can defend your answers.
How Eddie Viewed His How Eddie Viewed How Eddie’s Sister How Eddie’s Sister
Sister Himself Viewed Him Viewed Herself
Once you have finished with the table above, answer the following questions in your notebook. Be
prepared to share your answers with the rest of the class.
1. Do you think Eddie‘s actions at the end of the story were justified? Why or why not?
2. Had you been in the same situation, would you have done what Eddie did? Why or why not?
3. Why is the story entitled as such? What is the title‘s significance to the developments in the
story?

Task 4. Watch Out!
A. Study the following sentences. Choose the determiner that will best complete each sentence.
1. ____ stolen cart was returned to the farmer the following day by the policemen.(an, the, their)
2. Joseph ignored ________ warning that nobody should leave the building. (Luke‘s, his, he‘s)
3. Lily managed to round up _____ bystanders to serve as the audience for her seminar.
(much, a little, a few)
4. Liza tried to retrieve _____ cap, but she was afraid to climb the tree. (this, her, their)
5. Mr. Reyes told the restless crowd that everyone had to wait for ____ hour for the guest speaker.
(a, an, the)
6. My father gave me ____ watch before I left for Manila. (these, this, an)
7. The branch manager told his staff to make sure that _____ important documents should be sent to
the main office by the end of the day. (a, an, the)
8. The company lost _______ boxes of its products when its delivery truck fell off a cliff.
(three hundred, these, theirs)
9. The lawyers gave the complainants _____ days to respond to the motion. (fifteen, the, those)
10. The teacher gave the students an exam after a few of them challenged her lecture. ____ a behavior
was unacceptable to the teacher. (what, such, theirs)
B. Determine whether the sentences are using the underlined determiners correctly. If the underlined
determiner is wrong, encircle it, then provide the determiner that will make the sentence correct. If the
sentence already makes proper use of the underlined determiner, write C in front of the number.
1. A history of the Philippines was at first written by Americans.
2. A new president is often given a hundred days by the media before they begin criticizing his or her
policies.
3. As punishment for their offense, the students were told to make sure that a school was always
clean.
4. Because Mario couldn‘t find his wallet, he borrowed money from his colleague.
5. Due to a President‘s motorcade, we were stuck in traffic for two hours.
6. Jonathan‘s record, which has remained unbroken until this day, remains the legend.
7. Many water was needed in order to quench the debater‘s thirst.
8. Marjorie decided to leave her house when she saw several rat colonies in her kitchen.
9. People should keep his noses in their own business.
10. This documents in my hands will determine the outcome of this election.
YOUR FINAL TASK
A Story from my Past

Think of a story from your childhood when you played a prank on a sibling, friend, or parent. If
you are still in good terms with that person, interview him or her so that you can get a more complete view
of that episode. Complete the statement that follows the grid.
I played a prank on… Because… The Result was… I learned that…
Once you are done with the grid, you may be asked by your teacher to share your anecdote with
your classmates. Write it in story form. You may change the names of the persons involved.

Lesson 2
Valuing My Family
YOUR GOALS
This lesson makes you realize that family members wherever they may be still form the core
of our personhood. As you appreciate more your family, you must be able to:
1. Use demonstrations and examples to know meaning of words and phrases

2. Determine the order of significant events in the text that you listened to
3. Compare and contrast ideas presented in a selection or a set of related selections
4. Identify simile that shows comparison
5. Use information presented in a reading selection to infer, evaluate, and express critical ideas
6. Use correct determiners
7. Identify the features of primary and secondary sources
8. Distinguish between and among a journal entry, an anecdote, a travelogue, a personal letter,
and a blog entry
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. Word Play
1. Demonstrate the following phrases:
a. with animation and lively talk

b. disengaged a ponderous bundle
c. breathless exclamation of delight
d. a swift constriction in her throat
2. An itinerary is a detailed plan for a trip. Make an itinerary for your grade level field trip.
Consider expected time of departure and arrival and time allotment for each place. Be guided
by the table below.
Time Venue/Place Activity
Task 2. Total Recall
How do you and your family remember a dead loved one? How did Mr. Angeles remember his
dead children?

YOUR TEXT
1. Read silently the part assigned to you.

2. Listen for the cue when you are to read your part.
3. Listen to the details that tell about how Mr. Angeles remembered his dead children as the rest of
the members read their parts.
The Mats
by Francisco Arcellana
1 For the Angeles family, Mr. Angeles'; homecoming from his periodic inspection trips was always an
occasion for celebration. But his homecoming--from a trip to the South--was fated to be more memorable
than, say, of the others.
He had written from Mariveles: "I have just met a marvelous matweaver--a real artist--and I shall have a
surprise for you. I asked him to weave a sleeping-mat for every one of the family. He is using many
different colors and for each mat the dominant color is that of our respective birthstones. I am sure that the
children will be very pleased. I know you will be. I can hardly wait to show them to you."
Nana Emilia read the letter that morning, and again and again every time she had a chance to leave the
kitchen. In the evening when all the children were home from school she asked her oldest son, José, to
read the letter at dinner table. The children became very much excited about the mats, and talked about
them until late into the night. This she wrote her husband when she labored over a reply to him. For days
after that, mats continued to be the chief topic of conversation among the children.
Finally, from Lopez, Mr. Angeles wrote again: "I am taking the Bicol Express tomorrow. I have the mats with
me, and they are beautiful. God willing, I shall be home to join you at dinner."
2 The letter was read aloud during the noon meal. Talk about the mats flared up again like wildfire.
"I like the feel of mats," Antonio, the third child, said. "I like the smell of new mats."
"Oh, but these mats are different," interposed Susanna, the fifth child. "They have our names woven into
them, and in our ascribed colors, too."
The children knew what they were talking about: they knew just what a decorative mat was like; it was not
anything new or strange in their experience. That was why they were so excited about the matter. They had
such a mat in the house, one they seldom used, a mat older than any one of them.
This mat had been given to Nana Emilia by her mother when she and Mr. Angeles were married, and it had
been with them ever since. It had served on the wedding night, and had not since been used except on
special occasions.
It was a very beautiful mat, not really meant to be ordinarily used. It had green leaf borders, and a lot of
gigantic red roses woven into it. In the middle, running the whole length of the mat, was the lettering: Emilia
y Jaime Recuerdo.
The letters were in gold.

3 Nana Emilia always kept that mat in her trunk. When any one of the family was taken ill, the mat was
brought out and the patient slept on it, had it all to himself. Every one of the children had some time in their
lives slept on it; not a few had slept on it more than once.
Most of the time the mat was kept in Nana Emilia's trunk, and when it was taken out and spread on the floor
the children were always around to watch. At first there had been only Nana Emilia to see the mat spread.
Then a child--a girl--watched with them. The number of watchers increased as more children came.
The mat did not seem to age. It seemed to Nana Emilia always as new as when it had been laid on the
nuptial bed. To the children it seemed as new as the first time it was spread before them. The folds and
creases always new and fresh. The smell was always the smell of a new mat. Watching the intricate design
was an endless joy. The children's pleasure at the golden letters even before they could work out the
meaning was boundless. Somehow they were always pleasantly shocked by the sight of the mat: so
delicate and so consummate the artistry of its weave.
Now, taking out that mat to spread had become a kind of ritual. The process had become associated with
illness in the family. Illness, even serious illness, had not been infrequent. There had been deaths...
4 In the evening Mr. Angeles was with his family. He had brought the usual things home with him. There
was a lot of fruits, as always (his itinerary carried him through the fruit-growing provinces): pineapples,
lanzones, chicos, atis, santol, sandia, guyabano, avocado, according to the season. He had also brought
home a jar of preserved sweets from Lopez.
Putting away the fruit, sampling them, was as usual accomplished with animation and lively talk. Dinner
was a long affair. Mr. Angeles was full of stories about his trip but would interrupt his tales with: "I could not
sleep nights thinking of the young ones. They should never be allowed to play in the streets. And you older
ones should not stay out too late at night."
The stories petered out and dinner was over. Putting away the dishes and wiping the dishes and wiping the
table clean did not at all seem tedious. Yet Nana and the children, although they did not show it, were all on
edge about the mats.
Finally, after a long time over his cigar, Mr. Angeles rose from his seat at the head of the table and crossed
the room to the corner where his luggage had been piled. From the heap he disengaged a ponderous
bundle.
5 Taking it under one arm, he walked to the middle of the room where the light was brightest. He dropped
the bundle and, bending over and balancing himself on his toes, he strained at the cord that bound it. It was
strong, it would not break, it would not give way. He tried working at the knots. His fingers were clumsy,
they had begun shaking.
He raised his head, breathing heavily, to ask for the scissors. Alfonso, his youngest boy, was to one side of
him with the scissors ready.
Nana Emilia and her eldest girl who had long returned from the kitchen were watching the proceedings
quietly.

One swift movement with the scissors, snip! and the bundle was loose.
Turning to Nana Emilia, Mr. Angeles joyfully cried: "These are the mats, Miling." Mr. Angeles picked up the
topmost mat in the bundle.
"This, I believe, is yours, Miling."
6 Nana Emilia stepped forward to the light, wiping her still moist hands against the folds of her skirt, and
with a strange young shyness received the mat. The children watched the spectacle silently and then broke
into delighted, though a little self-conscious, laughter. Nana Emilia unfolded the mat without a word. It was
a beautiful mat: to her mind, even more beautiful than the one she received from her mother on her
wedding. There was a name in the very center of it: EMILIA. The letters were large, done in green. Flowers-
-cadena-de-amor--were woven in and out among the letters. The border was a long winding twig of
cadena-de-amor.
The children stood about the spreading mat. The air was punctuated by their breathless exclamations of
delight.
"It is beautiful, Jaime; it is beautiful!" Nana Emilia's voice broke, and she could not say any more.
"And this, I know, is my own," said Mr. Angeles of the next mat in the bundle. The mat was rather simply
decorated, the design almost austere, and the only colors used were purple and gold. The letters of the
name Jaime were in purple.
"And this, for your, Marcelina."
Marcelina was the oldest child. She had always thought her name too long; it had been one of her worries
with regard to the mat. "How on earth are they going to weave all of the letters of my name into my mat?"
she had asked of almost everyone in the family. Now it delighted her to see her whole name spelled out on
the mat, even if the letters were a little small. Besides, there was a device above her name which pleased
Marcelina very much. It was in the form of a lyre, finely done in three colors. Marcelina was a student of
music and was quite a proficient pianist.
7 "And this is for you, José."
José was the second child. He was a medical student already in the third year of medical school. Over his
name the symbol of Aesculapius was woven into the mat.
"You are not to use this mat until the year of your internship," Mr. Angeles was saying.
"This is yours, Antonia."
"And this is yours, Juan."

"And this is yours, Jesus."
Mat after mat was unfolded. On each of the children's mats there was somehow an appropriate device.
At least all the children had been shown their individual mats. The air was filled with their excited talk, and
through it all Mr. Angeles was saying over and over again in his deep voice:
"You are not to use these mats until you go to the University."
Then Nana Emilia noticed bewilderingly that there were some more mats remaining to be unfolded.
"But Jaime," Nana Emilia said, wondering, with evident repudiation, "there are some more mats."
8 Only Mr. Angeles seemed to have heard Nana Emilia's words. He suddenly stopped talking, as if he had
been jerked away from a pleasant fantasy. A puzzled, reminiscent look came into his eyes, superseding the
deep and quiet delight that had been briefly there, and when he spoke his voice was different.
"Yes, Emilia," said Mr. Angeles, "There are three more mats to unfold. The others who aren't here..."
Nana Emilia caught her breath; there was a swift constriction in her throat; her face paled and she could not
say anything.
The self-centered talk of the children also died. There was a silence as Mr. Angeles picked up the first of
the remaining mats and began slowly unfolding it.
The mat was almost as austere in design as Mr. Angeles' own, and it had a name. There was no symbol or
device above the name; only a blank space, emptiness.
The children knew the name. But somehow the name, the letters spelling the name, seemed strange to
them.
Then Nana Emilia found her voice.
"You know, Jaime, you didn't have to," Nana Emilia said, her voice hurt and surely frightened.
9 Mr. Angeles held his tears back; there was something swift and savage in the movement.
"Do you think I'd forgotten? Do you think I had forgotten them? Do you think I could forget them?
"This is for you, Josefina!
"And this is for you, Victoria!
"And this is for you, Concepcion."
Mr. Angeles called the names rather than uttered them.
"Don't, Jaime, please don't," was all that Nana Emilia managed to say.
"Is it fair to forget them? Would it be just to disregard them?" Mr. Angeles demanded rather than asked.
10 His voice had risen shrill, almost hysterical; it was also stern and sad, and somehow vindictive. Mr.
Angeles had spoken almost as if he were a stranger.
Also, he had spoken as if from a deep, grudgingly-silent, long-bewildered sorrow.

The children heard the words exploding in the silence. They wanted to turn away and not see the face of
their father. But they could neither move nor look away; his eyes held them, his voice held them where they
were. They seemed rooted to the spot.
Nana Emilia shivered once or twice, bowed her head, gripped her clasped hands between her thighs.
There was a terrible hush. The remaining mats were unfolded in silence. The names which were with
infinite slowness revealed, seemed strange and stranger still; the colors not bright but deathly dull; the
separate letters, spelling out the names of the dead among them, did not seem to glow or shine with a
festive sheen as did the other living names.
Task 1. Check Point

1. What presents did Mr.Angeles bring home for the family?

2. What made these mats special and unique?
3. How were the last three mats different from the rest?
4. What was the effect of death on the Angeles family?
Task 1. We Are Family
1. Describe the relationship among the members of the Angeles family using a sociogram.
2. Include the following details:
a. Names of the family members
b. Relationship to each other
c. Qualities or characteristics
d. Attitudes/Reactions towards the members
e. Family issues
Task 2. Spoken For

1. Write down the similarities and differences among the mats using the table.
Features of the mats Nana Miling Marcelina ----- -----
a. Materials
b. Design
2. Share your findings with the group using expressions like both, similar to, different from, on the
other hand, and the like.
3. Using the same group, talk about Filipino attitudes and practices regarding death.
4. Make an oral report of their similarities and differences.

Task 3. As You Like It
1. Read the following sentences and take note of the underlined phrases.
a. Talk about the mats flared up again like wildfire.
b. To the children it seemed as new as the first time it was spread before them.
c. The mat was almost as austere in design as Mr. Angeles' own, and it had a name.
d. The separate letters, spelling out the names of the dead among them, did not seem glow
or shine with a festive sheen as did the other living names.
2. Answer the following questions:
a. What two items are being compared in each sentence?

b. What words or expressions are used to compare them?
c. How does simile make a sentence more meaningful?
3. Compare and contrast the following people with objects. Use as and like in your sentences. Be
imaginative.
a. Your best friend
b. Your favorite artist
c. A political figure
d. A modern hero
e. You
4. Make a research regarding other cultures‘ burial practices and beliefs. Write a comparison-contrast
paragraph about these in relation to the Filipino culture. Use similes in your paragraph.
Task 3. Certainly Certain
1. Study the following phrases:
a. an occasion for celebration

b. a marvelous matweaver
c. our respective birthstones
d. that mat in his truck
e. whose name was in the center
2. Answer the questions that follow:
a. What word introduces each phrase?
b. What do these words do to the nouns in the phrases?
3. Look for phrases that are introduced by the determiners like a, an, the, that,, his, etc.
Task 4. Making It Whole
Read through the text. Supply the blanks with appropriate determiners. Write your answers on the blanks.

MISCELLANEOUS PAPERS ON MAT
WEAVING IN THE PHILIPPINES:
Mat Industry in Apalit, Province of Pampanga, Luzon
Patricio C. Gozum
There are two principal causes for the development of mat industry in Apalit : first is the supply of labor, and second,
the proximity of material. 1. _____ industry is appropriately called home industry of the Apalit mothers and women. In
general, 2. _____ girls learn the job at a very early age. It has been the custom there, especially among the poor and
middle classes, with the exception of the very few rich families, that 3. _____ woman who does not know how to
make mats is very lazy and is not one whom the Apalit young men regard with much respect. Thus the women who
work primarily to increase 4. _____ family income and those who learn the industry to gain the respect of the people,
form the aggregate labor for the development of 5. _____ industry. The increased demand for mats has recently
encouraged the mat weavers.
The material used is the leaves of the buri palm. The plant grows abundantly in Arayat ; but the facility of
transportation is such that, though 6. _____ plant does not thrive well in Apalit, the weavers can get their materials
easily. The Pampanga River serves as 7. _____ easy means for taking the buri leaves to Apalit with but very slight
expense in comparison with what the weavers get for their finished mats. The green leaves sink, but they can
easily be made to float by using 8. _____ banca (boat) of considerable size across which are fastened bamboo poles
to which in turn are attached the heavy buri leaves. Then they float and are carried along the river by the current
from Arayat down to Apalit where they are distributed to 9. _____ industrious women and girls.
In 10. _____ industry, there is also a division of labor. The women cannot leave the homes and go to Arayat to get
the material, so the men who can save time from their blacksmithing or farming have to go and get it.
Nowadays there are 11. _____ men who usually go to buy the buri leaves and sell them when they go to Apalit,
getting thus some profit for their enterprise. The boys or husbands of 12. _____ weavers take the leaves in bulk to
their homes, strip them from their stems and remove the ribs. The women and children then do the rest of the work
until mats ready for market are made. The buri left in the sunshine until it is dry. As soon as it is dry, it is rolled up so
that 13. _____ curled parts will become straight or flat. Now it is ready to be cut into narrow long strips to be woven
into mats. The mats thus made are called diawa. Oftentimes, they first boil 14. _____ buri with water mixed with
vinegar before they dry, roll, and strip it. The mats thus made with this boiled buri are called linaga, distinguished
from diawa in that the former is very white while 15. _____ latter is greyish.
Retrieved 29 January 2012 from nirc.nanzan-u.ac.jp/publications/afs/.../a74.pdf

YOUR FINAL TASK
Task 1. Nothing But the Truth

1. When conducting research, what library sources do you use?
2. Below are different sources of information, Group them into two. The first two items are done
for you.
interviews books
experiments encyclopedia magazines

newspapers observations questionnaires
speeches computer software documents
3. What is the common characteristic of the sources in the first column? in the second column?
4. What is the importance of primary sources in doing research?
5. When are secondary sources used?
Task 2: Sourcing Information
1. Locate examples of primary and secondary sources. In particular, look for a journal entry, an
anecdote, a travelogue, a personal letter, and a blog entry in the library.
2. Study them and summarize your findings in the table.
Sources Characteristics
3. Choose one from the tasks:

a. Assume that you are Mr. Angeles. Make a travelogue about your trips in Southern
Philippines.
b. Write a journal entry regarding personal experiences of losing a loved one.
c. Write a personal letter to Mr. Angeles expressing your sympathy and encouragement.
d. Write an anecdote on coping with a loss.

Lesson 3
Reconciling the Past and the Present
YOUR GOALS
This lesson makes you understand the importance of relationships and decision-making in
relation to societal norms. As you weave the old and the new, you must be able to:
1. Identify terms that express local color and use them to better understand a text
2. Note specific words or expressions that signal or emphasize crucial details in the narrative
listened to
3. Express agreement or disagreement on ideas presented in the selection
4. Identify and use analogy when comparing and contrasting
5. Use predictive and anticipatory devices about the topic of reading selection
6. Use information presented in a reading selection to infer, evaluate, and express critical ideas
7. Use varied noun complementation forms
8. Identify the features of secondary information sources
9. Write an anecdote based on a significant personal experience
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. Password
1. Draw the following:

a. caretela
b. calesa
c. camino real
d. papayas in bloom
e. saw-tooth rim of the hills
f. coconut husk
g. sinta
2. Study the following words and tell what they represent.

a. Ca Celin
b. Baldo
c. Labang
d. Manang/Manong
e. Maria
f. Leon
g. Hoy!
h. Waig
i. Lacay Julian
3. Read through again the sets of words in numbers 1 and 2.

a. What is common among them?
b. In what context are they usually used?
c. What does local color do when telling a story and describing a place, person, object,
or event?

Task 2. Once in a Lifetime
1. What do Filipinos usually consider in choosing a lifetime partner? Make a list of these
considerations and rank them according to importance.
2. Find out if these considerations are also observed by Noel and his family.
Task 3: Father and Son

1. Listen as your classmates read the dialogue between Baldo and his father.
2. Take note of words or expressions that emphasize crucial details.
YOUR TEXT
How My Brother Leon Brought Home a Wife
by Manuel Arguilla
(an excerpt)
There was no light in Father's room. There was no movement. He sat in the big armchair by the western window, and
a star shone directly through it. He was smoking, but he removed the roll of tobacco from his mouth when he saw
me. He laid it carefully on the windowsill before speaking.
"Did you meet anybody on the way?" he asked.
"No, Father," I said. "Nobody passes through the Waig at night."
He reached for his roll of tobacco and hitched himself up in the chair.
"She is very beautiful, Father."
"Was she afraid of Labang?" My father had not raised his voice, but the room seemed to resound with it. And again I
saw her eyes on the long curving horns and the arm of my brother Leon around her shoulders.
"No, Father, she was not afraid."
"On the way---"
"She looked at the stars, Father. And Manong Leon sang."
"What did he sing?"
"---Sky Sown with Stars... She sang with him."
He was silent again. I could hear the low voices of Mother and my sister Aurelia downstairs. There was also the voice
of my brother Leon, and I thought that Father's voice must have been like it when Father was young. He had laid the
roll of tobacco on the windowsill once more. I watched the smoke waver faintly upward from the lighted end and
vanish slowly into the night outside.
Task 1. Checkmate
1. Who were Baldo and his father talking about?

2. How did Baldo describe the woman?

3. What was the reaction of the father regarding the woman? Cite details from the text you listened
to.
4. What was the relationship of the woman to Manong Leon? Say the lines that indicate the
relationship.
5. Find out the whole story behind the dialogue. Read ―How My Brother Leon Brought Home a Wife‖
by Manuel Arguilla.
She stepped down from the carretela of Ca Celin with a quick, delicate grace. She was lovely. She was tall. She
looked up to my brother with a smile, and her forehead was on a level with his mouth.
"You are Baldo," she said and placed her hand lightly on my shoulder. Her nails were long, but they were not painted.
She was fragrant like a morning when papayas are in bloom. And a small dimple appeared momently high on her
right cheek. "And this is Labang of whom I have heard so much." She held the wrist of one hand with the other and
looked at Labang, and Labang never stopped chewing his cud. He swallowed and brought up to his mouth more cud
and the sound of his insides was like a drum.
I laid a hand on Labang's massive neck and said to her: "You may scratch his forehead now."
She hesitated and I saw that her eyes were on the long, curving horns. But she came and touched Labang's
forehead with her long fingers, and Labang never stopped chewing his cud except that his big eyes half closed. And
by and by she was scratching his forehead very daintily.
My brother Leon put down the two trunks on the grassy side of the road. He paid Ca Celin twice the usual fare from
the station to the edge of Nagrebcan. Then he was standing beside us, and she turned to him eagerly. I watched Ca
Celin, where he stood in front of his horse, and he ran his fingers through its forelock and could not keep his eyes
away from her.
"Maria---" my brother Leon said.
He did not say Maring. He did not say Mayang. I knew then that he had always called her Maria and that to us all she
would be Maria; and in my mind I said 'Maria' and it was a beautiful name.
"Yes, Noel."
Now where did she get that name? I pondered the matter quietly to myself, thinking Father might not like it. But it was
only the name of my brother Leon said backward and it sounded much better that way.
"There is Nagrebcan, Maria," my brother Leon said, gesturing widely toward the west.
She moved close to him and slipped her arm through his. And after a while she said quietly.
"You love Nagrebcan, don't you, Noel?"
Ca Celin drove away hi-yi-ing to his horse loudly. At the bend of the camino real where the big duhat tree grew, he
rattled the handle of his braided rattan whip against the spokes of the wheel.
We stood alone on the roadside.
The sun was in our eyes, for it was dipping into the bright sea. The sky was wide and deep and very blue above us:
but along the saw-tooth rim of the Katayaghan hills to the southwest flamed huge masses of clouds. Before us the
fields swam in a golden haze through which floated big purple and red and yellow bubbles when I looked at the
sinking sun. Labang's white coat, which I had wshed and brushed that morning with coconut husk, glistened like
beaten cotton under the lamplight and his horns appeared tipped with fire.
He faced the sun and from his mouth came a call so loud and vibrant that the earth seemed to tremble underfoot.
And far away in the middle of the field a cow lowed softly in answer.
"Hitch him to the cart, Baldo," my brother Leon said, laughing, and she laughed with him a big uncertainly, and I saw
that he had put his arm around her shoulders.
"Why does he make that sound?" she asked. "I have never heard the like of it."
"There is not another like it," my brother Leon said. "I have yet to hear another bull call like Labang. In all the world
there is no other bull like him."
She was smiling at him, and I stopped in the act of tying the sinta across Labang's neck to the opposite end of the
yoke, because her teeth were very white, her eyes were so full of laughter, and there was the small dimple high up
on her right cheek.
"If you continue to talk about him like that, either I shall fall in love with him or become greatly jealous."
My brother Leon laughed and she laughed and they looked at each other and it seemed to me there was a world of
laughter between them and in them.
I climbed into the cart over the wheel and Labang would have bolted, for he was always like that, but I kept a firm
hold on his rope. He was restless and would not stand still, so that my brother Leon had to say "Labang" several
times. When he was quiet again, my brother Leon lifted the trunks into the cart, placing the smaller on top.
She looked down once at her high-heeled shoes, then she gave her left hand to my brother Leon, placed a foot on
the hub of the wheel, and in one breath she had swung up into the cart. Oh, the fragrance of her. But Labang was
fairly dancing with impatience and it was all I could do to keep him from running away.
"Give me the rope, Baldo," my brother Leon said. "Maria, sit down on the hay and hold on to anything." Then he put a
foot on the left shaft and that instand labang leaped forward. My brother Leon laughed as he drew himself up to the
top of the side of the cart and made the slack of the rope hiss above the back of labang. The wind whistled against
my cheeks and the rattling of the wheels on the pebbly road echoed in my ears.
She sat up straight on the bottom of the cart, legs bent together to one side, her skirts spread over them so that only
the toes and heels of her shoes were visible. her eyes were on my brother Leon's back; I saw the wind on her hair.
When Labang slowed down, my brother Leon handed to me the rope. I knelt on the straw inside the cart and pulled
on the rope until Labang was merely shuffling along, then I made him turn around.
"What is it you have forgotten now, Baldo?" my brother Leon said.
I did not say anything but tickled with my fingers the rump of Labang; and away we went---back to where I had
unhitched and waited for them. The sun had sunk and down from the wooded sides of the Katayaghan hills shadows
were stealing into the fields. High up overhead the sky burned with many slow fires.
When I sent Labang down the deep cut that would take us to the dry bed of the Waig which could be used as a path
to our place during the dry season, my brother Leon laid a hand on my shoulder and said sternly:
"Who told you to drive through the fields tonight?"
His hand was heavy on my shoulder, but I did not look at him or utter a word until we were on the rocky bottom of the
Waig.

"Baldo, you fool, answer me before I lay the rope of Labang on you. Why do you follow the Waig instead of the
camino real?"
His fingers bit into my shoulder.
"Father, he told me to follow the Waig tonight, Manong."
Swiftly, his hand fell away from my shoulder and he reached for the rope of Labang. Then my brother Leon laughed,
and he sat back, and laughing still, he said:
"And I suppose Father also told you to hitch Labang to the cart and meet us with him instead of with Castano and the
calesa."
Without waiting for me to answer, he turned to her and said, "Maria, why do you think Father should do that, now?"
He laughed and added, "Have you ever seen so many stars before?"
I looked back and they were sitting side by side, leaning against the trunks, hands clasped across knees. Seemingly,
but a man's height above the tops of the steep banks of the Wait, hung the stars. But in the deep gorge the shadows
had fallen heavily, and even the white of Labang's coat was merely a dim, grayish blur. Crickets chirped from their
homes in the cracks in the banks. The thick, unpleasant smell of dangla bushes and cooling sun-heated earth
mingled with the clean, sharp scent of arrais roots exposed to the night air and of the hay inside the cart.
"Look, Noel, yonder is our star!" Deep surprise and gladness were in her voice. Very low in the west, almost touching
the ragged edge of the bank, was the star, the biggest and brightest in the sky.
"I have been looking at it," my brother Leon said. "Do you remember how I would tell you that when you want to see
stars you must come to Nagrebcan?"
"Yes, Noel," she said. "Look at it," she murmured, half to herself. "It is so many times bigger and brighter than it was
at Ermita beach."
"The air here is clean, free of dust and smoke."
"So it is, Noel," she said, drawing a long breath.
"Making fun of me, Maria?"
She laughed then and they laughed together and she took my brother Leon's hand and put it against her face.
I stopped Labang, climbed down, and lighted the lantern that hung from the cart between the wheels.
"Good boy, Baldo," my brother Leon said as I climbed back into the cart, and my heart sant.
Now the shadows took fright and did not crowd so near. Clumps of andadasi and arrais flashed into view and quickly
disappeared as we passed by. Ahead, the elongated shadow of Labang bobbled up and down and swayed drunkenly
from side to side, for the lantern rocked jerkily with the cart.
"Have we far to go yet, Noel?" she asked.
"Ask Baldo," my brother Leon said, "we have been neglecting him."
"I am asking you, Baldo," she said.

Without looking back, I answered, picking my words slowly:
"Soon we will get out of the Wait and pass into the fields. After the fields is home---Manong."
"So near already."
I did not say anything more because I did not know what to make of the tone of her voice as she said her last words.
All the laughter seemed to have gone out of her. I waited for my brother Leon to say something, but he was not
saying anything. Suddenly he broke out into song and the song was 'Sky Sown with Stars'---the same that he and
Father sang when we cut hay in the fields at night before he went away to study. He must have taught her the song
because she joined him, and her voice flowed into his like a gentle stream meeting a stronger one. And each time the
wheels encountered a big rock, her voice would catch in her throat, but my brother Leon would sing on, until,
laughing softly, she would join him again.
Then we were climbing out into the fields, and through the spokes of the wheels the light of the lantern mocked the
shadows. Labang quickened his steps. The jolting became more frequent and painful as we crossed the low dikes.
"But it is so very wide here," she said. The light of the stars broke and scattered the darkness so that one could see
far on every side, though indistinctly.
"You miss the houses, and the cars, and the people and the noise, don't you?" My brother Leon stopped singing.
"Yes, but in a different way. I am glad they are not here."
With difficulty I turned Labang to the left, for he wanted to go straight on. He was breathing hard, but I knew he was
more thirsty than tired. In a little while we drope up the grassy side onto the camino real.
"---you see," my brother Leon was explaining, "the camino real curves around the foot of the Katayaghan hills and
passes by our house. We drove through the fields because---but I'll be asking Father as soon as we get home."
"Noel," she said.
"Yes, Maria."
"I am afraid. He may not like me."
"Does that worry you still, Maria?" my brother Leon said. "From the way you talk, he might be an ogre, for all the
world. Except when his leg that was wounded in the Revolution is troubling him, Father is the mildest-tempered,
gentlest man I know."
We came to the house of Lacay Julian and I spoke to Labang loudly, but Moning did not come to the window, so I
surmised she must be eating with the rest of her family. And I thought of the food being made ready at home and my
mouth watered. We met the twins, Urong and Celin, and I said "Hoy!" calling them by name. And they shouted back
and asked if my brother Leon and his wife were with me. And my brother Leon shouted to them and then told me to
make Labang run; their answers were lost in the noise of the wheels.
I stopped labang on the road before our house and would have gotten down but my brother Leon took the rope and
told me to stay in the cart. He turned Labang into the open gate and we dashed into our yard. I thought we would
crash into the camachile tree, but my brother Leon reined in Labang in time. There was light downstairs in the
kitchen, and Mother stood in the doorway, and I could see her smiling shyly. My brother Leon was helping Maria over
the wheel. The first words that fell from his lips after he had kissed Mother's hand were:
"Father... where is he?"

"He is in his room upstairs," Mother said, her face becoming serious. "His leg is bothering him again."
I did not hear anything more because I had to go back to the cart to unhitch Labang. But I hardly tied him under the
barn when I heard Father calling me. I met my brother Leon going to bring up the trunks. As I passed through the
kitchen, there were Mother and my sister Aurelia and Maria and it seemed to me they were crying, all of them.
There was no light in Father's room. There was no movement. He sat in the big armchair by the western window, and
a star shone directly through it. He was smoking, but he removed the roll of tobacco from his mouth when he saw
me. He laid it carefully on the windowsill before speaking.
"Did you meet anybody on the way?" he asked.
"No, Father," I said. "Nobody passes through the Waig at night."
He reached for his roll of tobacco and hitched himself up in the chair.
"She is very beautiful, Father."
"Was she afraid of Labang?" My father had not raised his voice, but the room seemed to resound with it. And again I
saw her eyes on the long curving horns and the arm of my brother Leon around her shoulders.
"No, Father, she was not afraid."
"On the way---"
"She looked at the stars, Father. And Manong Leon sang."
"What did he sing?"
"---Sky Sown with Stars... She sang with him."
He was silent again. I could hear the low voices of Mother and my sister Aurelia downstairs. There was also the voice
of my brother Leon, and I thought that Father's voice must have been like it when Father was young. He had laid the
roll of tobacco on the windowsill once more. I watched the smoke waver faintly upward from the lighted end and
vanish slowly into the night outside.
The door opened and my brother Leon and Maria came in.
"Have you watered Labang?" Father spoke to me.
I told him that Labang was resting yet under the barn.
"It is time you watered him, my son," my father said.
I looked at Maria and she was lovely. She was tall. Beside my brother Leon, she was tall and very still. Then I went
out, and in the darkened hall the fragrance of her was like a morning when papayas are in bloom.

Task 1. First Impressions
1. What are your ideas about city women?

2. Is Maria a typical city woman? Illustrate her based on what Baldo had seen from their first
meeting to their arrival at home.
3. Will Maria a good wife for Leon? Justify your agreement or disagreement by citing
lines/details/events in the story.
Task 2. Rite of Passage
1. Was Maria accepted by the family?

2. Trace their journey showing the different tests she had undergone.
3. Use a six-frame comic strip to present your answers.
4. Do you agree in the way Leon‘s family tested Maria? Support your answer based on the text
and your experience.
Task 4. Mirror Image

1. Complete the following phrases. Get your answers from the selections.
Example: white is to good as black is to evil
a. fragrance is to sweet as _________ is to papayas in bloom

b. Nagrebcan is to sky sown with stars as Ermita beach is to __________
c. cars and noise are to city as clean air, free of dust and smoke is to_________
d. Maria is to __________ as Noel is to _________
e. call of Labang is to earth trembling underfoot as _________ is to a drum
2. Answer the following questions:

a. What two items are being compared in each phrase?
b. Why are these items compared?
c. What words are used to show this comparison?
d. How is this figure of speech different from simile and metaphor?
3. Bring out a picture of a scenic spot in the Philippines. Study it and write descriptive sentences
using analogy.
Task 3. Paint Me a Picture
1. Study the sentences and find out the relationship between the bold and italicized words.
a. There was a world of laughter between them and in them.

b. Crickets chirped from their homes in the cracks in the banks.
c. Father gave instructions to pass the Waig and into the fields instead of the camino real.
d. Labang‘s white coat, which I had washed and brushed that morning, glistened like beaten
cotton.
2. What is being modified in by the groups of words of laughter? in the cracks? to pass the Waig
and into the fields? which I had washed and brushed that morning?
3. How are these modifiers or complements formed?
4. What do noun complements do in sentences?
5. Look for examples of noun complements in the story. Identify their forms using the table below.

Prepositional Phrases Infinitives Clauses
Task 4: Create and Share
1. Below is the copy of the song titled ―Sky Sown With Stars.‖
2. Locate noun complements in the song.
3. With your groupmates, understand the song and replace the noun complements with
another set of noun complements.
4. Make sure that the new set will create different images in the song.
Examples:
Original: A thousand times in my dreams I have walked with you,
Hand in hand, down the glittery way,
Without a worry, not a care in the world
New: A thousand times of joy and pain, I have walked with you,
Without a worry, not a care to be drowned by rain and fear
Sky Sown With Stars
A thousand times in my dreams I have walked with you,

Without a worry, not a care in the world,
No sorrow, no torture, no dismay,
There we were: two figures in the incessant night,
Swallowed by the searing darkness,
Embraced by the fleeting sadness,
And then we would look to the sky and see,
The shining harvest of the distant stars,
Our sky, our sky, my Starlight,
Our sky sown with stars.
We would find a blissful spot along the shore,

And sit down together, in the flowing sand,
Feeling it warm our bodies.
We would see the waves crash gently, on the beach,
And retreat towards the ocean again.
The dark blue sky and pale yellow moonlight,
Would touch our skin and beg us to look up again,
To the dark blue blanket in the sky,
Our dark blue blanket in the sky,
Our sky sown with stars.
You would lay your drowsy head on my shoulder,

and I would sense your sorrows, fears, and joys,
As the night grows younger, the breeze colder,
I would kiss your eyes and hold your hand,
Tonight, I am the universe's happiest being.
With you, with you, my Muse,
Together in this eternity of light,
Souls in love, souls in deep love,
Bound together in the evening,
Looking up the sky, heavenward to the stars,
Our sky still sown with stars.
Then you would weep gently in your bliss,

And I would taste the sadness, taste the tears,
The beauty makes us sigh, the sky made us cry,
Our heavens, our skies, still glittering away,
We savor the sweet night until the break of day,
No word has passed thru our lips,
Just the touch, the love, in our fingertips,
Glancing at each other in deep passion,
Our voices lost in the silent hum of the ocean,
Our souls wedlocked in the pale moonlight,
Our foreheads touching, see the sky! The warmth!
Our sky, my Muse, this is ours, our sky,
Our ocean, our sand, our moment, our love,
And our sky sown with stars.
Retrieved 29 January 2012 from http://www.ziyifilms.com/zboard/showthread.php3?t=7572
YOUR FINAL TASK
Task 1. Seeking Second Opinion

1. Differentiate primary from secondary sources.
2. Name examples of secondary sources found in the library.
3. When do we use secondary sources in doing a research?
4. Look for secondary sources on any of the following topics:
a. Manuel Arguilla
b. Nagrebcan
c. Filipino courtship and marriage customs
d. Rural and city life
e. Gender issues in relationships
5. Take down important notes and cite the secondary that you used.
Task 2: A Slice of Life

1. Think of an experience when expectations of loved ones like family or of society are not met.
2. What were these expectations?
3. Why were you not able to fulfill them?
4. How did your decision affect your relationship with these people?
5. Write an anecdote narrating this experience. Highlight lessons learned from defying
expectations.

Lesson 4
Loving is Giving
YOUR GOALS
This lesson allows you to look into the importance of meaningful relationships
established over time. Discover how love entails sacrifice. You must aim to:
1. Draw out the message of a song listened to.

2. Compare and contrast the emotion of the song and the poem.
3. Express differing views on when loveis worth fighting for.
4. Establish a familiar ground on tribal culture.
5. Use information presented in acreation story to infer, to evaluate, and to express
critical ideas.
6. Determine the purpose of irony in a story.
7. Narrow a topic to manage the selection of information from available search
engines or tools in the library.
8. Create a travelogue.
9. Use varied verb complementation forms.
10. Compose a song.
11. Express creatively perspectives on a significant human experience drawn out
from the discussions.
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1.Sit Back, Relax, and Relish the Music
There are a lot of songs that take you somewhere back to your past. It may be a
past experience from your life or a past experience from a story you have seen in a film
or you have read from a book. Songs may even bring you back from the stories told to
you by a family member or a close friend.
Listen to the song (and glance at its lyrics) and you may:
1. Take down words that caught your attention;

2. Draw images which you could associate with the song;
3. Write big words which may represent the emotion caught by the song;
4. Enumerate as many feelings that the song may draw out from you; and,
5. Write your responses in your notebook.

I Don’t Want You to Go
(Music Version: By Kyla; MTV Direction: TrebMonteras II fromhttp://www.lyricsmode.com/lyrics© 2012)
Here I am
Alone and I don't understand
Exactly how it all began
The dream just walked away
I'm holding on dont_want_you_to_go.html ]

When all but the passion's gone Oh it's just too much
Takin' all the whole world all by
And from the start myself
Maybe I was tryin' too hard But it's not enough
It's crazy coz it's breakin' my heart Unless I stop trusting somebody
Things can fall apart but I know, else,
That I don't want you to go Somebody else
And love again
And heroes die,
When they ignore the cause inside And from the start
But they learn from what's left behind Maybe we were tryin' too hard
And fight for something else It's crazy coz it's breakin' our
hearts
And so it goes Things can fall apart but I know,
That we have both learned how to grow That I don't want you to go, no
[ Ly Maybe we were tryin' to hard
And from the start It's crazy coz it's breakin' our
Maybe we were tryin' too hard hearts
It's crazy coz it's breakin' our heart Things can fall apart but I know,
Things can fall apart but I know, That I don't want you to go
That I don't want you to go Oh no, don't want you to go
ricom:
http://www.lyricsmode.com/lyrics/k/kyla/i_
What was the message of the persona in the song? Write T (True) if you agree
with the statement and F (False) if you disagree. Write your answer in a one-half
lengthwise sheet of paper.
_____ 1. The persona in the song expresses the pain of letting go.
_____ 2.The persona, too, has let go of the relationship.
_____ 3. The persona is aware of how things will go in the end.
_____ 4. The persona and the beloved have grown by letting go.
_____ 5. The persona is ready to love again.
PAIR WORK. Seat close next to your seatmate and share ideas.
1. Pick a statement from the 5 items and share your answer to your partner.
2. Take a line from the song to support your answer.
3. Share a story you have encountered from the past, whether fiction or non-
fiction, which you could relate with the song.
4. Write down your and your seatmate‘s insight about the song.
Task 2.On the Other Side
Have you ever thought of a reply to the song? Have you

ever wondered what could be in the mind of the other person
who is also saying goodbye? Read on and answer the
questions the follow.
I Watch You Go
By Susanah Thompson © 1996 from http://journeyofhearts.org/kirstimd/watch.htm
I see your eyes, And someday soon I think

one final glance as you look back at me, I will find a haven
Although I swore Where I can cry the tears
I would never have to let you go And let the salt water cleanse the
It‘s a promise I cannot keep. wounds
So they can begin to heal
I need to live But now is not the time.
and you need to grow.
One hand raised
My heart folds back onto itself I salute you
And I just bend my knees and lower my With a wave of good-bye
center Wishing you all the blessings of
To withstand the buffet of the winds this earth
That will blow me, And when we meet again
and through me it won‘t be the same
Without you standing there to shelter me. But we will always know
The tether is cut, How much we loved

and you are free to fly and trusted
and I lose an anchor, and shared
and my cheeks burn, Victories, losses, adventures
from the icy wind and just the passage of time.
and the few tears that sneak past the wall
That I am leaning on Look back no more
so that I can stand Eyes to the future
and watch you go. And I will just stand here
and watch you go.
Does the persona in the poem carry the same weight of pain with that of the
persona in the song? Write T (True) if you agree with the statement and F (False) if you
disagree. Write your answer in a one-half lengthwise sheet of paper.
_____ 1. The persona speaks more of courage in letting go.

_____ 2. The persona asserts the need to let go.
_____ 3. The persona does not feel much hurt or pain.
_____ 4. The persona still cares for the other person.
_____ 5. The persona treasures everything they have been through.
PAIR WORK. Seat close next to your seatmate and share ideas.
1. Pick a statement from the 5 items and share your answer to your partner.
2. Take a line from the song to support your answer.
3. Define together what letting go means.
4. Write down what you and your seatmate do not agree upon.
Task 3. Face-to-Face!
A Debate. What are the two sides of the coin in separation? Should you fight for the
one you love? Or should you let go and take in all of the hurt for the other‘s sake?
People in a relationship do not exist on its own. Assume, think, approximate!
There are several possible reasons why the persona in the song and the poem
would need to let go or should not let go:
1. Intervening parents
2. Differing culture or religion
3. Imposing rules of society
3. Tempting career advancement
4. Existing physical distance
5. Discovering a third party
In defending one‘s argument, you need to:

1. Identify your side of the issue (Fight for it / Let go);
2. Deliver a minute presentation of your issue;
3. Allow the other side to present a minute argument;
4. Permit the opponent for a rebuttal (opposing view); and,
5. Take turns in presenting the argument.
There are four sets of debate in the class. Each set and each group in each set plans
and collaborate to:
1. Choose one topic ground for debate from the given reasons;
2. Choose a side to defend (for/against);
3. Designate the following tasks: presenter of the issue, leader for research,
leader for formulating questions, and the recorder of tasks accomplished;
4. Gather materials for support; and,
5. Prepare for debate on Day 4.
HOMEWORK:
1. Read the story Wedding Dance by Amador Daguio
2. Answer the preview items (Task 4) before reading the text.

Task 4. Yes, Filipinos Can Dance!
Filipinos don‘t just sing well, Filipinos dance well, too. From the given clues and
the picture that accompanies it, be able to match the type of some Filipino dances taken
from varied regions of the country. Write your answers on a one-fourth sheet of paper.
1. 2.
Cordillera Dance,
Muslim dance,
Benguet
Leyte
This is a couple‘s dance in which the girl holds a This is a circle dance, which is being
handkerchief laced with camphor oil, a substance performed to celebrate the arrival of
that supposedly induces romance. successful headhunters.
3. 4.
Tribal Dance, Davao Cordillera Dance,
del Norte Ifugao
A tribal dance from the Bagobo tribe which This is a festival dance performed by the
portrays the cycle of planting and harvesting Ifugao men and women during a major feast
rice accompanied by gangsa or gongs.
What would those dances be?

a. Dinuyya
b. Bagobo Rice Cycle
c. Alcamflor
d. Bendayan
e. Itik-Itik

YOUR TEXT
Wedding Dance
by Amador Daguio
1
Awiyao reached for the upper horizontal log which served as the edge of the head high
threshold. Clinging to the log, he lifted himself with one bound that carried him across
to the narrow door. He slid back the cover, stepped inside, then pushed the cover back
in place. After some moments during which he seemed to wait, he talked to the listening
darkness.
2
"I'm sorry this had to be done. I am really sorry. But neither of us can help it."
3
The sound of the gangsas beat through the walls of the dark house like muffled
roars of falling waters. The woman who had moved with a start when the sliding door
opened had been hearing the gangsas for she did not know how long. There was a
sudden rush of fire in her. She gave no sign that she heard Awiyao, but continued to sit
unmoving in the darkness.
4
But Awiyao knew that she heard him and his heart pitied her. He crawled on all
fours to the middle of the room; he knew exactly where the stove was. With bare fingers
he stirred the covered smoldering embers, and blew into the stove. When the coals
began to glow, Awiyao put pieces of pine on them, then full round logs as his arms. The
room brightened.
5
"Why don't you go out," he said, "and join the dancing women?" He felt a pang
inside him, because what he said was really not the right thing to say and because the
woman did not stir. "You should join the dancers," he said, "as if--as if nothing had
happened." He looked at the woman huddled in a corner of the room, leaning against
the wall. The stove fire played with strange moving shadows and lights upon her face.
She was partly sullen, but her sullenness was not because of anger or hate.
6
"Go out--go out and dance. If you really don't hate me for this separation, go out
and dance. One of the men will see you dance well; he will like your dancing, he will
marry you. Who knows but that, with him, you will be luckier than you were with me."
7
"I don't want any man," she said sharply. "I don't want any other man."
8
He felt relieved that at least she talked: "You know very well that I won't want
any other woman either. You know that, don't you? Lumnay, you know it, don't you?"
9
She did not answer him.
"You know it Lumnay, don't you?" he repeated.
"Yes, I know," she said weakly.

10
"It is not my fault," he said, feeling relieved. "You cannot blame me; I have been
a good husband to you."
11
"Neither can you blame me," she said. She seemed about to cry.
12
"No, you have been very good to me. You have been a good wife. I have
nothing to say against you." He set some of the burning wood in place. "It's only that a
man must have a child. Seven harvests is just too long to wait. Yes, we have waited too
long. We should have another chance before it is too late for both of us."
13
This time the woman stirred, stretched her right leg out and bent her left leg in.
She wound the blanket more snugly around herself.
14
"You know that I have done my best," she said. "I have prayed to Kabunyan
much. I have sacrificed many chickens in my prayers."
"Yes, I know."
15
"You remember how angry you were once when you came home from your
work in the terrace because I butchered one of our pigs without your permission? I did it
to appease Kabunyan, because, like you, I wanted to have a child. But what could I
do?"
16
"Kabunyan does not see fit for us to have a child," he said. He stirred the fire.
The spark rose through the crackles of the flames. The smoke and soot went up the
ceiling.
18
Lumnay looked down and unconsciously started to pull at the rattan that kept
the split bamboo flooring in place. She tugged at the rattan flooring. Each time she did
this the split bamboo went up and came down with a slight rattle. The gong of the
dancers clamorously called in her care through the walls.
19
Awiyao went to the corner where Lumnay sat, paused before her, looked at her
bronzed and sturdy face, then turned to where the jars of water stood piled one over the
other. Awiyao took a coconut cup and dipped it in the top jar and drank. Lumnay had
filled the jars from the mountain creek early that evening.
20
"I came home," he said. "Because I did not find you among the dancers. Of
course, I am not forcing you to come, if you don't want to join my wedding ceremony. I
came to tell you that Madulimay, although I am marrying her, can never become as
good as you are. She is not as strong in planting beans, not as fast in cleaning water
jars, not as good keeping a house clean. You are one of the best wives in the
whole village."
21
"That has not done me any good, has it?" She said. She looked at him lovingly.
She almost seemed to smile.
22
He put the coconut cup aside on the floor and came closer to her. He held her
face between his hands and looked longingly at her beauty. But her eyes looked away.
Never again would he hold her face. The next day she would not be his any more. She
would go back to her parents. He let go of her face, and she bent to the floor again and
looked at her fingers as they tugged softly at the split bamboo floor.
23
"This house is yours," he said. "I built it for you. Make it your own, live in it as
long as you wish. I will build another house for Madulimay."
"I have no need for a house," she said slowly. "I'll go to my own house. My
parents are old. They will need help in the planting of the beans, in the pounding of the
rice."
24
"I will give you the field that I dug out of the mountains during the first year of
our marriage," he said. "You know I did it for you. You helped me to make it for the two
of us."
"I have no use for any field," she said.
He looked at her, then turned away, and became silent. They were silent for a
time.
25
"Go back to the dance," she said finally. "It is not right for you to be here. They
will wonder where you are, and Madulimay will not feel good. Go back to the dance."
26
"I would feel better if you could come, and dance---for the last time. The
gangsas are playing."
"You know that I cannot."

27
"Lumnay," he said tenderly. "Lumnay, if I did this it is because of my need for a
child. You know that life is not worth living without a child. The men have mocked me
behind my back. You know that."
"I know it," she said. "I will pray that Kabunyan will bless you and Madulimay."
28
She bit her lips now, then shook her head wildly, and sobbed.
29
She thought of the seven harvests that had passed, the high hopes they had in
the beginning of their new life, the day he took her away from her parents across the
roaring river, on the other side of the mountain, the trip up the trail which they had to
climb, the steep canyon which they had to cross. The waters boiled in her mind in forms
of white and jade and roaring silver; the waters tolled and growled,
resounded in thunderous echoes through the walls of the stiff cliffs; they were far away
now from somewhere on the tops of the other ranges, and they had looked carefully at
the buttresses of rocks they had to step on---a slip would have meant death.
30
They both drank of the water then rested on the other bank before they made
the final climb to the other side of the mountain.
31
She looked at his face with the fire playing upon his features---hard and strong,
and kind. He had a sense of lightness in his way of saying things which often made her
and the village people laugh. How proud she had been of his humor. The muscles
where taut and firm, bronze and compact in their hold upon his skull---how frank his
bright eyes were. She looked at his body the carved out of the mountains
five fields for her; his wide and supple torso heaved as if a slab of shining lumber were
heaving; his arms and legs flowed down in fluent muscles--he was strong and for that
she had lost him.
32
She flung herself upon his knees and clung to them. "Awiyao, Awiyao, my
husband," she cried. "I did everything to have a child," she said passionately in a hoarse
whisper. "Look at me," she cried. "Look at my body. Then it was full of promise. It could
dance; it could work fast in the fields; it could climb the mountains fast. Even now it is
firm, full. But, Awiyao, I am useless. I must die."
33
"It will not be right to die," he said, gathering her in his arms. Her whole warm
naked naked breast quivered against his own; she clung now to his neck, and her hand
lay upon his right shoulder; her hair flowed down in cascades of gleaming darkness.
34
"I don't care about the fields," she said. "I don't care about the house. I don't
care for anything but you. I'll have no other man."
"Then you'll always be fruitless."

35
"I'll go back to my father, I'll die."
"Then you hate me," he said. "If you die it means you hate me. You do not want
me to have a child. You do not want my name to live on in our tribe."
She was silent.

36
"If I do not try a second time," he explained, "it means I'll die. Nobody will get
the fields I have carved out of the mountains; nobody will come after me."
37
"If you fail--if you fail this second time--" she said thoughtfully. The voice was a
shudder. "No--no, I don't want you to fail."
38
"If I fail," he said, "I'll come back to you. Then both of us will die together. Both
of us will vanish from the life of our tribe."
39
The gongs thundered through the walls of their house, sonorous and faraway.
40
"I'll keep my beads," she said. "Awiyao, let me keep my beads," she half-
whispered.
"You will keep the beads. They come from far-off times. My grandmother said
they come from up North, from the slant-eyed people across the sea. You keep them,
Lumnay. They are worth twenty fields."
"I'll keep them because they stand for the love you have for me," she said. "I love
you. I love you and have nothing to give."
41
She took herself away from him, for a voice was calling out to him from outside.
"Awiyao! Awiyao! O Awiyao! They are looking for you at the dance!"
"I am not in hurry."
"The elders will scold you. You had better go."
"Not until you tell me that it is all right with you."

42
"It is all right with me."
He clasped her hands. "I do this for the sake of the tribe," he said.
"I know," she said.
He went to the door.

43
"Awiyao!"
44
He stopped as if suddenly hit by a spear. In pain he turned to her. Her face was
in agony. It pained him to leave. She had been wonderful to him. What was it that made
a man wish for a child? What was it in life, in the work in the field, in the planting and
harvest, in the silence of the night, in the communing with husband and wife, in the
whole life of the tribe itself that made man wish for the laughter and speech of a child?
Suppose he changed his mind? Why did the unwritten law demand, anyway, that a
man, to be a man, must have a child to come after him? And if he was fruitless--but he
loved Lumnay. It was like taking away of his life to leave her like this.
45
"Awiyao," she said, and her eyes seemed to smile in the light. "The beads!" He
turned back and walked to the farthest corner of their room, to the trunk where they kept
their worldly possession---his battle-ax and his spear points, her betel nut box and her
beads. He dug out from the darkness the beads which had been given to him by his
grandmother to give to Lumnay on the beads on, and tied them in place. The white and
jade and deep orange obsidians shone in the firelight. She suddenly clung to him, clung
to his neck as if she would never let him go.
46
"Awiyao! Awiyao, it is hard!" She gasped, and she closed her eyes and buried
her face in his neck.
47
The call for him from the outside repeated; her grip loosened, and he buried out
into the night.
48
Lumnay sat for some time in the darkness. Then she went to the door and
opened it. The moonlight struck her face; the moonlight spilled itself on the whole
village.
49
She could hear the throbbing of the gangsas coming to her through the caverns
of the other houses. She knew that all the houses were empty that the whole tribe was
at the dance. Only she was absent. And yet was she not the best dancer of the village?
Did she not have the most lightness and grace? Could she not, alone among all women,
dance like a bird tripping for grains on the ground, beautifully
timed to the beat of the gangsas? Did not the men praise her supple body, and the
women envy the way she stretched her hands like the wings of the mountain eagle now
and then as she danced? How long ago did she dance at her own wedding? Tonight, all
the women who counted, who once danced in her honor, were dancing now in honor of
another whose only claim was that perhaps she could give her
husband a child.
50
"It is not right. It is not right!" she cried. "How does she know? How can
anybody know? It is not right," she said.
51
Suddenly she found courage. She would go to the dance. She would go to the
chief of the village, to the elders, to tell them it was not right. Awiyao was hers; nobody
could take him away from her. Let her be the first woman to complain, to denounce the
unwritten rule that a man may take another woman. She would tell Awiyao to come
back to her. He surely would relent. Was not their love as strong as the
river?
52
She made for the other side of the village where the dancing was. There was a
flaming glow over the whole place; a great bonfire was burning. The gangsas clamored
more loudly now, and it seemed they were calling to her. She was near at last. She
could see the dancers clearly now. The man leaped lightly with their gangsas as they
circled the dancing women decked in feast garments and beads, tripping on the ground
like graceful birds, following their men. Her heart warmed to the flaming call of the
dance; strange heat in her blood welled up, and she started to run. But the gleaming
brightness of the bonfire commanded her to stop. Did anybody see her approach?
She stopped. What if somebody had seen her coming? The flames of the bonfire leaped
in countless sparks which spread and rose like yellow points and died out in the night.
The blaze reached out to her like a spreading radiance. She did not have the courage to
break into the wedding feast.
53
Lumnay walked away from the dancing ground, away from the village. She
thought of the new clearing of beans which Awiyao and she had started to make only
four moons before. She followed the trail above the village.
54
When she came to the mountain stream she crossed it carefully. Nobody held
her hand, and the stream water was very cold. The trail went up again, and she was in
the moonlight shadows among the trees and shrubs. Slowly she climbed the mountain.
55
When Lumnay reached the clearing, she could see from where she stood the
blazing bonfire at the edge of the village, where the wedding was. She could hear the
far-off clamor of the gongs, still rich in their sonorousness, echoing from mountain to
mountain. The sound did not mock her; they seemed to call far to her, to speak to her in
the language of unspeaking love. She felt the pull of their gratitude for her
sacrifice. Her heartbeat began to sound to her like many gangsas.

56
Lumnay though of Awiyao as the Awiyao she had known long ago-- a strong,
muscular boy carrying his heavy loads of fuel logs down the mountains to his home.
She had met him one day as she was on her way to fill her clay jars with water. He had
stopped at the spring to drink and rest; and she had made him drink the cool mountain
water from her coconut shell. After that it did not take him long to decide to throw his
spear on the stairs of her father's house in token on his desire to marry her.
58
The mountain clearing was cold in the freezing moonlight. The wind began to
stir the leaves of the bean plants. Lumnay looked for a big rock on which to sit down.
The bean plants now surrounded her, and she was lost among them.
59
A few more weeks, a few more months, a few more harvests---what did it
matter? She would be holding the bean flowers, soft in the texture, silken almost, but
moist where the dew got into them, silver to look at, silver on the light blue, blooming
whiteness, when the morning comes. The stretching of the bean pods full length from
the hearts of the wilting petals would go on.
60
Lumnay's fingers moved a long, long time among the growing bean pods.
Task 1. How Ironic!
Have you ever said one thing yet mean another thing? That is so ironic!
It happens often when your teacher asks you if you understood the discussion
then you would reply, ―Yes, Sir,‖ or ―Yes, Ma‘am,‖ when you really are not so
sure you understood. Or when your friend tells you how good the film was and
you would say, ―I agree,‖ yet the expression in your face is so flat.
Write I (Ironic) if the statement of the characters in the story is ironic, and then
explain the meaning behind the ironic statement. If the statement is not ironic just leave
the item blank. Write your answer on a one-whole sheet of paper.
_____ 1. . ―Of course, I am not forcing you to come, if you don't want to join my
wedding ceremony.‖ ( Awiyao, Paragraph 20)
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
______ 2. ―I have no need for a house… I have no use for any field.‖ (Lumnay,
Paragraphs 23 & 24)
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________

______ 3. "I will pray that Kabunyan will bless you and Madulimay." She bit her
lips now, then shook her head wildly, and sobbed. (Lumnay,
Paragraphs 27 & 28)
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
______ 4. "No--no, I don't want you to fail." (Lumnay, Paragraph 37)
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______ 5. "It is all right with me." (Lumnay, Paragraph 42)
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
One More. Are all statements a form of verbal irony? Explain.
_______________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

(T) or false (F). Write your answer in the one-whole sheet of paper.
_____ 1. The story says aloud that a man who loves unconditionally should give
up his or her happiness for the beloved.
_____ 2. The title speaks of the dance that happened in the wedding of Awiyao
and Madulimay.
_____ 3. Awiyao and Lumnay still confessed their love for each other in the midst
of their separation.
_____ 4. The presence of darkness in the story symbolizes the sadness in their
hearts in contrast to the ember in the fire logs that represents their
strong and deep love for each other.
_____ 5. The beads given to Lumnay by Awiyao will be given to Madulimay in
the wedding.
_____ 6. Awiyao is more courageous than Lumnay to surrender his love and take
all the hurt that goes with it.
_____ 7. The tribe‘s convention and practice on raising a family bore much
burden to Awiyao and Lumnay.
_____ 8. The gangsas represent the tribe‘s rule and power.
_____ 9. Lumnay is triumphant in the end of the story.
_____ 10. The story speaks of sacrifice and love.
Task 3. The Dance in the Story

Basic dance necessitates a step forward and a step backward. A step forward
to a dancing partner may mean intimacy and a step backward away from the dancing
partner may mean letting go.
PAIR WORK. Write F (Forward) if the character just did a forward step and B
(Backward) if the character did a backward step through the
given lines in the story.
_____ 1. Awiyao went to the corner where Lumnay sat. (Para. 19)
_____ 2. But her eyes looked away. (Para. 22)
_____ 3. He let go of her face. (Para. 22)
_____ 4. He looked at her, then turned away…(Para. 24)
_____ 5. She flung herself upon his knees and clung to them. (Para. 32)
_____ 6. …Gathering her in his arms. (Para. 33)
_____ 7. She clung now to his neck, and her hand upon his right
shoulder…(Para. 33)
_____ 8. She took herself away from him. (Para. 41)
_____ 9. He clasped her hands. (Para. 42)
_____ 10. He went to the door. (Parag. 42)
_____ 11. He stopped. (Para. 44) He turned back. (Para. 45)
_____ 12. She suddenly clung to him, clung to his neck as if she would never let
him go. (Para. 45)
_____ 13. Her grip loosened. (Para. 47)
_____ 14. He buried out into the night. (Para. 47)
Task 4. You Can Dance!
What can be more close to the story than being part of the story--this time in a
different dimension. Interpret the emotion, thoughts, and promises that Awiyao and
Lumnay have for each other in the story through a dance. Were they really saying
goodbye to each other for real? Or were they giving a commitment they would hold on
to even if they would be separated from each other.
In groups of ten, be able to:

1. Choose a song to capture the mood of the night, the intensity of the struggle of
emotion, and the depth of feeling Awiyao and Lumnay have for each other;
(The song choice alone gives away a big part of your interpretation of what‘s
going on with the two characters.)
2. Decide if there will be set of pairs for the group presentation or the members of
the group will belong to two sets, respectively for the moves of the two
characters;
3. Define clearly the end of the dance for it will answer the questions presented
for this activity—is it goodbye or renewed commitment?;
4. Make it creative but keep the moves simple, just enough for the given time of
preparation; and,
5. Rehearse for Day 4 presentation.
Task 5. Watch Out!
Study the following sentences. Each item has two sentences, one is with the
correct use of verb forms (words that follow the verb) while the other one has an
incorrect use of verb forms. Choose the correct sentence. Write your answer on a one-
half-sheet of paper.
_____ 1. a. Lumnay seems having a problem.

b. Lumnay seems to have a problem.
_____ 2. a. Awiyao must start moving on with his life.
b. Awiyao must stop to move on with his life.
_____ 3. a. Awiyao and Lumnay found their love unbroken even with the tribe‘s
intrusion.
b. Awiyao and Lumnay
_____ 4. a. Lumnay explained to end her life.
b. Lumnay explained ending her life.
Verbs have features or complements to determine how many other words would
follow. Many verbs can be followed by:
1. An object;
2. A verb structure; or,
3. An expression that has information about the object (of the verb).
CHECK THE RULES!

So what are these forms or features which may follow the main verb in the
sentence?
1. Verbs followed by one object: the direct object (DO) or the indirect object (IO).
a. Awiyao asked Lumnay.
b. Awiyao asked a question.
2. Verbs followed by two objects: the indirect object, usually a person, comes first
before the direct object.
a. Awiyao asked Lumnay a question.

b. Awiyao gave her the beads.
Some of the verbs which can be followed by two objects are: bring, buy, cost,
get, give, leave, lend, make, offer, owe, pass, pay, play, promise, read, refuse,
send, show, sing, take, teach, tell, wish, write.
3. Verbs explain, suggest, and describe are not used with the structure IO + DO.
a. ―Awiyao, please explain your decision to me.‖ (DO + IO)
b. ―Can you describe a good wedding dance to me?‖
Incorrect: ―Can you describe me a good wedding dance?‖
4. Verbs followed by object + infinitive, rather than by a that-clause

a. ―I don‘t want him to go.‖
Incorrect: ―I don‘t want that he goes.‖
b. ―We didn‘t allow Awiyao and Lumnay to continue living together.‖
Incorrect: ―We didn‘t allow Awiyao and Lumnay that they continue living
together.‖
Task 6. It Wasn’t Meant to Be
Tragic love stories happen when people who are so much in love don‘t end up
together. Know about them as you identify the verb feature pattern. Choose from the
patterns below. Write the letter of the correct answer on the one-half sheet of paper.
A. Verbs followed by one object
B. Verbs followed by two objects
C. Verbs followed by object + infinitive
1. Phantom of the Opera (2004);

______ a. The phantom led us to believe that he loves Christine.
______ b. Christine leaves the Phantom heart-broken when she goes with
Raoul.
2. Ghost (1990)
______ a. Molly and Sam looked like the perfect couple with a love everyone
would dream about.
______ b. Molly has the love of her life taken away from her all too soon.
3. Titanic (1997)
______ a. It was the ship of dreams and Rose met Jack Dawson.
______ b. Rose never told anyone about Jack until telling her story of the
Titanic.
4. Gone with the Wind (1939)

______ a. Scarlet and Rhett were made for each other.
______ b. Scarlet realizes that she loves Rhett, but it‘s too late.
5. The Bridges of Madison Country (1995)

______ a. The film shows us how love can really catch you off guard.
______ b. Francesca loves Robert, but she cannot leave her children.

Task 7. A Trip to the Countryside
Lumnay would have wanted to have anyone as company in her time of

solitude. Would anyone be delighted to be by her side, to walk through the
clearing, and to sit in the middle of the bean flowers?
In groups of three, you need to create a travelogue and invite people to

the countryside where Lumnay resides. A travelogue is a full-page
advertisement of a destination place for travelers.
In creating a travelogue, do not

forget to:
1. Research about the place;
2. Choose the best scenery

of potential interest;
3. Decide what to include about

the place: the animals, the
people, or the food;
4. Refer to some significant

elements in the story of
Awiyao and Lumnay; and,
5. Make a colorful and creative

layout of your travelogue.
YOUR FINAL TASK
A Peek Into the World of Awiyao and Lumnay
You are challenged to perform a creative take on the literary piece, The Wedding
Dance, through your big steps in your Face-to-Face! (the informal debate) challenge
and your small steps in the You Can Dance! Challenge (the interpretative dance).
In the Face-to-Face challenge, you are required to:

1. Evaluate your individual and group performance;
2. Choose the side of the issue after hearing both sides form all the sets
listened to;
3. Justify your choice of the side by mentioning and explaining the best
argument (quote the one who said it); and,
4. Rate through the scale of: 3, high level of performance; 2, moderate level of
performance; and 1, displays low level of performance.
The score sheets for the Face-to-Face challenge:
Self-Evaluation Group Evaluation

Individual
Participation Grade Performance Group Grade
Planning Opening
statement
Preparing
Rebuttals
Performing
Support
Total
Total
In the You Can Dance challenge, you are required to:

1. Evaluate your group performance;
2. Choose the best interpretation from the group presentations (excluding your
group);
3. Justify your choice of the best interpretative dance; and,
4. Rate through the scale of: 3, high level of performance; 2, moderate level of
performance; and 1, displays low level of performance.
The score sheets for the You Can Dance challenge:
Self-Evaluation Group Evaluation

Individual
Participation Grade Performance Group Grade
Planning Song choice

Choreography/
Preparing Interpretation
Group
Performing preparedness
Defined
Total Ending
Lesson 5 Total
Creating Chances

YOUR GOALS
This lesson allows you to envision possibilities in your dreams and construct
means to arrive at it. Discover how you can face your fear, extinguish your weakness,
and bank on your strength as you go out and meet people in the big world. You must
aim to:
1. Create rap music.

2. Differentiate several table manners and practices from varied households.
3. Imagine and visualize a given setting.
4. Express meanings from a text listened to.
5. Interpret the concept of contradictory words used together.
critical ideas.
7. Make connections between the story discussed and several other lines lifted from
other readings.
8. Create unified sound and music against selected scenes in the story for a silent
movie effect.
9. Use varied verb complementation forms.
10. Create a travelogue which will feature the special dish of a selected locale for the
story.
11. Narrow a topic to manage the selection of information from available search
engines or tools in the library.
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1.Wrap Up the Food!
Work in groups of five. Fill in the blanks with your favorite food. After completion,
your group should create a beat to tune it into a rap or chant. Do not forget to
create a title for your rap. Write the complete lyrics on a one-half sheet
lengthwise.
_________________________________
___________, __________, __________, __________, _________
I’m hungry. I’m hungry. I’m hungry. I’m hungry.

___________, __________, __________, __________, _________
I’d like some. I’d like some. I’d like some. I’d like some.
___________, __________, __________, __________, _________

Just a little. Just a little. Just a little. Just a little.
___________, __________, __________, __________, _________
That’s enough. That’s enough. That’s enough. That’s enough.
___________, __________, __________, __________, _________
I’m full. I’m full. I’m full. I’m full!
Task 2.Please, Pass the Food!
What is it like to eat in somebody else‘s house? Are there things you do or you
should not do at a dinner table? Is it polite to eat everything on your plate or in your
dish? Is it polite to eat with your hands? Make a survey!
1. Create a list of questions for you and your classmates.

2. Be able to survey at least 5 of your classmates.
3. Tell them to answer your survey form after their response.
4. Create a table similar with the sample below on a one whole sheet of paper.
My Classmates‘ Responses
My
Questions Response Signature
1 2 3 4 5
1. Is it
polite to
eat with
your
hands?
2.
3.
4.

5.
Task 3. Does it Sound Familiar?
When something sounds familiar, one can actually imagine it. Take this for an
example: a rooster that crows early in the morning. Can you imagine it? Can you
even imagine that sound from the rooster? Try listening to your classmate if it would still
sound familiar.
Work in Pairs. Take turns in reading and listening to the text. Assign who is
partner A and who is partner B.
1. Partner A reads first while Partner B listens.
2. After listening write down as many familiar words as you can.
3. Do not write down any word if ever there is nothing familiar to you.
PARTNER A
The local bakery was a two mile bike ride from my house in the Philippines. Shortly after
the first mile, the humid weather thickens the aroma of freshly baked pan de sal that even on an
empty stomach, I am able to sprint quickly up the hill where the panaderia is perched. Getting a
brown paper bag full of hot bread rolls straight from the charred wooden peel defined my
childhood‘s Saturday mornings. The rest of the family would wait eagerly for my return with
either a cup of steaming coffee or raw carabao milk in hand.
-From Pan de Sal – Filipino Salted Bread; Feb 2012, http://www.applepiepatispate.com
PARTNER B
He sips his coffee as he watches
the multitude pass by.

Hoping to glimpse, a fraction
of sunrise on their faces.
Hoping to catch a glance,
a smile perhaps that could warm
his cold heart and maybe bring
some kind of fulfilment
on this empty morning.
- Early Mornings by Ramon Alessandro; 2 July 2011; http://definitelyfilipino.com
Where would you most likely imagine the place for the text you have listened to?
Explain your answer.
_______________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
Task 4. Say What?
―O, miserable abundance, O, beggarly riches!‖

-John Donne, Devotions Upon Emergent Occasions
Have you ever heard those expressions? Why would abundance be miserable?
Why would someone who has riches be beggarly? These expressions are
apparent contradictions. It is called an OXYMORON.
Here are some more oxymoronic expressions: act naturally, random order,
original copy, found missing, old news, peace force, deafening silence.
Look for the oxymoronic expressions from the statements below. Then specify
the meaning of the expression based from the given context. Write your answer on a
one-fourth sheet of paper.
1. "Ralph, if you're gonna be a phony, you might as well be a real phony."

- Richard Yates, "Saying Goodbye to Sally." The Collected Stories of Richard Yates. Picador, 2002
Meaning: ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________
2. "O brawling love! O loving hate! . . .

O heavy lightness! serious vanity!
Misshapen chaos of well-seeming forms!
Feather of lead, bright smoke, cold fire, sick health!
Still-waking sleep, that is not what it is!
This love feel I, that feel no love in this."
- William Shakespeare, Romeo and Juliet
Meaning:____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
3. "A yawn may be defined as a silent yell."

- G.K. Chesterton, George Bernard Shaw, 1909
Meaning: ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
Use the following oxymoronic expressions in a sentence. Write your answer on

a one-half crosswise sheet of paper.
1. small crowd : _________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
2. ill health : ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
3. clearly misunderstood : _________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
What is the purpose of oxymoronic expressions in your statements?
________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
HOMEWORK:
1. Read the story The Bread of Salt by Amador Daguio
2. As you read, do not forget to pause at stop points and respond to the quick
queries. Write your answer on a one-half crosswise sheet of paper.
YOUR TEXT
The Bread of Salt
by NVM Gonzalez (1958)
1
Usually I was in bed by ten and up by five and thus was ready for one more
day of my fourteenth year. Unless Grandmother had forgotten, the fifteen
centavos for the baker down Progreso Street - and how I enjoyed jingling
those coins in my pocket!- would be in the empty fruit jar in the cupboard. I
would remember then that rolls were what Grandmother wanted because
recently she had lost three molars. For young people like my cousins and myself,
she had always said that the kind called pan de salought to be quite all right.
2
The bread of salt! How did it get that name? From where did its flavor come,
through what secret action of flour and yeast? At the risk of being jostled from the
counter by early buyers, I would push my way into the shop so that I might watch
the men who, stripped to the waist, worked their long flat wooden spades in and
out of the glowing maw of the oven. Why did the bread come nut-brown and the
size of my little fist? And why did it have a pair of lips convulsed into a painful
frown? In the half light of the street, and hurrying, the paper bag pressed to my
chest, I felt my curiosity a little gratified by the oven-fresh warmth of the bread I
was proudly bringing home for breakfast.
Do you have any idea what bread is the

character-narrator talking about?
3
Well I knew how Grandmother would not mind if I nibbled away at one piece;
perhaps, I might even eat two, to be charged later against my share at the table.
But that would be betraying a trust; and so, indeed, I kept my purchase intact. To
guard it from harm, I watched my steps and avoided the dark street corners.
4
For my reward, I had only to look in the direction of the sea wall and the fifty
yards or so of riverbed beyond it, where an old Spaniard's house stood. At low
tide, when the bed was dry and the rocks glinted with broken bottles, the stone
fence of the Spaniard's compound set off the house as if it were a castle. Sunrise
brought a wash of silver upon the roofs of the laundry and garden sheds which
had been built low and close to the fence. On dull mornings the light dripped from

the bamboo screen which covered the veranda and hung some four or five yards
from the ground. Unless it was August, when the damp, northeast monsoon had
to be kept away from the rooms, three servants raised the screen promptly at
six-thirty until it was completely hidden under the veranda eaves. From the sound
of the pulleys, I knew it was time to set out for school.
5
It was in his service, as a coconut plantation overseer, that Grandfather had
spent the last thirty years of his life. Grandmother had been widowed three years
now. I often wondered whether I was being depended upon to spend the years
ahead in the service of this great house.
With whom is the

character-narrator living?
living with?
One day I learned that Aida, a

classmate in high school, was the old Spaniard's niece. All my doubts
disappeared. It was as if, before his death, Grandfather had spoken to me about
her, concealing the seriousness of the matter by putting it over as a joke. If now I
kept true to the virtues, she would step out of her bedroom ostensibly to say
Good Morning to her uncle. Her real purpose, I knew, was to reveal thus her
assent to my desire.
6
On quiet mornings I imagined the patter of her shoes upon the wooden veranda
floor as a further sign, and I would hurry off to school, taking the route she had
fixed for me past the post office, the town plaza and the church, the health center
east of the plaza, and at last the school grounds. I asked myself whether I would
try to walk with her and decided it would be the height of rudeness. Enough that
in her blue skirt and white middy she would be half a block ahead and, from that
distance, perhaps throw a glance in my direction, to bestow upon my heart a
deserved and abundant blessing. I believed it was but right that, in some such
way as this, her mission in my life was disguised.
7
Her name, I was to learn many years later, was a convenient mnemonic for the
qualities to which argument might aspire. But in those days it was a living voice.
"Oh that you might be worthy of uttering me," it said. And how I endeavored to
build my body so that I might live long to honor her. With every victory at singles
at the handball court the game was then the craze at school -- I could feel my
body glow in the sun as though it had instantly been cast in bronze. I guarded my
mind and did not let my wits go astray. In class I would not allow a lesson to pass
unmastered. Our English teacher could put no question before us that did not
have a ready answer in my head. One day he read Robert Louis Stevenson's
The Sire de Maletroit's Door, and we were so enthralled that our breaths
trembled. I knew then that somewhere, sometime in the not too improbable
future, a benign old man with a lantern in his hand would also detain me in a
secret room, and there daybreak would find me thrilled by the sudden certainty
that I had won Aida's hand.
From this point of the narrative,

would you say that this is going to be a
love story?
8
It was perhaps on my violin that her name wrought such a tender spell. Maestro
Antonino remarked the dexterity of my stubby fingers. Quickly I raced through
Alard-until I had all but committed two thirds of the book to memory. My short,
brown arm learned at last to draw the bow with grace. Sometimes, when
practising my scales in the early evening, I wondered if the sea wind carrying the
straggling notes across the pebbled river did not transform them into Schubert's
"Serenade."
9
At last Mr. Custodio, who was in charge of our school orchestra, became aware
of my progress. He moved me from second to first violin. During the
Thanksgiving Day program he bade me render a number, complete with pizzicati
and harmonics.
10
"Another Vallejo! Our own Albert Spalding!" I heard from the front row.
11
Aida, I thought, would be in the audience. I looked around quickly but could not
see her. As I retired to my place in the orchestra I heard Pete Saez, the
trombone player, call my name.
12
"You must join my band," he said. "Look, we'll have many engagements soon.
It'llbe vacation time."
13
Pete pressed my arm. He had for some time now been asking me to join the
Minviluz Orchestra, his private band. All I had been able to tell him was that I had
my schoolwork to mind. He was twenty-two. I was perhaps too young to be going
around with him. He earned his school fees and supported his mother hiring out
his band at least three or four times a month. He now said:
14
"Tomorrow we play at the funeral of a Chinese-four to six in the afternoon; in
theevening, judge Roldan's silver wedding anniversary; Sunday, the municipal
dance."
15
My head began to whirl. On the stage, in front of us, the principal had begun a
speech about America. Nothing he could say about the Pilgrim Fathers and the
American custom of feasting on turkey seemed interesting. I thought of the
money I would earn. For several days now I had but one wish, to buy a box of
linen stationery. At night when the house was quiet I would fill the sheets with
words that would tell Aida how much I adored her. One of these mornings,
perhaps before school closed for the holidays, I would borrow her algebra book
and there, upon a good pageful of equations, there I would slip my message,
tenderly pressing the leaves of the book. She would perhaps never write back.
Neither by post nor by hand would a reply reach me. But no matter; it would be a
silence full of voices.
16
That night I dreamed I had returned from a tour of the world's music centers;
the newspapers of Manila had been generous with praise. I saw my picture on the
cover of a magazine. A writer had described how, many years ago, I used to
trudge the streets of Buenavista with my violin in a battered black cardboard
case. In New York, he reported, a millionaire had offered me a Stradivarius violin,
with a card that bore the inscription: "In admiration of a genius your own people
must surely be proud of." I dreamed I spent a weekend at the millionaire's
country house by the Hudson. A young girl in a blue skirt and white middy
clapped her lily-white hands and, her voice trembling, cried "Bravo!"
What people now observed at home was the diligence with which I attended to
my violin lessons. My aunt, who had come from the farm to join her children for
the holidays, brought with her a maidservant, and to the poor girl was given the
chore of taking the money to the baker's for rolls and pan de sal. I realized at
once that it would be no longer becoming on my part to make these morning trips
to the baker's. I could not thank my aunt enough.
17
I began to chafe on being given other errands. Suspecting my violin to be the
excuse, my aunt remarked:"What do you want to be a musician for? At parties,
musicians always eat last."
18
Perhaps, I said to myself, she was thinking of a pack of dogs scrambling for
scraps tossed over the fence by some careless kitchen maid. She was the sort
you could depend on to say such vulgar things. For that reason, I thought, she
ought not to be taken seriously at all.
19
But the remark hurt me. Although Grandmother had counseled me kindly to
mind my work at school, I went again and again to Pete Saez's house for rehearsals.
20
She had demanded that I deposit with her my earnings; I had felt too weak to
refuse. Secretly, I counted the money and decided not to ask for it until I had
enough with which to buy a brooch. Why this time I wanted to give Aida a brooch,
I didn't know. But I had set my heart on it. I searched the downtown shops. The
Chinese clerks, seeing me so young, were annoyed when I inquired about prices.
Specify the paragraphs which speak of reality

for the character-narrator, and his dream-state.
Use paragraph number for your answer.
21
At last the Christmas season began. I had not counted on Aida's leaving home,
and remembering that her parents lived in Badajoz, my torment was almost
unbearable. Not once had I tried to tell her of my love. My letters had remained
unwritten, and the algebra book unborrowed. There was still the brooch to find,
but I could not decide on the sort of brooch I really wanted. And the money, in
any case, was in Grandmother's purse, which smelled of "Tiger Balm." I grew
somewhat feverish as our class Christmas program drew near. Finally it came; it
was a warm December afternoon. I decided to leave the room when our English
teacher announced that members of the class might exchange gifts. I felt
fortunate; Pete was at the door, beckoning to me. We walked out to the porch
where, Pete said, he would tell me a secret.
22
It was about an as alto the next Sunday which the Buenavista Women's Club
wished to give Don Esteban's daughters, Josefina and Alicia, who were arriving
on the morning steamer from Manila. The spinsters were much loved by the
ladies. Years ago, when they were younger, these ladies studied solfeggio with
Josefina and the piano and harp with Alicia. As Pete told me all this, his lips
ash-gray from practicing all morning on his trombone, I saw in my mind the
sisters in their silk dresses, shuffling off to church for the evening benediction.
They were very devout, and the Buenavista ladies admired that. I had almost
forgotten that they were twins and, despite their age, often dressed alike. In
low-bosomed voile bodices and white summer hats, I remembered, the pair had
attended Grandfather's funeral, at old Don Esteban's behest. I wondered how
successful they had been in Manila during the past three years in the matter of
finding suitable husbands.
23
"This party will be a complete surprise," Pete said, looking around the porch as
ifto swear me to secrecy. "They've hired our band."
24
I joined my classmates in the room, greeting everyone with a Merry Christmas
jollier than that of the others. When I saw Aida in one corner unwrapping
something two girls had given her, I found the boldness to greet her also.
25
"Merry Christmas," I said in English, as a hairbrush and a powder case
emerged from the fancy wrapping. It seemed to me rather apt that such gifts went to
her. Already several girls were gathered around Aida. Their eyes glowed with envy, it
seemed to me, for those fair cheeks and the bobbed dark-brown hair which
lineage had denied them.
26
I was too dumbstruck by my own meanness to hear exactly what Aida said in
answer to my greeting. But I recovered shortly and asked:
"Will you be away during the vacation?"
27
"No, I'll be staying here," she said. When she added that her cousins were
arriving and that a big party in their honor was being planned, I remarked:"So you know
all about it?" I felt I had to explain that the party was meant to be a
surprise, an asalto.
28
And now it would be nothing of the kind, really. The women's club matrons
would hustle about, disguising their scurrying around for cakes and candies as for some
baptismal party or other. In the end, the Rivas sisters would outdo them. Boxes
of meringues, bonbons, ladyfingers, and cinnamon buns that only the Swiss
bakers in Manila could make were perhaps coming on the boat with them. I
imagined a table glimmering with long-stemmed punch glasses; enthroned in that
array would be a huge brick-red bowl of gleaming china with golden flowers
around the brim. The local matrons, however hard they tried, however sincere
their efforts, were bound to fail in their aspiration to rise to the level of Don
Esteban's daughters. Perhaps, I thought, Aida knew all this. And that I should

share in a foreknowledge of the matrons' hopes was a matter beyond love. Aida
and I could laugh together with the gods.
What do you think was in the mind of the

character-narrator at the moment? What are his
feelings about the upcoming events?
29
At seven, on the appointed evening, our small band gathered quietly at the gate
of Don Esteban's house, and when the ladies arrived in their heavy shawls and
trimpanuelo, twittering with excitement, we were commanded to play the Poet
and Peasant overture. As Pete directed the band, his eyes glowed with pride for
his having been part of the big event. The multicolored lights that the old
Spaniard's gardeners had strung along the vine-covered fence were switched on,
and the women remarked that Don Esteban's daughters might have made some
preparations after all. Pete hid his face from the glare. If the women felt let down,
they did not show it.
30
The overture shuffled along to its climax while five men in white shirts bore
huge boxes of goods into the house. I recognized one of the bakers in spite of the
uniform. A chorus of confused greetings, and the women trooped into the house;
and before we had settled in the sala to play "A Basket of Roses," the heavy
damask curtains at the far end of the room were drawn and a long table richly
spread was revealed under the chandeliers. I remembered that, in our haste to
be on hand for the asalto, Pete and I had discouraged the members of the band
from taking their suppers.
31
"You've done us a great honor!" Josefina, the more buxom of the twins, greeted
the ladies. "Oh, but you have not allowed us to take you by surprise!" the ladies
demurred in a chorus.
32
There were sighs and further protestations amid a rustle of skirts and the glitter
of earrings. I saw Aida in a long, flowing white gown and wearing an arch of
sampaguita flowers on her hair. At her command, two servants brought out a
gleaming harp from the music room. Only the slightest scraping could be heard
because the servants were barefoot. As Aida directed them to place the
instrument near the seats we occupied, my heart leaped to my throat. Soon she
was lost among the guests, and we played "The Dance of the Glowworms." I
kept my eyes closed and held for as long as I could her radiant figure before me.
33
Alicia played on the harp and then, in answer to the deafening applause, she
offered an encore. Josefina sang afterward. Her voice, though a little husky,
fetched enormous sighs. For her encore, she gave "The Last Rose of Summer";
and the song brought back snatches of the years gone by. Memories of solfeggio
lessons eddied about us, as if there were rustling leaves scattered all over the
hall. Don Esteban appeared. Earlier, he had greeted the crowd handsomely,
twisting his mustache to hide a natural shyness before talkative women. He
stayed long enough to listen to the harp again, whispering in his rapture:
"Heavenly. Heavenly . . ."
Was the character-narrator enjoying the festivity in

the household of Don Esteban? Do you think he
wants to be a part of the world of Aida? Was he
enjoying the music or the company of people?
34
By midnight, the merrymaking lagged. We played while the party gathered
around the great table at the end of the sala. My mind traveled across the seas to
the distant cities I had dreamed about. The sisters sailed among the ladies like
two great white liners amid a fleet of tugboats in a bay. Someone had
thoughtfully remembered-and at last Pete Saez signaled to us to put our
instruments away. We walked in single file across the hall, led by one of the
barefoot servants.
35
Behind us a couple of hoarse sopranos sang "La Paloma" to the
accompaniment of the harp, but I did not care to find out who they were. The sight of so
much silver and china confused me. There was more food before us than I had ever
imagined. I searched in my mind for the names of the dishes; but my ignorance
appalled me. I wondered what had happened to the boxes of food that the
Buenavista ladies had sent up earlier. In a silver bowl was something, I
discovered, that appeared like whole egg yolks that had been dipped in honey
and peppermint. The seven of us in the orchestra were all of one mind about the
feast; and so, confident that I was with friends, I allowed my covetousness to
have its sway and not only stuffed my mouth with this and that confection but
also wrapped up a quantity of those egg-yolk things in several sheets of napkin
paper. None of my companions had thought of doing the same, and it was with
some pride that I slipped the packet under my shirt. There, I knew, it would not
bulge.
36
"Have you eaten?"
Oh, no. What did the character-narrator

just do? Who saw what he did? What do
you think will happen?
37
I turned around. It was Aida. My bow tie seemed to tighten around my collar. I
mumbled something, I did not know what.
38
"If you wait a little while till they've gone, I'll wrap up a big package for you," she
added.
39
I brought a handkerchief to my mouth. I might have honored her solicitude
adequately and even relieved myself of any embarrassment; I could not quite
believe that she had seen me, and yet I was sure that she knew what I had done,
and I felt all ardor for her gone from me entirely.
40
I walked away to the nearest door, praying that the damask curtains might hide
me in my shame. The door gave on to the veranda, where once my love had trod
on sunbeams. Outside it was dark, and a faint wind was singing in the harbor.
41
With the napkin balled up in my hand, I flung out my arm to scatter the egg-yolk
things in the dark. I waited for the soft sound of their fall on the garden-shed roof.
Instead, I heard a spatter in the rising night-tide beyond the stone fence. Farther
away glimmered the light from Grandmother's window, calling me home.
42
But the party broke up at one or thereabouts. We walked away with our
instruments after the matrons were done with their interminable good-byes.
Then, to the tune of "Joy to the World," we pulled the Progreso Street
shopkeepers out of their beds. The Chinese merchants were especially
generous. When Pete divided our collection under a street lamp, there was
already a little glow of daybreak.
43
He walked with me part of the way home. We stopped at the baker's when I
told him that I wanted to buy with my own money some bread to eat on the way to
Grandmother's house at the edge of the sea wall. He laughed, thinking it strange
that I should be hungry. We found ourselves alone at the counter; and we
watched the bakery assistants at work until our bodies grew warm from the oven
across the door. It was not quite five, and the bread was not yet ready.
What do you think was the character-narrator‘s

feeling at the moment? Was this the ending that
you expected? Why? Why not?
Task 1. Breaded Contradiction
What are the mixed feelings of the character-narrator in the story? Choose the
oxymoronic expression which will fit the given statement. Write your answer on a one-
whole sheet of paper.
Set A a. act naturally
b. act
a. awfully good
naturally
c. awful
b. terribly pleased
good
d. even odds
c. terribly pleased
e. even
d. aloneodds
together
e. alone together
_______ 1. Would there anything be more ______________ than a given

chance of a conversation with Aida?
_______ 2. He was ______________ upon knowing that he was invited to the
party.
_______ 3. It was difficult for him to _____________ before the girl he admires;
he was not confident if he would say the right things.
_______ 4. The character was at ___________ on how he would handle the
secret that was shared to him; so, he cautioned himself when Aida
talked with him.
_______ 5. The character-narrator cannot avoid thinking of a moment with
Aida—to be ________________ would be a dream come true.
Set B
a. loving hate
b. old news
c. deafening silence
d. real phony
e. miserable abundance
_______ 1. After the humiliating experience that the character-narrator

experienced, it is most certain that a ______________ atmosphere
with Aida would happen unless they will move on to maturity.
_______ 2. The character-narrator cannot decide what to pick from the buffet
table –with all the _________________of all the dishes he never
imagined before.
_______ 3. He thought himself as a ____________ with all his show of skills and
goodness, yet beneath it were unimaginable ways of fulfilling his
desire.
_______ 4. The beauty of the ladies in the house of Don Esteban was
____________ which goes with their display of charm and talent.
_______ 5. The walk home was a _________________ with his thoughts just
frozen, his lips closed, by the road--no one moved, nothing unheard,
all these stillness from the time Aida caught him in-the -act

(T) or false (F).
_____ 1. The character narrator is 14 years old.

_____ 2. The pan de sal bread is the story‘s bread of salt.
_____ 3. The pan de sal in the story is the character-narrator.
_____ 4. The character-narrator‘s liking for Aida is similar to his passion for
playing music.
_____ 5. The character-narrator is ready for an adult life since he is already
earning money with his music.
_____ 6. The character-narrator is a courageous young man.
_____ 7. Aida belongs to an affluent family like the character-narrator.
_____ 8. The character-narrator knows when and how to behave at his best.
_____ 9. The character-narrator shows maturity in most part of the story.
_____ 10. The character-narrator, like the pan de sal—well-cooked, that he is
buying in the end of the story, is already ripe and mature.
Task 3. The Sound of Music
In groups of ten, create a silent-skit of the story, The Bread of Salt. In
accomplishing your presentation, be able to:
1. Choose significant parts in the story which will show the character-narrator‘s
strengths and weaknesses, or successes and failures.
2. Create music and sound which will accompany your presentation.
3. Narration or dialogue is not needed; the presentation is silent-skit.
4. Highlight a part of the presentation with your use of sound and music.
5. Rehearse your presentation.
6. Use props (properties) and costume to establish character and setting; be
resourceful.
7. Entertain questions of your classmate if they would want to clarify anything a
part of your silent-skit.
8. Evaluate the presentation of your group and the presentation of other
groups. Rate through the scale of: 3, high level of performance; 2, moderate
level of performance; and 1, displays low level of performance.
Score sheet for the silent-skit:
Group Plot choice Costume and Sound and Total

Props Music
1
2
3
4

5
Task 3.Watch Out!
Complete the meaning of the sentence by attaching a situation to the underlined

verb complement.
1. The character-narrator stopped to listen _____________________________.
2. The character narrator finally stopped playing _______________________.
3. The band wanted to render ______________________________________.
4. The band never wanted attending _________________________________.
Was there any difference in meaning when the verb complement uses the
infinitive, to + verb, form and when the verb complement is in the –ing form?
CHECK THIS OUT!

The verb complement form used depends on the meaning, which is not the same
in each case.
1. The character-narrator stopped to listen wholeheartedly to Aida‘s music.

2. The character-narrator stopped playing the violin.
In the first example, the infinitive from verb complement expresses the reason
for the action, while the –ing form verb complement refers to what stopped.
Task 4. Tune in the Verb Complement
Complete the sentences by filling in the verb complement of your choice. You
may refer to the details of the story and derive ideas from implied meanings in
the story, The Bread of Salt.
a. to go
1. The character-narrator remembered b. going ________________.
a. playing
2. The band just went on b. to play ________________.
a. to reach out
3. Aida tried b. reaching out ___________________.
4. After Aida saw what the character-narrator just did, she really can‘t
a. to say
help b. saying _______________.
Grade 7 English Learning Package

a. to attend 59
b. attending ___________________.
5. The character-narrator regret
Task 5. Food Trip!
Was it Leche Flan that made the character-narrator commit such embarrassing
deed before Aida? Who would resist a leche flan?
In groups of five, create a food travelogue poster. Select a specific town or city
from a particular region which would befit the setting described by the narrator. After
selecting the place in the country, your group should research about its culture and food
delicacy.
In creating a food travelogue, do not forget to:
1. Research about the place;
2. Choose the best scenery of potential interest;
3. Highlight the food and the culture that goes with their
delicacy;
4. If possible, find the places where the ingredients of the

food or delicacy can be found;
5. Provide pictures or drawing of the food together with the

images of the place; and,
6. Include elements from the story discussed.
Task 6. Party at Don Esteban’s

Why not feast over the travelogues of the class?
1. Put up the food posters on the wall and place your travelogue brochures on a
desk.
2. Bring some music to your class and get ready with the tour around the room.
3. Prepare two colors of paper strips, blue and red.
4. Give the blue strip to the group which you think has the most wonderful
destination travelogue.
5. Give the red strip to the group with the most attractive food travelogue.
YOUR FINAL TASK

A Recipe for Chances
If you would be preparing for a writing task which would need supporting
materials from the library, would you know where to start? The very first step that you
should take is to narrow your topic. Start by writing your broad topic in the box. Then
follow the directions in the subsequent boxes. For help, refer to the examples along the
left.
Example: Your Topic:
Pursuing an ambition
Now enumerate 3 different areas which may Now enumerate 3 different areas which may
be factors or elements in the process. be factors or elements in the process.
Money Support Skills
Group
Choose one of the above factors to consider Choose one of the above factors to consider
and list three ways that this area may appear and list three ways that this area may appear
troublesome and/or helpful. troublesome and/or helpful.
The people in the profession may give

testimonial on how to get there.
The counselors in school present choices

for career.
The companies provide a review on their

high or low demand.
Choose one from the 3 detailed topics above Choose one from the 3 detailed topics above
then write a statement: then write a statement:
The capacity of the right people to talk to ____________________________________

in school enables the young men and ____________________________________
women to choose the right career. ____________________________________
____________________________________
____________________________________
Lesson 6
Coping with Challenges
YOUR GOALS
This lesson helps you realize that our lives and our world is rocked by

challenges from time to time. We must learn to cope with these challenges, so we can
emerge as stronger and wiser individuals. You must aim to:
1. Make associations with titles and idioms to better understand a given text.
2. Identify and create symbols related to a text
3. Present points of view and opinions concerning the message of a selection in
creative oral means.
4. Formulate assumptions or predictions about the contents of the narrative texts.
5. Give examples of figures of speech that show contrast (irony, oxymoron, and
paradox).
6. Use information in reading texts to infer, to evaluate, and to express critical
ideas.
7. Use basic electronic search engine protocols in researching for a given topic
8. Compose a personal letter to a friend, relative, or other people.
9. Formulate tips using meaningful kernel sentences.
10. Respond to ideas, issues, and concerns presented in a reading or viewing
selection in creative forms.
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. Bottled up
On a half-sheet of paper, determine the meaning of the following idioms that use
the word, bottle. You may use a dictionary.
1. bottled-up emotions
2. bottle something up
3. hit the bottle
4. cork high and bottle deep
5. the genie if out of the bottle
Task 2. Get Bottled?
Form groups. Think of several things that get put in a bottle. Draw these things
inside a bottle. Then, complete a list that presents the reasons for bottling-up the things
that you enumerated.
Task 3. What’s in a Title?
Several ideas are implied by a title. Among other things, a title gives you an idea
about what a text is about. Below is the title of the featured text. Make associations with
it. Give three guesses about what the text could be based on what the title ―The Baby in
the Bottle‖ presents. Write your guesses on a half-sheet of paper.
YOUR TEXT
The Baby in the Bottle
by Benjamin Bautista
The truth was, Mr. Libre felt sorry for his wife. He was very careful to hide it from
her, of course, but day by day, through the years, as he saw her watching the shriveled
half-black baby in the bottle, he felt more and more sorry for her. She would touch the
bottle gently, once in a while, and run her hands fondly over the cold glass; inside, the
stiff, skinless body of a four-inch boy now dead for five years, would bob up and down in
the green alcohol. And then sometimes, slowly, to herself, she would smile.
Mr. Libre‘s wife was a plain woman with high cheekbones and a sad mouth, who
was only twenty-nine years old but whose eyes were no longer young. Mr. Libre himself
was thirty-three but graying hair and some thick corded veins on his hands made him
look older. He was a small man and thin, and long hours of bending over receipts had
given him a stooped posture and made him appear even smaller and thinner.
Very often, whenever he could, Mr. Libre would try to walk to his wife to get her
to start talking too, but it became harder and harder for them to find things to talk about.
The talk always turned to the past and how different it might have been if they‘d had
children. Mr. Libre didn‘t want to talk about those things but his wife did, and gradually,
the pauses stretched longer and made them both uneasy. But he was always patient
with her; even if he was tired or irritable he never showed it in any way. By now he had
learned to put up with many good things.
He was married when he was twenty-two and just out of high school. He had
been alone in the city for four months when he met her. She understood his dialect and
they got along well together. At first he wanted to go on to college but when he thought
it over again, he felt that it wasn‘t fair. That would be asking too much from his wife.
They moved into a rented room which the owner said was the ground floor of a
two-story building, but it was just a room actually, with thick cardboard walls to divide it
into smaller rooms. They planned to move out after a few years because they thought
the room would be too small for the children to come, and they hoped to have many
children. But five years passed before they had their first child, and when it was only
four months in the womb, it was prematurely born.
It was a boy but it didn‘t even look like a baby. It had eyes and ears and arms
and its skinless body had been formed, but it was only four inches long and looked cold
and raw as though it was just a piece of peeled flesh that never had life at all. Mr. Libre
felt it to the nurses but his wife asked to keep it and take it home with her; he didn‘t
know why, until the doctor told him that his wife knew that she could never have any
more children. After that neither of them talked about it much and they slipped back to
the routine of everyday living. Still he took it on himself to try to make it easier for her
through the days.

One afternoon in the last busy week of January, Mr. Libre was looking over some
old files in the Recorder‘s cubicle when all of a sudden he remembered that on that day
the baby in the bottle was five years and seven months old. He thought no more about it
but kept it in the back of his mind to tell his wife that night; she wanted to hear him talk
about the baby. He went on checking the old files but when he was almost finished, his
eyes hurt again and he had to go back to his desk.
Mr. Libre was a clerk in the freight department of an import-export corporation

and all day he had to sit behind a high desk and sort out receipts and record them. At
was not a hard job but it kept him constantly busy because there were so many receipts
and he was so very careful about his work, he seldom found time to leave his desk from
eight-thirty to five o‘clock every day.
He had been with the firm for nine years now and he knew his work well but still
did not find it easy. It demanded so much concentration from him and there were days
when it all seemed to be painfully hard but it only made him try even harder. May times
he would have to focus his eyes on the pink, yellow and blue receipts and make an
explicit act of the will to follow the items on them. Usually he would have to strain his
eyes excessively so that often the muscles behind his eye sockets tightened and he
would feel a smarting throb in his eyes. He would stop work at once and close his eyes
as tightly as he could. The he would force a smile until his jaw hurt because, although
that didn‘t ease the pain any, it always held back the tears. Tears always embarrasses
him. They made him feel helpless.
He did not rest his eyes long because there were many late receipts that he had
to go through and he went back to work on them. But after a few minutes he grew
restless with the papers and he wanted to go over to the window and get a breath of air.
But the window was across the room and the assistant manager was talking to a typist
only two or three feet away. He tried to sit still on his high chair. He shut his eyes and
took a deep breath and continued to line up the figures on the record sheet but his
fingers shook and the pencil point broke under his hand. He grew annoyed with himself
for being upset over a little thing like that. He was sure his wife was not having an easy
day either.
Concentration always came hard to Mr. Libre because sometimes in the middle
of the day he would find it impossible to keep his thoughts off the many unrelated little
things that came into his mind. He would catch himself thinking of his wife eating lunch
alone every day or the cardboard walls of their room that seemed to close in on them or
perhaps the dead baby submerged in its bottle of green alcohol. He thought of his wife a
lot but many times he thought of the baby, too.
II
During the first few months and on to the end of that first year, the bottle had
seemed too small for the baby. It looked as though it needed a glass jar with a lid
instead of that bottle with a wide mouth; it floated limply on the surface and slumped
against the glass sides. But after a while the alcohol seeped through it and hardened it,
and it sank stiffly to the bottom. Then little by little it blackened and shriveled up and it
would neither float nor sink but bobbed up and down in its green world of alcohol and

glass. And then the bottle didn‘t seem too small for the baby any more because now the
baby‘s shrunken body was completely confined. The bottle fully contained it.
Mr. Libre fully noticed too that his wife had changed. In the beginning she was no
different at all, although at times she did not fall into brooding. Then slowly for no
apparent reason she grew quiet and kept to herself, and that was when the baby in the
bottle took a strange hold on her. He tried to understand her and be patient with her.
She did not want to be the way she was, he told himself, to live in a small cramped
world of her own, to look at the baby, make up daydreams about it all day, to want to
touch it, hold it in her hands. She could not help any of it, he knew, and he did not stop
her, and day by day he got used to her being that way. But still he felt sorry for her.
III
The blinds on the west window had been lowered and he knew it was getting
late. He shook himself from his thoughts and worked faster because he wanted to finish
the last batch of receipts for the day. It would hardly make any difference because he
would be back the next day anyhow and there would always be more receipts, but there
were things one should do and finishing the day‘s work was one of them. He took
everything as it came and he found it possible to lose himself in his work. He wished he
could do even more and he felt he owed that much to his wife.
It was almost five-twenty when Mr. Libre got up, locked his papers under his desk
and shuffled out of the office. Almost everyone had gone by then except some of the
typists and a secretary doing overtime. He did not look at them as he went out. He left
quietly and alone.
Out in the street he hoped the crowd would not hold him up for long. Heavy traffic
snarled the afternoon rush and cars and buses and people on the sidewalks hardly
moved at all. On the pedestrian lanes as he waited for the go signal, it became stickily
hot; no wind stirred the inert air, thick with gasoline exhaust fumes. But Mr. Libre did not
mind the heat. As he crossed the street he clenched and unclenched his fists and he
tried to walk as fast as the crowd would let him. He was getting impatient. He wished he
were home that very minute.
He pushed the old narrow door of their room open and sat down on the first chair
he saw. He felt very tired btu the chair was hard and rigid and it did not help him any; it
arched his back. His shoulders felt heavy and he was breathing hard but did not rest
long. His wife was in the other room. He stood up and stretched behind the cardboard
wall.
His wife sat on a cat staring at the baby in the bottle. She sat in half darkness a
few feet away from the table where the bottle was. From where he stood he could see
sharply the hollows of her eyes and thin bloodless lips. Her face was totally without
expression. Hew hands were on her lap and she sat unmoving but when he came in
and she saw him, she turned slowly to him and her face broke out in a clumsy uncertain
smile. It was a slow half-silly smile that twisted the corners of her mouth upwards and
nothing else; her eyes remained sad and empty. He has never seen her that way
before. He was afraid she did not recognize him.
He could not look at her directly. For a moment he felt it was cruel to watch her.
Instead he turned to the baby in the bottle. The tiny half-black thing was drifting and
circling as always in the green alcohol. But now he saw that the bottle and the alcohol
and the long years had gnawed it and little by little the baby was shredding and peeling
off its flesh. The bottle and the alcohol and the long years had choked and shrunk it and
now were eating it up. All the time, through the years, as the baby bobbed up and down
in its own cramped world, it was slowly being destroyed. And no one could do anything
about it.
Mr. Libre felt helplessly hollow inside; he turned his head and shut his eyes
tightly. He forced a smile until his jaw hurt because although he felt no pain in his eyes
now, he wanted to make sure he could hold back the tears.
Task 1. Creating Symbols
Form groups. Determine what the baby and the bottle symbolize in the text.
Illustrate a semantic map for your output. Use appropriate drawings to enhance the
meaning of your work.
Task 2. Explaining Divisions
Form groups. Reread the story and determine the bases for the division of the
story into three parts. What does each part present? Why is the sequence of the parts
done in this way. Brainstorm on these questions and present your answers creatively to
the class.
Task 3. Giving Assumptions and Predictions (Part 1)
Clarify the meaning of the words, prediction and assumption. Reread the text.
What assumptions and predictions can be made about the couple? Give at least three
of each. What lines in the text help in making the assumptions and predictions you
have? Present your answers in a table similar to the one below. Copy this table on a
sheet of paper. Be ready to present your output to the class.
Assumptions Supporting Lines Predictions Supporting

Lines
1. 1.
2. 2.
3. 3.

Task 4. Analyzing Emotions
Form groups. Answer the questions below. Then, copy the table below on a
sheet of paper. Put your answers to the questions to the corresponding table columns.
Think of appropriate headings for the columns. Review your table entries, then present
a generalization about the smiles and cries of Mr. and Mrs. Libre. Present this
generalization on the topmost row of the table.
1. What are the instances when Mr. Libre or Mrs. Libre smiled? (Column 1)
2. What are the instances when Mr. Libre or Mrs. Libre cried? (Column 2)
3. What are the reasons behind the smiling or crying of the couple? (Column 3)
Generalization:
Reasons Reasons
1. 1.
2. 2.
3. 3.
Task 5. Reading Emotions
Form a group. Identify all the emotions that Mr. and Mrs. Libre felt during the
significant events of the story. For each of them, create a diagram that shows the
progression of their emotions as the story unfolds. Present different levels or degrees of
an emotion when necessary (e.g. unhappy, miserable, heartbroken, etc.). You may
consult a dictionary or thesaurus. Be creative in your output.
Task 5. Weighing Consequences
Form a group. Argue on whether the couple should have kept or left the baby in
the bottle. Consider common practices related to this as you decide on a stand (e.g.
keeping urn of cremated ashes in houses, keeping mementoes like lock of hair or a
piece of clothing, keeping petrified remains of pets or other animals, etc.). Explore the
consequences of your stand. Present this to the class and present the points that
support your stand.
Task 6. Predicting Population Trends (Homework)
Study the handout of search protocols that your teacher will give you. Be guided
by this as you research on the following: population rate and fertility rate of the
Philippines and three other Asian countries in the last five years. Review your data and
derive implications from them. Be ready to share your data and list of implications with
the class.

Task 7. Analyzing Situations
The featured reading text presents several situations that could represent the
concepts below. Study the provided descriptions and participate in a discussion led by
the teacher.
A paradox is basically a sentence that presents a situation that defies logic or the
usual way things are expected to be. Despite this, the idea presented remains true. An
example is : One has to die in order to live.
An irony is said to be present when the presented meaning of a message is

different from the one that is truly intended (verbal irony). This is also associated with
sarcasm or mockery (e.g. Saying ―I‘m so happy‖ when one is truly sad.). Irony is also
observed in the theatre (dramatic or literary irony) when ―the audience knows more
about the situation than the characters‖1 and this ignorance causes several conflicts.
Situational irony is manifested when one does something for a specific reason but is
met with a result that contradicts his intention (e.g. Exercising strenuously to be healthy
but ending up ill because of exhaustion.)
An oxymoron is a phrase or a two-word description where the two words contrast

with each other (e.g. deafening silence, sweet sorrow, etc.). An oxymoron can be
considered as a paradox reduced to two words.
Review the story and your output for Task 6 (Predicting Population Trends) and
give 1-2 instances that present a paradox and 1-2 cases of irony. Then, create or cite
an oxymoron that can describe any of the instances you gave. Write your answers on a
sheet of paper.
Task 8. Giving Assumptions and Predictions (Part 2)
Recall what you did for Task 3. You will do the same for this activity using a
different text. Listen carefully as the teacher reads a text twice. List down assumptions
and predictions for the first listening segment. Pay attention to supporting details for
your assumptions and predictions during the second listening segment. Present your
answers using the table on the next page. Copy this on a sheet of paper.
Assumptions Supporting Lines Predictions Supporting

Lines
1. 1.
2. 2.
3. 3.
1 Differencebetween.net
Task 9. Identifying Kernels
Get a dictionary and look up the meaning of the word, kernel. Listen as your
teacher discuss the nature of kernel sentences. Keep in mind the definition below.
A kernel sentence is a simple sentence that presents only one piece of

information. This means that a kernel does not have any unnecessary information. It is
positive or affirmative, that is, it does not contain any negation marker such as the
words no or not. Kernel sentences or kernels are also in the active form. This means
that the subject of such sentences is the doer of the presented action.
Exercise 9.1
Read the text below. Identify whether the numbered sentences are kernels by
writing K (kernel) and NK (not kernel) for every item. Transform those you have marked
‗NK‘ into kernel sentences. Write your answers on a sheet of paper.
Supporting Someone Who Is Grieving2
(1) Grief is a natural process that affects people when they experience a loss—of
a relative or friend; human or animal. (2) Grieving people most often need others. (3) If
you are trying to be supportive to someone who is grieving, remember the depth of his
emotions. (4) Grieving people cannot be rushed. (5) You can nevertheless ease another
person‘s pain.
Exercise 9.2
Read the given text. Some sentences here are kernels and some are not. Identify
any five sentences that could be rewritten as kernels. Copy these five sentences on a
sheet of paper and give their corresponding kernel transformations. You could use
context clues in giving kernel equivalents.
Tips for Helping Someone Who Is Grieving3
Mention the person who has died, and acknowledge your awareness of the loss.
Continue to do this as time goes on, not just right after the death. Many people avoid
mentioning the person who has died, fearing it will remind the grieving person of his or
her pain. Often, people avoid the topic because they feel uncomfortable or helpless, but
behaving as if you don‘t remember or are unaware of your loved one‘s pain often leaves
him or her feeling very alone.
Listen to your loved one. A grieving person may need to tell his or her story again
and again as part of the grieving process. The most important thing you can offer
someone who is grieving is your ability to listen without judgment.
2 A LifeCare® Guide to Helping Others Cope With Grief

3 A LifeCare® Guide to Helping Others Cope With Grief
Remember that grieving is a long process. The person you care about may be
grieving for a long time. Several months or more after the death, he or she may actually
be feeling the loss more acutely, and much of his or her support system will have
backed off. This is when your loved one may need your support the most. Birthdays,
holidays, and other events may also evoke strong feelings for your grieving loved one.
Exercise 9.3
Form a group. Review the materials you have about coping with loss. Come up
with a 5-7-item list that addresses one of the topics below. Keep your tips clear and
simple by using kernels. Give a 2-3-sentence explanation for every tip. Keep these
simple too.
Teener‘s Guide to :
Coping with heartbreaks
Coping with the death of a loved one
Coping with depression
Task 10. Letter Writing
Based on the discussion for this lesson, write a letter inspired by any of the
situations below. Your letter can be based on the outputs you have produced for the
past tasks. Write your letter on a sheet of paper.
 Describe the current population of the world or the Philippines to someone in the
future or the past. Focus on one point only.
 Write to a friend or relative whose family size is very different from yours. Ask all
your questions about the dynamics they have at home.
 Write a letter to Mr. Libre or Mrs. Libre. What would you want to tell him or her?
Task 11. How to Deal
What have you learned from the topics presented in this lesson? Copy the
statement below in your notebooks. Complete this statement in relation to what you
have learned about 1) the experience of Mr. and Mrs. Libre, 2) dealing with a loss, and
3) controlling populations. Give at least one completed statement for each topic.

I realized that ___________ because ______________, so I will _____________ the
next time ___________.
YOUR FINAL TASK
Ways of Dealing
Prepare for a choral reading of your output in Exercise 10.3. Choose appropriate
background music to blend with the reading. Add appropriate introduction and
conclusion to your presentation.
Rubrics:
30 - content
20 - use of kernel sentences
20 – appropriate use of language
20 - references or application of info taken from texts discussed (use of symbols,
use of Figures of
speech, etc)
10 - creative delivery of reading
100

Lesson 7
Recognizing Beauty
YOUR GOALS
Our land and culture is beautiful and we are the first ones who should
recognize this. The Philippines has been known to mesmerize foreigners with the
enthralling beauty of places that some of us do not even notice. This acquaints you with
another aspect that adds to the beauty of our land and culture. For this lesson, you must
aim to:
1. Use predictive and anticipatory devices/tasks to activate prior knowledge about

the topic of reading/viewing selection.
critical ideas.
3. Identify figures of speech that show emphasis (hyperbole and litotes).
4. Formulate meaningful embedded sentences.
5. Infer appropriate responses to listening guide questions.
6. Distinguish between credible and incredible electronic information sources.
7. Present points of view and opinions concerning the message of a selection in
creative oral means.
8. Compose and upload a blog entry based on a particular personal topic of
interest.
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. Defining ‘Beauty’
Reflect on what makes something or someone beautiful. What makes a place

beautiful? Complete the statements below to clarify your beliefs about this idea. Write
your answer on a sheet of paper.
For me, beauty is ______________________________________. It is present

when __________________________________. It is not
______________________________________. It‘s always
__________________________. Examples of beauty are ____________-
__________.

Task 2. Meet Your Match
Collocates are words that go together. The items of the pair are bound to each
their because of association of ideas. A classic example of a pair is black and white.
Supply the missing item to complete the collocate pairs below. Write your answers on a
sheet of paper.
__________ and butter

rhythm and __________
beauty and __________
Task 3. Look it up!
Search for the meaning of the following words in a dictionary. Write the
definitions and construct sentences that use these words. Let your sentences be about
beauty. You may use ideas you have generated from previous activities. Write your
answers in your notebooks.
1. serene 6. pave
2. ethereal 7. behest
3. effulgent 8. din
4. crestling 9. Olympia
5. lambent 10. presage
YOUR TEXT
Moonlight on Manila Bay
by Fernando M. Maramag (1912)
1 A light, serene, ethereal glory rests

2 Its beams effulgent on each crestling wave;
3 The silver touches of the moonlight wave
4 The deep bare bosom that the breeze molests;
5 While lingering whispers deepen as the wavy crests
6 Roll with weird rhythm, now gay, now gently grave;
7 And floods of lambent light appear the sea to pave-
8 All cast a spell that heeds not time‘s behests.
9 Not always such the scene; the din of fight
10 Has swelled the murmur of the peaceful air;
11 Here East and West have oft displayed their might;
12 Dark battle clouds have dimmed this scene so fair;
13 Here bold Olympia, one historic night,
14 Presaging freedom, claimed a people‘s care.

Task 1. Promote Manila Bay
Study the lines below. Identify what makes them interesting.
Visit the land of a thousand smiles!

Witness a moonlight memory for a lifetime.
This is NOT your usual walk in the bay.
Manila Bay is not the typical moonlight experience.
The lines present examples of hyperbole and litotes. A hyperbole is an

exaggeration, while a litotes presents an understatement by using the negative marker
not. Litotes emphasize an idea through negation. Which among the examples above are
hyperboles and litotes? Do the tasks below. Present your output on a sheet of paper.
1. Research on the beauty of Manila Bay by looking at travel guides and other
sources. Identify 3-5 places in Manila which possess both beauty and history.
You may also use credible Internet sources. Take note of any suspicious,
incredible sites.
2. Formulate three catchy and interesting lines that promote the beauty of
Manila Bay. Each line should use a different hyperbole.
3. Formulate two lines of litotes that will encourage tourists to visit Manila Bay.
Task 2. Identifying Embedded Clauses
An embedded clause, as the term suggests, is a clause that is fixed within a

larger clause or sentence which is called the matrix clause . The embedded clause is
usually found in the beginning or at the end of sentences. Markers commonly
accompany or introduce embedded clauses. These markers may be that, when, who,
where, etc. However, there are instances when a marker does not precede an
embedded clause. Such is the case with gerunds (e.g. swimming, eating, etc.).
An embedded clause does not have its own meaning, so it has to be attached to
the matrix clause to present a complete meaning. Do you still remember the discussion
about kernels? Basically, an embedded clause presents a piece of information that is
beyond the idea that a kernel presents. Remember that a kernel presents one idea at a
time only.
Manila Bay presents a magnificent sunset experience that will last a lifetime.
The place is often crowded in the early morning and late afternoon when people
try to get a glimpse of its world-famous sunrise and sunset.
Photographers take pictures of people sitting or walking along the bay area.

I n the examples above, which is the matrix clause? The embedded clause?
Where is the embedded clause found? Is it introduced by a marker?
Exercise 2.1
Identify the embedded clause in the following sentences. Write your answers on a half
sheet of paper.
1. Manila Bay is considered the finest harbor in the far east where the famous "Battle of
Manila Bay" was fought.
2. The Bay is also known as a stopover for the Galleon Trade which lasted for 244
years.
3. The first Filipinos were Indo-Malaya migrants who established their first settlements
along the bay and a nearby river (now the Pasig River).
4. They named the place ―Maynila‖ or ―may nila‖ which means ―there is nila here‖
5. Nila is a water plant that thrived in the area.
Exercise 2.2
Identify five embedded clauses in the text4 below. Write these on a sheet of paper.
The long stretch of national highway, from the US Embassy to a portion just
before the Coastal Road to Cavite, offers a panoramic view of Manila Bay. It is most
picturesque in the afternoon when the dying sun emits golden rays and lends golden
tones especially to the towering hotels and office buildings nearby. The renovated bay
wall is now a tourist-class promenade known as Bay Walk Area where stylish benches
are propped up for frolicking and where people roam around for fresh air or jog in early
mornings. Being now a popular sightseeing destination, it is among the top 5 tourist
spots in Manila-Philippines.
4 Philippines Board
Exercise 2.3
Read the text below and note some information about Manila Bay. Use these
pieces of information in formulating five sentences with embedded clauses. Write your
sentences on a sheet of paper.
Why Manila Bay is a Tourist Attraction5
It is considered one of the best natural harbors in Southeast Asia. With a total
coastline of 190 km, the bay extends from the province of Bataan to the north and the
province of Cavite to the south. Scattered along the shores of Bataan and Cavite are a
number of beaches, resorts, foliages and volcanoes.
The most popular segment of the bay is that part in Manila where Fort Santiago,
the old Spanish fort, still stands. Along the bay is a row of important and historic tourist
destinations and commercial areas, which include the walled-city of Intramuros, the
Cultural Center of the Philippines, Star City, Coconut Palace, the United States
Embassy, Manila Yacht Club, the Philippine Senate, and Manila Ocean Park.
Recently, a promenade was constructed along the bay beside Roxas Boulevard.
Every day, hundreds of tourists and metro Manila residents come here to jog, stroll
around, bike, skate, listen to music from live acoustic bands, sample the foods from a
row of restaurants and snack areas, or simply watch the breathtaking Manila Bay
sunset.
Along this 2-km walk are coconut trees, foliage, and park benches. Just a decade
ago, this part of the bay was unlighted, unpaved, and was a popular hangout spot for
thieves, substance-users and pimps. Today, it is well-lighted with a row of huge
kaleidoscopic lamp posts. At nights, it is never without sightseers and lovers taking a
romantic stroll. Another relatively new attraction along the bay is the SM Mall of Asia
(MOA). Further south of Roxas Boulevard and near the coastal road to Cavite stands
the third-largest mall in the world. On its Open Concert Grounds along the bay, MOA
had hosts a number of international events, which include international fireworks
competitions and concerts by Alicia Keys, David Archuleta and Justin Bieber.
Task 3. Listen up
Listen as your teacher reads a historical background of Manila Bay. Take down
helpful notes to help you confirm the discussion of the following statements in the read
text.
Put a check mark () for an information that is presented by the text, and put a
cross mark () for an information that is not discussed. Review your answers after the
second reading of the text.
5 2012 Manila Hotels

The different kinds of settlers in Manila
1. The origin of the name, Manila
2. The cause of the Battle of Manila Bay
3. The different kinds of merchants
4. Different products offered by the Galleon Trade
5. The reasons for establishing Intramuros
6. The reasons for choosing Manila as the seat of power
7. A description of Fort Santiago
8. The year when the Battle of Manila Bay took place
9. The armies involved in the Battle of Manila Bay
Note down information that will answer the following guide questions:
1. How did Manila get its name? What does it mean?
2. What was the role of Manila Bay in the Galleon Trade?
3. What is the history behind Manila Bay?
Task 4. Hurrah for Manila Bay!
You have been learning much about Manila Bay, and you have been writing
several creative descriptions about it too. Form a group and use the descriptions you
have in composing a ‗hurrah chant‘ that will promote Manila Bay. Play with repetitions,
rhymes, and spell-outs (e.g. Give me an M-A-N-I-L-A, go Manila!). Your chant must
have at least 2 stanzas with 4-7 lines each. Practice reciting this chant with the
appropriate energy and gestures. You can identify lines that could be chanted as a
group or by selected individuals in the group. Be ready to present your work to the
class.
Task 5. Beauty + History
Recall insights you have gained in the past discussions. Create a venn diagram
that will present your ideas about the three topics. Consider carefully the overlap that
between or among the circles in your diagram. Write your insights about beauty, history,
and Manila Bay in the circles that represent them. (The model below is just an
example.) Participate in a discussion led by your teacher.

YOUR FINAL TASK
Blog for Manila
Bring out your research for the home work you did for Discovery Task #1.
Choose one from your list of places that possess both history and beauty. Write a 3-
paragraph blog entry that features the following about the place that you have chosen:
- Vivid description of the place

- Clear instructions/descriptions of its location
- short historical background
- activities to do in the place
- Attractions in the place
Use embedded sentences and figures of speech in describing the place.

Underline them. Remember that your objective is to inform tourists about the beauty
and history of the place. Your composition should invite people to visit and enjoy the
beauty of the place. Finally, upload your blog entry. Follow the instructions to be given
by your teacher.
Rubrics:
30 Used informative and interesting content that addressed requirements

(use of embedded sentences)
30Displayed stylistic and persuasive writing (use of figure of hyperbole
and litotes)
20 Coherence and grammar
20 Creativity in use of photos, layout, etc.
100
Lesson 8
Those I Love
YOUR GOALS
This lesson shows you that as you continue your journey toward discovering your
identity, it is inevitable that you will end up loving other people. To be a complete human
being, one has to experience love and its many mysteries. In this lesson, you must aim
to:
1. Enumerate the various meanings of love.

2. Use context clues in order to find the meaning of a word.
3. Differentiate between figurative and academic language.
4. Explain figurative lines in your own words.
5. Describe the many contradictions of love.
6. Predict the subsequent events in a narrative.
7. Write coherent and cohesive sentences and paragraphs.
8. Express your opinion on why there are too many definitions of love.
9. Assign symbols to the people whom you love.
YOUR INITIALTASKS
Task 1. What Love Is
On a one-half sheet of paper crosswise, write down five definitions of love. They
may be proverbs that you heard, or they may be your own words. Be prepared to share
your definitions with the rest of the class.
As you listen to your classmates sharing their own definitions of love, keep track
of how many of their definitions are similar to the ones that you have written down.
Task 2. The Types of Love
Listen to short selection to be provided by your teacher. Complete the grid below:
TYPE OF LOVE DEFINITION

1.
2.
3.
YOUR TEXT

Bonsai
by Edith Tiempo
All that I love

I fold over once
And once again
And keep in a box
Or a slit in a hollow post
Or in my shoe.
All that I love?

Why, yes, but for the moment ---
And for all time, both.
Something that folds and keeps easy,
Son‘s note or Dad‘s one gaudy tie,
A roto picture of a young queen,
A blue Indian shawl, even
A money bill.
It‘s utter sublimation

A feat, this heart‘s control
Moment to moment
To scale all love down
To a cupped hand‘s size,
Till seashells are broken pieces

From God‘s own bright teeth.
And life and love are real
Things you can run and
Breathless hand over
To the merest child.
Task 1. Context Clues

Choose the option that best approximates the underlined word in each sentence.
1. After being chased by the cat, the mouse finally escaped through a slit in the
wall.
A. large gap B. narrow opening C. wide space
2. When the wind became chilly, the woman pulled the shawl tightly against her
shoulders.
A. garment B. hat C. dress
3. Art‘s depressing short stories were a form of sublimation for his many
frustrations.
A. outrage B. activity C. redirection

4. The woman was told by the doctor to scale down her fat intake as she was
nearing obesity.
A. increase B. decrease C. maintain
5. When the police was sent in to disperse the protesters, what followed was
utter chaos.
A. total B. mutter C. partial
Each number under the first column is a line from the poem. Paraphrase each
number so that it is better understood. The first one has been done for you.
LINES PARAPHRASE
1. All that I love The persona attempts to reduce the people she
I fold over once loves into terms, words, or objects which she can
And once again understand.
2. All that I love?

Why, yes, but for the
moment
And for all time, both.
3. It‘s utter sublimation

A feat, this heart‘s control
4. Moment to moment
To scale all love down
To a cupped hand‘s size
5. Till seashells are broken

pieces
From God‘s own bright
teeth.
6. And life and love are real

Things you can run and
Breathless hand over
To the merest child.
Task 4. Watch Out!

A. Study each paragraph. Write down the transition words and phrases that will
create cohesive paragraphs. Be careful. Each transition word or phrase must
only appear once.
Paragraph 1:
Afterwards Already Immediately Meanwhile

Then When she was ready When they saw
her
On the morning of Gina‘s birthday, she woke up very early. ________, she took a
bath and brushed her teeth. _______, she opened her closet and wore her best
dress. ________, she went down to the kitchen to see if her family was having
breakfast. Her mother was _______ cooking their breakfast. __________, her
father was drinking coffee. Her two brothers were drinking warm milk.
__________, they all looked at her and greeted her ―Happy Birthday.‖ Gina
smiled and hugged them one by one. _________, she went to the presents on
the table and she began opening them.
Paragraph 2:
A few moments later Consequently Immediately

In fact subsequently
When Rebecca reached school, the gate was locked. Due to her rumbling
stomach, she ________ began shouting for the guards to let her in. ________, a
guard showed up at the gate and told her to go home. Rebecca had, ________,
forgotten that today was a Saturday. _________, the canteen was closed and
even going inside the campus would not do her any good. ________, Rebecca
began walking away from the school, her hunger unabated.
B. Circle the letter of the transition word that will best complete each sentence.
1. A survey reveals that the new president enjoys massive public support in his
decision to stop the former president from leaving the country. _________,
there are those who are still discomfited by the manner by which the former
president was treated.
A. However B. Still C. For instance D. And
2. The weather patterns in the country have been so far unpredictable.

PAGASA, ______, predicts that December will be a dry Christmas for
everyone.
A. yet B. in addition C. subsequently D. though
3. The two northernmost island groups, ______ Batanes and Babuyan, already
receive Taiwanese radio signals.

A. in particular B. namely C. for example D.
consequently
4. The hospital owner announced that the hospital‘s nurses would now have to
work twelve hours for six days every week. _______, many nurses resigned
in protest.
A. So that B. Yet C. Likewise D. As a
result
5. The sales of wooden slippers have dropped to nearly zero in the past two
years. ______, the sales of rubber slippers have reached more than half a
million.
A. Above all B. Additionally C. Correspondingly D. In contrast
6. The Campus Director explained that in light of the new K Plus 12 curriculum,
it would be necessary to retain all incoming freshmen for six years. ______,
the current freshmen will be the last batch to graduate under the old
curriculum.
A. Similarly B. Consequently C. Nevertheless D. In other
words
7. Pundits say that the situation in Maguindanao will improve very slowly.
_______, the problems the rest of Mindanao is experiencing, the outlook is
not that optimistic at all.
A. Furthermore B. With reference to C. In contrast D. In
comparison
8. The government has announced that all cars older than five years will now
be declared road hazards starting 2012. ______, car owners who refuse to
change their cars will be saddled with new car taxes.
A. In addition B. In the same way C. As well as D.
Now
9. Individual projects must be handed in by the deadline, ______ they will

receive substantial deductions.
A. obviously B. otherwise C. as a result D. on the
other hand
10. ________ people from all around the world revile Justin, he still manages to
rake in a lot of money whenever he holds a concert tour.
A. Nevertheless B. Even though C. Because D. Also
YOUR FINAL TASK

The Persons I Love
Very much like the poem, list three people whom you love. Once you have your
list, find an appropriate object or symbol that best approximates your feelings for that
person. Explain why you chose that symbol. You may go to the library and search out
for the numerous symbols that humans have used to represent those that they love. As
much as possible avoid using the heart as it is a universal symbol.
THE PERSON I LOVE THE SYMBOL FOR THIS THE EXPLANATION FOR
PERSON THE USE OF THE
SYMBOL
Three things I learned while searching for love symbols are:
1. ________________________________________________________________
2. ________________________________________________________________
3. ________________________________________________________________

Lesson 9
When I Struggle
YOUR GOALS
You are a unique individual. But this uniqueness can sometimes be the
source of many conflicts. We often clash with other people because of our uniqueness.
This lesson allows you to examine the reasons why we fight. You must aim to:
1. Discover the reasons why our people participated in several upheavals.

2. Recall and explain the instances when you found yourself in a fight.
3. Decipher the meanings of words by looking for their antonyms.
4. Use word clines in order to show the differences between synonyms.
5. Paraphrase a long poem by turning each stanza into a meaningful sentence.
6. Rewrite paragraphs in order to make them more cohesive.
7. Explain how an individual can generate numerous internal conflicts.
8. List down the main conflicts that your are currently undergoing and mapping out
solutions on how to resolve them.
YOUR INITIAL TASKS
Task 1. The Wars We Have Fought
Fill in the chart below. Your teacher may give this to you as homework. If you use
any other library source, make sure you cite your sources.
Battle/Revolution/War Reasons for Filipino Result

Participation
1. The Battle of Mactan
2. The Revolution of 1896
3. The Filipino-American
War
4. World War II
5. The EDSA Revolution

Task 2. Why We Fight
Recall fights you have had with your parents, classmates, friends, or teachers.
Complete the spider map below by listing down the reasons for those fights. Be
prepared to share your answers with your classmates.
Reasons
Why You
Fought
YOUR TEXT
If You Want to Know What We Are

by Carlos Bulosan
I
1 If you want to know what we are who inhabit
forest, mountain, rivershore, who harness
beast, living steel, martial music (that classless
language of the heart), who celebrate labour,
wisdom of the mind, peace of the blood;
2 If you want to know what we are who become

animate at the rain‘s metallic ring, the stone‘s
accumulated strength, who tremble in the wind‘s
blossoming (that enervates earth‘s potentialities),
who stir just as flowers unfold to the sun;

3 If you want to know what we are who grow
powerful and deathless in countless counterparts,
each part pregnant with hope, each hope supreme,
each supremacy classless, each classlessness
nourished by unlimited splendor of comradeship;
4 We are multitudes the world over, millions everywhere;

in violent factories, sordid tenements, crowded cities;
in skies and seas and rivers, in lands everywhere;
our number increase as the wide world revolves
and increases arrogance, hunger disease and death.
5 We are the men and women reading books, searching

in the pages of history for the lost word, the key
to the mystery of living peace, imperishable joy;
we are factory hands field hands mill hand everywhere,
molding creating building structures, forging ahead,
6 Reaching for the future, nourished in the heart;

we are doctors scientists chemists discovering,
eliminating disease and hunger and antagonisms;
we are soldiers navy-men citizens guarding
the imperishable will of man to live in grandeur,
7 We are the living dream of dead men everywhere,

the unquenchable truth that class-memories create
to stagger the infamous world with prophecies
of unlimited happiness - a deathless humanity;
we are the living and the dead men everywhere….
II
8 If you want to know what we are, observe
the bloody club smashing heads, the bayonet
penetrating hallowed breasts, giving no mercy; watch the
bullet crashing upon armorless citizens;
look at the tear-gas choking the weakened lung.
9 If you want to know what we are, see the lynch

trees blossoming, the hysterical mob rioting;
remember the prisoner beaten by detectives to confess
a crime he did not commit because he was honest,
and who stood alone before a rabid jury of ten men,
10 And who was sentenced to hang by a judge

whose bourgeois arrogance betrayed the office
he claimed his own; name the marked man,
the violator of secrets; observe the banker,
the gangster, the mobsters who kill and go free;

11 We are the sufferers who suffer for natural love
of man for man, who commemorate the humanities
of every man; we are the toilers who toil
to make the starved earth a place of abundance
who transform abundance into deathless fragrance.
12 We are the desires of anonymous men everywhere,

who impregnate the wide earth‘s lustrous wealth
with a gleaming fluorescence; we are the new thoughts
and the new foundations, the new verdure of the mind;
we are the new hope new joy life everywhere.
13 We are the vision and the star, the quietus of pain;

we are the terminals of inquisition, the hiatuses
of a new crusade; we are the subterranean subways
of suffering; we are the will of dignities;
we are the living testament of a flowering race.
If you want to know what we are –
WE ARE THE REVOLUTION!
Task 1. Opposites Attract
Encircle the letter of the option that is most opposite to the underlined word in the
sentence.
1. The corrupt governor accumulated a lot of luxury cars during his stay in office.
A. collected B. dispersed C. coagulated
2. The constant air bombardment of the capital was the military‘s way of enervating
the opposition.
A. strengthening B. weakening C. coddling
3. The comradeship that develops between soldiers is one that extends beyond the
battlefield.
A. hostility B. romance C. amity
4. Leona‘s face showed her disgust as she entered the sordid sausage factory.
A. squalid B. pleasant C. depressing
5. Carlo went down on his knees and declared his imperishable love to Carlita.
A. sectional B. immortal C. temporal

6. The day after the fire, the police released Lee‘s picture to the public. Lee, who
was wanted for arson, was now considered infamous.
A. notorious B. famous C. unknown
7. The children descended into hysterical laughter when the clown began to
perform his tricks.
A. feverish B. composed C. unrelenting
8. Angela‘s lustrous hair was the reason for her newfound celebrity.
A. dull B. gleaming C. limp
Task 2. Using Clines
Arrange the following words based on the degrees of their meanings.
SET A: war, conflict, argument, battle, skirmish, hostilities

SET B: revolt, revolution, insurrection, mutiny, rebellion, uprising
SET C: heroism, martyrdom, patriotism, nationalism
This activity is a continuation of the paraphrasing lessons you had in the previous
lesson. This time, you must paraphrase a longer piece. Complete the table below by
paraphrasing each stanza of the poem. Use only a single sentence for each stanza.
Work with a partner for this task. The first stanza has been done for you.
STANZA PARAPHRASE
1 The persona seems to be telling the listener that to know what we are, one
must look at the men and women who come from the rural areas of the
country as they best represent our roots.
2

8
10
11
12
13
Task 4. Watch Out!
Study the paragraphs below. On a one-half sheet of paper crosswise, rewrite

each paragraph in order to make it more cohesive.
A. Forty kilometers south of Peshawar, deep inside Pakistan‘s tribal belt, lies
the village of Darra Adam Khel. It‘s an area few foreigners will ever visit.
They are surreptitiously waging the U.S.-led war on terror or trying to
elude it. Anyone else who manages to pass through the roadblocks to
enter Darra, it‘s the perfect place to release pent-up stress. The village
has one industry of note: ordnance. Darra is the arms factory of the tribal
areas. It pumps out everything from pistols to anti-aircraft weaponry.
Wander into any of the mom-and-pop workshops. Choose your weapon.
Haggle over the price of bullets or shells. Troll out with your equipment
into the bush. Being rather nice to look at, the surrounding rocks and trees
make for excellent target practice. You‘ve finished debarking a tree with
an AK-47. You can head back to civilization a better, calmer person for
this cathartic experience. Think of it as a harmless outlet for the warrior
that lurks within you.
(Adapted from Discharging Firearms-
Darra Adam Khel, Pakistan by Jaimie
Miyazaki from Time Magazine: The Best
of Asia, July 4, 2005)
B. After five hours of uphill struggle on the second day of the classic
Himalayan trek from Paro, site of Bhutan‘s international airport, to
Thimphu, the country‘s capital, your muscles will burn. The blood will
pound in your ears. Your breathing will approximate that of someone with
advanced emphysema. When your guide urges you on, trust him. It is at
about this stage that you reach the 3,810-m-high ridge above Lake
Jimilangtso. The setting sun bathes the mountains in an unearthly rose,
and Venus is visible against a violet sky. The sheer beauty of it strikes you
dumb. On the other side of the pass, on the banks of the lake, a bonfire
flickers as porters set up your camp. Within the hour, you will be wrapping
your hands around a steaming mug of sweetened Bhutanese rum. You
will be savoring your chef‘s startlingly fine creations. Sauteed chanterelle
mushrooms with tender shoots of fiddlehead ferns gathered en route. Ema
datshi (the national dish of potatoes, chilies and cheese). All you have to
do as night falls is eat your fill. Crawl into your tent (which your porters
have already set up for you). Zip the door shut. The next day may hold
more trekking hell. As your head hits the pillow, there is no doubt in your
mind: to be under the canvas in Bhutan is to discover the meaning of an
exhausted, elated bliss.
(Adapted from Bhutan by Aryn Baker
from Time Magazine: The Best of Asia,
July 4, 2005)
YOUR FINAL TASK
The Things I Must Fight For
Just because we have the capability to fight, it doesn‘t mean that we should go
around looking for trouble. There are always things worth fighting for. They are called
causes. Try interviewing people, asking them which three things are worth the good
fight. Once you have enough, list down the top five causes. Provide an explanation for
why you need to fight for them.
CAUSES WHY I MUST FIGHT FOR THEM

What Is This Module About?
While we are a nation of many subcultures, there are dominant traits, practices
and beliefs that are common to all people. This is what we refer to as the culture of
the Philippines.
Are you a true Filipino? Why do you think so?
Are you proud of your culture? What makes you proud of it?
Do you love your country, the Philippines? Why?
In this module, you will learn about the desirable traits of a true Filipino. It will
help you answer questions about your role and duties as a citizen of this country. It
will also enable you to practice and strengthen the values that you should have as a
Filipino. This module highlights the desirable traits of Filipinos. It will give you an
opportunity to demonstrate and practice the desirable traits you will learn in this
module.
This module is divided into three lessons:
Lesson 1 – We Are Filipinos
Lesson 2 – The Mark of a True Filipino
Lesson 3 – Filipino in Thought, Word and Deed
What Will You Learn From This Module?
After studying this module, you should be able to:

♦ show pride in the Filipino culture;
♦ show respect and appreciation for the Philippine flag, national anthem,
national language and other national symbols of the Philippines;
♦ discuss desirable Filipino traits and values;
♦ show appreciation for desirable Filipino traditions; and
♦ give your own opinion based on a story/song/play read or heard.
1
Let’s See What You Already Know
Before studying this module, answer the questions below to determine how much
you already know about the topic.
Put a check mark (4) opposite each statement that shows a good Filipino trait
and an X-mark (8) before each statement that does not.
_____ 1. A true Filipino stands at attention whenever he/she hears the
Philippine National Anthem.
_____ 2. Filipino is encouraged in the elementary, secondary and college
levels as a medium of instruction.
_____ 3. Traditionally, many Filipinos pause to say a prayer at angelus time.
_____ 4. In a village that practices bayanihan, Filipinos help each other
in constructing the village church.
_____ 5. Kissing the hands or pagmamano is currently considered out of
fashion.
_____ 6. OPM or Original Pilipino Music must make up half the
airtime of local musical radio programs.
_____ 7. A true Filipino believes that a favor granted has to be repaid.
_____ 8. Filipino grooms-to-be traditionally visit the parents of their
fiancées to perform a pre-betrothal ceremony called
pamamanhikan.
_____ 9. Giving donations to a bereaved family is a foreign tradition that
was not adopted by Filipinos.
_____10. Pakikisama—or the ability to get along with others to avoid
conflict—is not being demonstrated by Filipinos anymore.
Well, how was it? Was it difficult? Compare your answers with those in the
Answer Key on page 30.
If all your answers are correct, very good! This shows that you already know
much about the topic. You may still study the module to review what you already
know. Who knows, you might learn some new things as well.
If you got a low score, don’t feel bad. This means that this module is for you. It
will help you understand good Filipino traits that you can practice in your daily life. If
you study this module carefully, you will learn the answers to all the items in the test
and a lot more! Are you ready?
You may now go to the next page to begin Lesson 1.
2
LESSON 1
We Are Filipinos
What are the desirable traits of a Filipino? What values are native to our Filipino
culture.
In this lesson, you will learn different Filipino values such as those that promote
harmonious and peaceful relationships, close family ties, respect for elders and trust
in a Supreme Being.
After studying this lesson, you should be able to:
♦ identify and provide examples of the desirable traits of a Filipino; and
♦ show pride in the Filipino culture.
Let’s Study and Analyze
Ricardo holds on to desirable Filipino values and pratices both as an individual

and as a member of the community. You are going to find out what these traits are and
how Ricardo practices them in his daily life.
Try to match the desirable Filipino traits in the box below with the actions and
behavior of Ricardo. Write the letter of your answer in the blank before each number.
a. Trust in God f. Bayanihan

(Cooperation)
b. Hospitality g. Pakikisama
(ability to get along with others)
c. Respect for Elders h. Close Family Ties
d. Utang na loob i. Patience/Optimism
(Debt of gratitude)
e. Resourcefulness/ j. Respect for Womanhood
Creativity
____1. Ricardo kisses the hands of his parents, grandparents and older
relatives. He listens and gives importance to their advice and helps them
in any way he can. He plans to take care of his parents when they grow
old.
____2. Ricardo loves to be with his family at all times. He goes to church with
them, joins them for regular get-togethers, and celebrates holidays with
them as much as he can. He would love to live with his family even as
he gets older.
3
____3. Ricardo’s belief in God is very strong. He does not complain much
because he knows that God will take care of everything. He keeps and
venerates religious symbols in his house.
____4. Ricardo is always there to help his neighbors and other members of his
community. He joined and supported the People Power 2 uprising at
Edsa in January 2001. Aside from participating in national projects, he
is always available whenever his barangay needs his help and support in
implementing its projects.
____5. Ricardo sees things through until the end. He always has hope and looks
at the brighter side of things. He does not get discouraged when
confronted with problems. In fact, no matter how miserable his life is,
he moves on, knowing that in the end, the sun will shine again. He
remains calm even if he has a hard time commuting, or when he deals
with everyday problems like pollution, traffic, lack of water and
electricity, bad roads and poor telephone services.
____6. When someone does Ricardo a favor or helps him in his hour of need,
he feels that he needs to return a favor to that person. He would not
feel comfortable if he does not repay that person in any way that he can.
____7. You will always see cheerfulness in Ricardo’s face wherever he goes.
He tries to maintain harmonious and peaceful relationships with
everyone, even if he sees the faults of his enemies, friends, or family.
For him, not being friendly and cooperative with others would bring
negative results.
____8. Ricardo loves to entertain guests, friends and even strangers. He is very
warm-hearted and generous in receiving visitors at home, in the
office, or wherever he meets people.
____9. Ricardo is very good at inventing new things. He makes decorations out
of old newspapers and used soft drink cans. He saves used paper and
empty bottles for future use.
___10. Ricardo respects his mother and this respect is extended to his sisters,
female friends, and colleagues. He opens doors, gives up his seat, and
carries bags for women. He also assists them when boarding or
alighting from vehicles.
How did you find the exercise? Compare your answers with the Answer Key on
pages 30–31.
4
Let’s Try This
Give an example of each desirable trait you just learned in the exercise. Apply
that example at home, at work or in the community. How did you feel after
demonstrating each desirable Filipino trait? Write down your observations and
discuss them with your co-learners and Instructional Manager.
Let’s Read
Play the tape with the song “Tayo’y Mga Pinoy.” As you listen to the tape,
silently read the lyrics and try to determine the message of the song.
Heber Bartolome (original version)
Chorus 1
Tayo’y mga Pinoy
Tayo’y hindi Kano
‘Wag kang mahihiya kung
Ang ilong mo ay pango.
Dito sa Silangan, ako’y isinilang

Kung saan nagmumula
Ang sikat ng araw
Ako ay may sariling
Kulay kayumaggi.
Ngunit di ko maipakitang
Tunay sa sarili.
Kung ating hahanapin ay
Matatagpuan.
Tayo ay may kakanyahang

Dapat hangaan.
Subali’t nasaan ang
Sikat ng araw?
Ba’t tayo ay humahanga doon
Sa Kanluran?
Bakit manggagaya
Mayroon naman tayo.
Repeat Chorus 1
5
Dito sa Silangan,
Tayo’y isinilang
Kung saan nagmumula ang
Sikat ng araw
Subali’t nasaan ang sikat ng araw
Ba’t tayo ay humahanga doon sa
Kanluran?
Repeat Chorus 1
Chorus 2
Mayro’ng isang aso, daig pa ang ulol
Sya’y ngumingiyaw
Hindi tumatahol
Katulad ng iba
Pa-Inglis-Inglis pa
Na kung pakikinggan,
Mali-mali naman
‘Wag na lang.
Repeat Chorus 2 except the last line
‘Wag na, oy oy
Oy, ika’y Pinoy
Oy, oy, ika’y Pinoy.”
Let’s Talk About This
Did you like the song? Did you understand its message? Try answering the
following questions:
1. What is the message of the song?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
2. Are you ashamed of being a Filipino? Explain your answer.

_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
6
3. How do you understand the line: “Mayro’ng isang aso, daig pa ang ulol.
Siya’y ngumingiyaw, hindi tumatahol.” (There is a dog, crazier than a crazy
dog. He meows instead of barking).
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
4. What traits and attitudes portrayed in the song do you feel apply to you?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
5. If, by chance, you are brown-skinned and flat-nosed, would you be ashamed?
Why or why not?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
Compare your answers with those found in the Answer Key on page 31.
Let’s Learn
You should always be proud of being a Filipino. You should not be ashamed of
your culture because God has given you talents, skills and physical characteristics that
are uniquely Filipino, which you should always cherish and be proud of.
Here are some of the most-well known desirable Filipino traits.
This is a trait that most Filipinos and our
neighbors in Asia practice. We kiss the hands of
our elders and we offer them our seat. We take
care of our parents and grandparents as they grow
older and try to be with them as much as we can. It
is unthinkable to allow a parent or a relative to go
unattended in his or her old age.
Respect for Elders
7
We love being with our family at all times. We go
to church together, we have regular family get-
togethers and we celebrate holidays together.
Unlike other cultures, we love to live with our
families even as we get older because we cannot
stand living away from them.
Close Family Ties
We always believe in a Supreme Being that

protects, judges and rules over us. We always
believe that God is always there to help us at all
times. We do not complain much because we
know that God will take care of everything.
Trust in God
This trait means togetherness and mutual help or

being available to help others, especially our
neighbors and countrymen. It also means peace
and a feeling of “oneness” or cooperative spirit
which motivates people to work together for a
good purpose.
Bayanihan or Cooperation
Filipinos see things through until the end. We are

optimistic, we always have hope and look at the
brighter side of things. No matter how difficult
our life is, we move on, knowing that in the end,
the sun would shine again. We take everything
calmly and easily due to our being patient.
Patience, Optimism and

Creativity
8
This means that we feel that we are indebted to
anyone who did us a favor or helped us in an hour
of need. It is for this reason that we want to do
good to help them as a sign of our gratitude.
Utang na Loob or Debt of gratitude
Having harmonious interpersonal relationships

helps us understand the faults of our friends and
family just to maintain peace.
Pakikisama or Getting along with others
We are very friendly and generous in receiving and

entertaining guests or even strangers.
Hospitality
We Filipinos are able to make use of what we have.

This shows our resourcefulness. We are also
creative in the sense that we are skillful and clever
in inventing new things.
Resourcefulness/
Creativity
Filipinos, in general, respect their mother, and this

is extended to other women.
Respect for Women
9
Let’s See What You Have Learned
Study the following situations. What desirable Filipino trait should you show in
each situation? How would you show it? Write your answers in the spaces provided.
1. A friend of your mother’s paid a visit to your family.
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
2. Your neighbor is fixing the roof of his house. You noticed that he is having a
difficult time.
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
3. You just got home. You found your parents in the living room.
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
4. Your friend lent you money when you ran out of cash one time.
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
5. You have a problem. It seems difficult to solve.

_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
Compare your answers with those in the Answer Key on page 31.
Well, how did you do? Did you get all the right answers? If you did, very good! If
not, just review the lesson again and try to understand it better.
Let’s Remember
In this lesson, you learned about the following desirable Filipino traits:
♦ Filipinos are known for trusting in God and putting faith in Him.
♦ Family traits include close family ties, respect for elders and respect
for women.
♦ Filipinos are also known for their hospitality, the spirit of bayanihan,
pakikisama and utang na loob.
♦ Filipinos are resourceful, creative, patient and optimistic. These
traits help the Filipino in his daily life.
10
LESSON 2
The Mark of a True Filipino
How should you sing the Philippine National Anthem? What are the different
Philippine national symbols? What makes us uniquely Filipino? These questions will
be answered in this lesson.
♦ identify the different Philippine national symbols;
♦ demonstrate the proper way of showing respect for the Philippine National
Anthem;
♦ show understanding and respect for Philippine national symbols; and
♦ demonstrate love for our culture and national identity.
Let’s Read
The Mark of a True Filipino

I was once asked by a foreigner
To describe my beloved country
Hark, listen very carefully
To my true and faithful description.
If by chance I have seen
Unfurled and flying, high above the air
The most beautiful flag of red, white and blue
Symbol of my country, we give honor.
Once our national anthem is played
And by chance I hear its music drifting in the wind
Place your right hand over your breast
While its lively music is being played.
Our national costumes, Barong tagalog and “Baro at Saya”
And our national flower, the Sampaguita
Our folk songs, our national tree—Narra
And the Philippine Eagle
All these are our national symbols.
11
Should anybody make fun
Of the color of your skin
Be proud, don’t be ashamed
Hold your head high, it is God-given
Our heroes never feared

To shed their blood and give their life
For freedom most revered
They’re our pride, let us not forget them.
Anonymous
Let’s Try This
Did you like the poem? Did you understand it? If you did, try answering the
following questions:
1. Do you stand at attention and place your right hand over your breast when
you hear or sing the Philippine National Anthem?
_________________________________________________________
2. What other Philippine national symbols do you know that are not mentioned
in the poem?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
3. Mention as many national heroes that the author refers to in the last stanza
of the poem as you can.
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
4. How can you be a hero in your own way with your friends? Your neighbors?
Your colleagues at work?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
12
5. Why is it important to know your culture? Why is it important to love your
culture?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
Now you can compare your answers with those in the Answer Key on page 32.
Let’s Learn
How do you sing the “Lupang Hinirang,” the Philippine National Anthem?
You should show respect to the Philippine National Anthem by standing at
attention and placing your right hand on the left side of your chest when singing it.
You should look at the National flag with sincerity and respect.
The Philippine flag is only one of the many Philippine national symbols. You have
read in the poem about other symbols. Our national costumes are the barong-Tagalog
and the Baro’t Saya. Our national flower is the Sampaguita. The Narra is our
national tree. The Philippine eagle is the symbol of Filipino strength.
You can also be a hero like Dr. Jose Rizal. You can do this simply by helping your
family, friends and neighbors and not expecting anything in return.
The Philippine culture is very rich. You should learn more about it so that you can
apply and strengthen the Filipino traits that are desirable. This will help you become a
better person and a true Filipino.
A. Identify the Philippine national symbols being described in each statement.

Write your answer in the blank before each number.
_______________ 1. Philippine national anthem
_______________ 2. National hero
_______________ 3. Philippine costume for men
_______________ 4. National tree
_______________ 5. National flower
13
B. Answer these questions:
1. How should you sing the Philippine National Anthem?
_____________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
2. Why do you need to learn more about your culture?

______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
Compare your answers with those in the Answer Key on page 32.
Well, how was it? Did you get all the correct answers? If you did, very good! If
not, review the parts of this lesson that were not clear to you.
Let’s Remember
What you have learned are the desirable traits of a true Filipino. They simply
show the way we Filipinos are. Don’t forget that:
♦ you should learn to respect the Philippine National Anthem by standing at
attention and placing your right hand on the left side of your chest;
♦ you should be aware of the Philippine national symbols, so that when you
meet new friends from other countries, you can proudly share these with
them;
♦ you can be a hero to your friends, neighbors and colleagues by helping them
when they have problems and not expecting to be repaid; and
♦ you should learn more about your culture so that you can apply and reinforce
the desirable Filipino traits. In turn, you can be a better person and member
of the community.
Just remember to retain and reinforce these desirable Filipino traits and don’t
forget to pass them on!
14
LESSON 3
Filipino in Thought, Word and Deed
Which Filipino traits are truly desirable? How and when are these shown? How
can we show that we are indeed Filipinos?
In this lesson, you will find out how desirable Filipino traits can be shown in
certain situations.
♦ identify Filipino characteristics, values, practices and traditions; and
♦ form your own opinion on how to show loyalty to your country.
Let’s Listen to This
Get your cassette tape and listen to the dialogue. If a cassette player is not
available, you can just read the dialogue that follows.
Characters:
Domeng – a 48 year old balikbayan from the United States
Joseph – a teenage son of Domeng
Concha – the 70-year old mother of Domeng
Honesto – the 75-year old father of Domeng
Rey – a neighbor and good friend of Domeng
Arvin – a teenage adopted son of Honesto and Concha
Narrator
Scene 1 : At the Airport
Concha : Arvin, how come the plane has not arrived yet? It’s already an
hour late, I’m getting worried. Something might have happened
to them.
Arvin : Nana Concha. Please calm yourself. Haven’t you heard the
announcement? The plane from San Francisco has just arrived.
Concha : Really, Arvin?
Arvin : That’s true! Nana Concha!.
Concha : Thank God!
15
Arvin : Nana Concha! Mang Rey! Let’s move over there so we can see
them immediately.
Concha : I think that’s better. With my poor eyesight, I may not be able to
recognize Domeng and his son Joseph from afar.
Arvin : Nana Concha, about how many years has Uncle Domeng been
away from the Philippines?
Concha : Oh, he was still young then. He was about twenty years old.
Rey : That’s right, Arvin. We’re of the same age and I’m 48 years old
now.
Arvin : You’re 48 years old now, Mang Rey? In that case, Uncle
Domeng has been away for 28 years now.
Concha : You’re right, Arvin.
Rey : Arvin, look! Look at that lady! She has plenty of luggage, she
can hardly carry all of them.
Arvin : She’s not the only one who’s like that, Mang Rey. Look at the
others. I bet, most of their luggage are for pasalubong. Isn’t
Nanay Concha like them? Every time she travels, she always
brings pasalubong.
Rey : Ah, yes. Even when she’s just from the market, she still brings
pasalubong.
Concha : So, what’s wrong with that? That’s being a Filipino. We’re fond
of giving something as pasalubong.
Arvin : You’re right. Almost every balikbayan I see has plenty of
baggages.
Concha : That’s because, most of us Filipinos are thoughtful and generous.
Arvin : Will Uncle Domeng have plenty of baggages, too?
Concha : Rey, Rey! Look! Isn’t that Domeng who’s just come out of the
door?
Rey : That’s him! And he saw us, too!
Concha : Domeng! Domeng, my son!
Arvin : Nanay Concha, with 28 years being in America, do you think
Uncle Domeng has changed his nickname to.. maybe “Dom”
or “Domy”?
Concha : It doesn’t really matter whether he has changed his nickname or
not. To me, he is still my Domeng!
16
Rey : I’ll leave you for a while. I’ll have to make the car ready. The
parking lot is quite far from here, so, when Domeng is ready, we
can immediately leave.
Concha : That would be better, Rey.
Domeng : Nay! Nay!
Concha : Domeng, my son!
Domeng : (Domeng, kissing his mother’s hand)
Concha : God bless you, my son.
Domeng : Where’s Tatay?
Concha : Oh, his arthritis acted up again, so he opted to wait for you at
home.
Domeng : By the way, Nay, this is Joseph, your grandson. Joseph, this is
your Lola.
Concha : Oh, he’s so handsome!
Joseph : (Kissing Lola’s hand)
Concha : God Bless you, Joseph. And, Joseph, this is Arvin, your cousin.
Joseph : How are you, Kuya Arvin?
Arvin : Ah…I’m fine, Joseph.
Concha : Domeng, this is Arvin, your nephew.
Arvin : (Kisses the hand of Domeng)
Domeng : I thought for a while, you’re not with Nanay. How come you’re
keeping a distance?
Arvin : I’m sorry, Uncle. I was a bit apprehensive in getting close to
you, because I’m not that good in talking English.
Joseph : Why did you ever think of that, Kuya Arvin?
Arvin : You see, some of our cousins who also came from America only
spoke in English. And I felt awkward talking to them.
Joseph : Don’t worry, Kuya Arvin, I’m used to speaking Filipino. Back
home, we always talk in Filipino except when we have visitors.
Daddy and Mommy want us to speak in Filipino even if we’re not
born in the Philippines.
Domeng : That’s true. I haven’t forgotten what Nanay taught us. That we
should not forget our own language and we should be proud of it.
And that’s one measure of being a true Filipino.
17
Arvin : I admire you for that, Uncle Domeng. You’re not like the others
who teach their children to speak in English, just to give the
impression of being ‘class’.
Concha : I’m proud of you, Domeng. Despite your having been away from
our country for so long, you have not forgotten being a Filipino.
Arvin : Here comes our ride, Uncle Domeng.
Concha : Arvin, please help them put their luggage inside the car.
Rey : I’ll open the baggage compartment.
Domeng : I know you…. Ah, Rey? Yes, its you, Rey!
Rey : I thought you have forgotten about me.
Domeng : That’s not possible, Rey. Except for a few white hairs, you have
not changed at all.
Rey : Oh, well. Let’s talk more about it later, Domeng. Let’s attend to
your luggage first, so we can leave.
Concha : You know, Joseph, Rey and your father were “age mates” and
good friends. They were like brothers.
Joseph : Aha! Then Tito Rey must know a lot of Daddy’s secrets. Tell
me about you and Dad when we get home, ha, Tito Rey.
Concha : It seems like you brought a lot of pasalubong. Aside from
your suitcases, you brought some balikbayan boxes as well.
Domeng : That’s not even enough, Nay. We didn’t have much time to shop,
so I’m thinking of buying some more items from the Duty Free
Shops here. I’ve heard, there are a lot of items to choose from
and they’re a lot cheaper, too.
Concha : That’s true, Domeng. They’ve lowered the prices even for
imported items.
Joseph : And you know what, Lola. You can even choose the item you
want Daddy to give you as pasalubong. You can get what you
really wanted and need most.
Concha : Oh, thank you so much! What is nice about your shopping here,
either in the Duty Free Shops or any of the malls here, is that
you’re able to help boost the economy of our country.
Rey : Have you heard in America about our economic crisis?
Domeng : Ah, yes! Even if I’m already in America, I’ve always made it a
point to listen regularly for news about our country. I will never
forget who I am and from where I came from.
18
Narrator : You’ve just heard scene 1 of our drama. Before you listen to the
next scene, please stop the tape for a while, and answer the
questions that follow:
Let’s Think About This
Did you like the play? Did you understand it? Try answering the following
questions.
1. What Filipino values, practices and traditions were demonstrated by the
characters in the play?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
2. What can you say about Domeng, who remained loyal to the language of the
country of his birth?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
3. Were Domeng and Joseph right in deciding to buy their pasalubong
from the Duty Free Shops here? Why?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
Compare your answers with those found in the Answer Key on pages 32–33.
19
Let’s Listen to This
Let’s continue listening to the rest of the tape. (Again, you may just read the
dialogue if you don’t have a cassette player around.)
Scene 2 : At the house of Honesto and Concha
Concha : Here we are home at last! Let’s all come in.
Domeng : (Upon seeing his father.. ) Let me kiss your hand, Father. How
are you?
Honesto : I’m fine. It’s just that lately my knees have been aching because
of arthritis.
Domeng : Father, I’d like you to meet Joseph. Joseph, this is your
grandfather.
Joseph : Let me kiss your hand, Lolo. You know, Lolo, you don’t look
that old! It seems that you and Daddy are of the same age.
Honesto : Really? You really surprise me! Aside from knowing how to
speak Filipino, you’re also good at flattery.
Domeng : Joseph is right, Father. You don’t look old. You may even have
more hair than I have. What’s your secret?
Honesto : Oh, stop it! Come on, let’s all get inside and have something to
drink! Arvin, can you please help them with their luggage?
Arvin : Yes, Tata Honesto, I’ll be glad to.
Joseph : Thank you, Kuya Arvin.
Arvin : Don’t mention it.
Honesto : I’m all praises for my grandson, Domeng. He knows how to
speak our language, and he’s also courteous, even if he grew up
in America.
Domeng : Tay, do you still remember what Inay has always taught me? That
I should not forget our national language. That is why, we always
speak Filipino when we’re at home in America. And of course,
my wife and I have not forgotten some of our good Filipino
traits. One of these is being respectful to the elders and to other
people. We have not also forgotten how to be thoughtful and
helpful. I have not forgotten what you and Inay have taught us
since we were children. We have imparted all of these to my
son, as well.
Honesto : I’m proud of you, my son. You are a true Filipino.
20
Domeng : Thank you, Father! I have tried my best to keep my promise to
be a true Filipino always.
Joseph : Excuse me, Lolo! Daddy, can we now open our luggage and
distribute our pasalubong to them? I’m already excited!
Domeng : Oh, yes! Go ahead, son.
Joseph : Lolo, please accept our pasalubong for you.
Honesto : Thank you, Joseph.
Joseph : Please open it!
Concha : Well, what are we waiting for? Come, everybody! Let’s all eat
first.
Joseph : Lola, here’s our pasalubong for you!
Concha : Oh, thank you, Joseph. Thank you very much. I thought we
would still be going to the Duty Free Shop to buy your
pasalubong for me. But here, you already have a pasalubong
for me.
Domeng : Yes, Inay. We’re still going to the Duty Free Shop, this
afternoon. We’ll still buy additional pasalubong for you.
Honesto : And, whatever for? This is already enough, my son.
Concha : And this is very beautiful! Now, I have a new sweater, Honesto!
Honesto : This is enough for me, too, Domeng. This is just right for the
cold weather.
Joseph : We are happy, Lolo and Lola, that you like what we have brought
for you. And for you, Kuya Arvin, this is for you.
Arvin : Thank you, Joseph for remembering me.
Joseph : Of course! How can we not remember you, Kuya? Lola and
Lolo are always mentioning your name in their letters and in
their telephone calls.
Arvin : Really? What are they saying about me?
Joseph : That you’re obedient and industrious, like me. Ha! Ha! Ha! Open
your pasalubong now, Kuya. I hope you’ll like it!
Arvin : Wow! A new shirt and pants! Thank you, Joseph. Thank you,
Uncle Domeng.
Concha : Okay. Maybe we’ll just continue with our conversation over
dinner.
21
Domeng : Inay, where’s Rey? Has he gone home?
Concha : No, he’s just around. And he has a surprise for you!
Domeng : A surprise? Lending us his vehicle and driving for us are more
than enough.(Rey suddenly comes in with a tray of food.)
Joseph : There’s Tito Rey. He’s coming. Tito Rey, this is our
pasalubong for you.
Rey : Thank you, Joseph.
Joseph : Mmmm…. The food you’re bringing smells good.
Rey : Of course, I prepared this especially for you and your Dad.
Domeng : Mmmm… broiled tilapia and squid. Wow, these are my
favorites, Rey!
Rey : I still cannot forget what your favorites are, pal! Hey, what’s this
you brought for me? An imported shirt! Why, you should have
bought me a local one instead! Not that I don’t like what you gave
me but … You know, Philippine-made products are comparable
to imported ones.
Domeng : Really?
Rey : Yes! I even hear some balikbayans say that products they buy in
other countries are marked, “Made in the Philippines.”
Domeng : Well, then. We don’t have to go to the Duty Free Shop in that
case. (Whispering) And Rey, here’s something for you…. (at the
same time giving Rey some money.)
Rey : What’s this? No! I cannot accept this!
Domeng : Come on, pal. This really comes with your pasalubong. By the
way, thank you for lending us your car and driving for us,
too.(Upon Domeng’s insistence, Rey accepted the money.)
Domeng : Rey, don’t be offended. I know that debt of gratitude cannot be
repaid with money. You can use it to bring your kids to the
movie.
Honesto : What are you whispering about over there? Come on, let’s all
pray before we eat.
Concha : I have a suggestion, Joseph, can you say the grace before meals?
Joseph : Yes. Lola. Bless us O Lord…
22
Let’s Talk About This
Did you like the rest of the play? Try answering the following questions.
1. What Filipino traits were portrayed by the characters?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
2. Which ones would you like to emulate or reinforce? How are you going to
do this?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
3. Do you agree with Domeng that a debt of gratitude cannot be repaid with
money? Please explain your answer.
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
If you are done with your answers, compare them with those found in the Answer
Key on page 33.
Let’s Remember
We should be proud of our desirable Filipino traits. They bring about harmonious
relationships between neighbors, as well as desirable and peaceful relationships
among individuals and the community in general.
23
Let’s Read
Do you truly love your country? Here is a short essay about how to be a true
Filipino. Read it carefully.
I Am a Filipino
I am a Filipino. I am a poet and a dreamer. In good
times and in bad, I persevere with open arms and an open
heart. I constantly pray for peace and I am willing to risk
my life for freedom and justice. I would like to shout to
the world “I am the hope of our fatherland.” These words
should come from my heart — a heart of a Filipino who
truly loves his country.
My love for my country is not proven through mere words but through
my actions as well. Some of our national heroes have written poems and
essays also entitled “I am a Filipino.” They have contributed to our country’s
progress at one point in time. Jose Rizal’s fight for justice would never be
forgotten even after he was killed by the Spaniards. Apolinario Mabini’s
literary piece made him “The Great Paralytic.” Ramon Magsaysay was
motivated by Mabini to serve his countrymen well.
Our fate depends not only on the leaders of our country but also on our
countrymen. Each one of us has a role to play in helping our country.
I am a true Filipino. What does this mean to our youth? What does this
mean to you?
Let’s Try This
Did you like the essay? Did you understand it? Try answering the following
questions.
1. What is the essay about?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
2. What did the writer mean by putting words into action based on the poems
and essays written by our national heroes in the past?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
24
3. How can you prove your love for your country in times of war? In times of
peace?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
4. Make believe that you are one of the following:

a. teacher
b. policeman
c. doctor
d. businessman
How can you show that you are a true Filipino in terms of solving
community and national problems?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
5. Identify organizations in your community that help in maintaining

cleanliness in the environment, peace and order, etc. Have you joined any of
these organizations? Do you intend to join any of these organizations?
Why?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
6. Analyze the current political situation of our country. What insights have
you gained? Among the desirable Filipino traits you have learned, which
should be reinforced by a good Filipino leader?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
25
7. Read the “Panatang Makabayan”. It is about how and why you should love
and be proud of your country—the Philippines. Copy it on a small piece of
paper and keep it in your wallet, purse or bag. Remember to study and
understand it, and, most importantly, apply what it means. You may substitute
the word paaralan on line 7 with the words for the community, work place
or institution you belong to. Share it with your friends, neighbors and
colleagues.
Ang Panatang Makabayan
Iniibig ko ang Pilipinas.

Ito ang aking lupang sinilangan;
Ito ang tahanan ng aking lahi;
Ako’y kanyang kinukupkop at tinutulungan;
Upang maging malakas, maligaya at kapakipakinabang.
Bilang ganti, diringgin ko ang payo ng aking mga magulang;
Susundin ko ang mga tuntunin ng aking paaralan;
Tutuparin ko ang mga tungkulin ng isang mamamayang makabayan
at masunurin sa batas;
Paglilingkuran ko ang aking bayan nang walang pag-iimbot
at ng buong katapatan
Sisikapin kong maging tunay na Pilipino sa isip, sa salita at sa
gawa.
Compare your answers with those found in the Answer Key on pages 33–34.
A. Fill in the blanks with the correct answer. Choose your answer from the
list of words below.
Actions Thought Speaking

Deed Pasalubong Panatang Makabayan
1. Giving ________________ is a sign of a Filipino’s genorosity and

thoughtfulness.
2. The ________________ teaches us how and why one should love and
be proud of one’s country.
3. Love for country is not proven through mere words, but through
________________ as well.
4. You can show your loyalty to your country by _____________.
5–6.A true Filipino is a Filipino in ________________, word and
________________.
26
B. As an NFE A&E learner, how can you show that you are a true Filipino – in
thought, word and deed?
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
Compare your answers with those in the Answer Key on pages 34–35.
Let’s Remember
You will often hear and read about our many desirable traits as a people. It is not
enough that you know about these traits. It is important that you practice these traits
— in your every thought, word and deed.
One of the traits that you should always practice is the love and respect for our
elders, because their wisdom and experience can guide us in our everyday lives.
Another equally important trait that you should foster and develop is loyalty to
our country. You can show this by speaking our national language, giving importance
to our heroes, national symbols and our national anthem, and by doing your part in
helping our country grow and develop.
27
Let’s Sum Up
In this module, you have learned the desirable Filipino traits which we can foster.
Don’t forget to practice the following in your daily activities:
♦ Respect your elders at all times–Take good care of your parents and
grandparents as they grow older and try to be with them always.
♦ Maintain Close Family Ties – Try to be with your family as much as you can.
Give them the love and support you can offer.
♦ Always trust in God.– Pray regularly and thank Him for all the blessings that
He has bestowed upon you.
♦ Practice Bayanihan – Help and support your neighbors and community by
making it a better place to live in.
♦ Be Patient and Optimistic – Remain calm whenever you have problems.
Don’t lose hope and look at the brighter side of things during difficult times.
♦ Have Utang na Loob – If someone has helped you in your hour of need, help
him back in anyway you can. When a loved one is in need of help, be there at
all times and don’t expect anything in return.
♦ Practice Pakikisama – Maintain peace by having harmonious relationships
with your friends, family and colleagues. Try to undesrtand their bad traits
and appreciate their good qualities.
♦ Be Hospitable – Be friendly and generous when receiving guests.
Entertaining people you have just met will show how warm-hearted we
Filipinos are.
♦ Be resourceful and creative –Try to make do with what you have. Develop
your skills in inventing new things that can make your life easier at home or
at work.
♦ Respect Women – Show respect to all women whether at home, or in other
places. They deserve as much respect as our elders.
Having learned the desirable Filipino traits mentioned above, it is hoped that
these will be cultivated and reinforced so that you will become a better person and a
better Filipino citizen. We Filipinos will truly stand out if we reinforce or apply these
traits in our daily lives. Even in a strange land and far from home, the Filipino spirit
often prevails, thanks to an optimistic outlook that is deeply ingrained in our culture.
28
What Have You Learned?
Put a check mark (4) opposite the statement if it is correct and an X-mark (8) if
it is wrong.
_____ 1. Filipinos love to be with their parents, sisters and brothers even as
they get older.
_____ 2. Filipinos are pessimistic. They don’t look at the brighter side of
things.
_____ 3. Traveling within the Philippines instead of outside the
Philippines is a way of showing one’s love for his/her country.
_____ 4. You do not respect the Philippine National Anthem if you do not
stand at attention or place your hand on the left side of your chest
when you hear it being played.
_____ 5. A farmer who works hard tilling his farm in order to send his
children to school is a mark of a true Filipino.
_____ 6. The song “Tayo’y Mga Pinoy” emphasizes the need for Filipinos
to be proud of learning and speaking languages of other countries.
_____ 7. Kissing the hands of elders should not be practiced anymore as
this is considered out of fashion.
_____ 8. Filipinos are marked by skill and cleverness in inventing new
things.
_____ 9. Our national costumes are the barong-Tagalog and the Baro at
Saya.
_____10. In this generation, Filipinos have forgotten the habit of bringing
home gifts or pasalubong for their friends and family when
they come back from another place or country.
Compare your answers with those found in the Answer Key on page 35.
If you got a score of:
8–10 Very Good! You learned a lot from this module.
5–7 Good! Just review the items which you did not get right.
2–4 Review the part of the module which you did not understand.
0–1 You should study the whole module again.
29
Answer Key
A. Let’s See What You Already Know (page 2)

1. 4 It shows respect to our national song and flag.
2. 4 It encourages love for our language.
3. 4 It reflects one’s love for God.
4. 4 It encourages togetherness and cooperation among Filipinos.
5. 8 It destroys one form of respect for elders by Filipinos.
6. 4 It encourages love for Filipino music.
7. 8 Expecting something in return for a favor done is not a good trait.
It shows that the help given is insincere.
8. 4 It honors the bride-to-be’s parents and shows respect or gratitude
for their permission to marry their daughter.
9. 8 Giving donations to a bereaved family is a very Filipino tradition
that has always been practiced.
10. 8 Pakikisama is still practiced by Filipinos. It is especially seen
among family members and friends.
B. Lesson 1
Let’s Study and Analyze (pages 3–4)
1. (c) Kissing our parents’ and older relatives’ hands, listening and giving
importance to their advice, and taking care of our parents when
they grow old are all examples of respect for elders.
2. (h) Spending time with our family, like going to church and celebrating
holidays together, reflects close family ties.
3. (a) The belief that God will always take care of us shows trust in
God.
4. (f) Helping our fellow Filipinos and making ourselves available to
them, especially in times of need, shows the spirit of bayanihan.
5. (i) Seeing things through until the end and always looking at the
brighter side of things show a Filipino’s patience and optimism.
30
6. (d) Returning a favor, especially help given in an hour of need, reflects
the Filipino value of utang na loob.
7. (g) Maintaining harmonious and peaceful relationships with everyone
shows pakikisama.
8. (b) Entertaining guests and being generous to visitors shows
hospitality.
9. (e) The ability of Filipinos to invent, create or make things shows
resourcefulness and creativity.
10. (j) Respecting our mothers, other female relatives and friends shows
respect for women.
Let’s Talk About This (pages 6–7)
1. The message of the song is that we should be proud of our nationality.
Filipinos should not try to look and act like foreigners.
2. No, because based on the song, we have our own culture which we
should be proud of.
3. The meaning of the phrase mentioned is: there are some Filipinos who
try hard to look and act like foreigners, but they end up looking stupid.
In other words, some Filipinos are ashamed of their own nationality.
4. The following are some possible answers:
♦ flat nose
♦ brown skin
♦ curly or kinky hair
5. No, because I am proud of who I am.
Let’s See What You have Learned (page 10)
1. I will show my hospitality. I will have the visitor sit on the sofa. I will
offer him/her a snack and make his/her stay with my family as
comfortable as possible.
2. I will show the spirit of bayanihan. I will help my neighbor fix the roof
of his house. I will also encourage our other neighbors to help us.
3. I will show respect for elders. I will immediately greet them and kiss
their hands.
4. I will show utang na loob. I will promise to pay him as soon as I can and
I will express my gratitude and appreciation for what he has done.
5. I will practice patience and optimism. I will think of a solution. I
will bear in mind that all problems can be solved and that I will be able
to solve my problem in time.
31
C. Lesson 2
Let’s Try This (pages 12–13)
1. To give honor to the Filipino flag you should stand at attention and place
your right hand on the left side of your chest whenever you sing the
Philippine National Anthem. If you don’t do this, try to make it a
regular practice.
2. jeepney, maya
3. Jose Rizal, Andres Bonifacio, del Pilar, Mabini, Quezon
4. There are many possible answers to this question. You can consult your
Instructional Manager about this. One answer may be to help them
in times of need. Another is to respect their opinions and beliefs.
5. It is important to know and love our culture, especially if this
reinforces our desirable traits. This would also help us become better
people, and people from other countries would respect us as well.
Let’s See What You Have Learned (pages 13–14)
A. 1. The “Lupang Hinirang” is the Philippine national anthem
2. Dr. Jose Rizal is our national hero.
3. The barong-Tagalog is the Philippine costume for men.
4. The narra is our national tree.
5. The sampaguita is our national flower.
B. 1. I should stand at attention and place my right hand on my left chest.
I should look at the flag and sing with sincerity.
2. This is a sample answer. Your answer may be a bit different. You
may show your answer to your Instructional Manager for additional
feedback.
I need to learn more about my culture to help me become a better
Filipino. I need to learn more about the desirable traits and values
in a Filipino so that my country and my fellowmen can be proud of
me.
D. Lesson 3
Let’s Think About This (page 19)
1. Some desirable traits portrayed by the characters in the play:
♦ showing respect for elders
♦ hospitable to guests and visitors
♦ strong faith in God
32
♦ thoughtfulness and generosity
♦ love for country
♦ respect for elders
2. Domeng is a true Filipino as he is proud of his nationality and the
country of his birth. He is not like other Filipinos who easily forget
their culture.
3. Yes, because purchasing from duty free shops is one way of helping the
country.
Let’s Talk About This (page 23)
1. Some desirable traits portrayed by the characters:
♦ Love for country
♦ Respect for elders
♦ Utang na loob
2. There are many possible answers to this question. One trait that should
be reinforced is our love for country. In the age of globalization, where
there is a sharing of cultures throughout the world, we tend to lose our
identity. Therefore, we need to rediscover and love our culture. We can
also be respectful to others or be hospitable to visitors.
3. Yes, because money loses its value over time but the sincere return of
kindness and generosity is timeless and can be treasured forever. Any
good deed done has no money equivalent, nor can it be repaid with
material things.
Let’s Try This (pages 24–26)
1. The essay is about being a true Filipino. It discusses how our national
heroes showed their love for our country, which all Filipinos should
emulate.
2. Based on the essay, our national heroes gave their lives because of their
true love for our country. This love was shown in deeds and
actions, not just in words.
3. Some possible answers are the following:
♦ In times of war, love for our country can be demonstrated by
voluntarily enlisting in the armed forces to defend our
country or providing voluntary service as a nurse or aide in an
army hospital.
33
♦ In times of peace, love for country can be shown by being
nationalistic through responsible actions and patronage of our
products. One can also participate in peaceful rallies such as the
recent EDSA Revolution Part II.
You might have answered the question differently. Discuss your
answer with your Instructional Manager or Facilitator for additional
feedback.
4. Some possible answers are the following:
Teacher: teaching the students to love their country, use the
national language, respect the national flag and anthem,
etc.
Policeman: strict and fair implementation of the law and
apprehension of violators, protecting human rights,
maintaining peace and order in the community, etc.
Doctor: wholeheartedly serving the patients and helping to
keep people healthy. Or, working in the Philippines
rather than in other countries.
Businessman: selling Philippine-made products, encouraging
Filipinos to buy local goods, and paying the right
amount of tax.
You might have answered the question differently. Discuss your
answer with your Instructional Manager or Facilitator for additional
feedback.
5. You must try joining organizations that aim to protect the environment,
make the community or country more peaceful (peace councils) or
respect the rights of other citizens such as disadvantaged groups
(indigenous, women, gays, etc.) This will help make you feel like you
are really participating and contributing to the betterment of the
country.
6. One insight that we gained is to choose qualified leaders in order to
have peace throughout the country. Good and effective leaders
should be honest, patient, optimistic, and should demonstrate
pakikisama and bayanihan.
Let’s See What You Have Learned (pages 26–27)
A. 1. Giving pasalubong is a sign of a Filipino’s generosity and
thoughtfulness.
2. The Panatang Makabayan teaches us how and why one should
love and be proud of our country.
34
3. Love for country is not proven through mere words, but through
actions as well.
4. You can show your loyalty to your country by speaking your own
language.
5.–6. A true Filipino is a Filipino in thought, word and deed.
B. Here is a sample answer. Your answer may be different from the one
given below.You should discuss your answers with your Instructional
Manager for additional feedback.
As an NFE A&E learner, I can show that I’m a true Filipino by
studying the modules that will help me enrich my knowldege and
applying the lessons and values that I will learn from them in my every-
day life. In this way, my thoughts, words and actions will be guided by
important lessons in Filipino values.
E. What Have You Learned? (pages 28–29)

1. 4 Filipinos are known for their close family ties. Most still prefer
living with their parents and siblings even when they get older.
2. 8 Filipinos are not pessimistic, but are optimistic. They look at the
brighter side of things and believe that all problems have solutions.
3. 4 A Filipino way of showing love for his country is by visiting the
different places in the Philippines.
4. 4 To show respect to the Philippine National Anthem, one should
stand at attention and place his/her right hand on the left side of
his/her chest upon hearing it being played.
5. 4 Working hard for one’s own family is a mark of a true Filipino.
6. 8 The song “Tayo’y Mga Pinoy” encourages a Filipino’s pride in his
own language, not in the languages of other countries.
7. 8 Kissing the hands of elders should still be practiced because it is
one way of showing respect for elders.
8. 4 Filipinos are known for their skill and cleverness in inventing,
creating and making things.
9. 4 Our national costumes are the barong-Tagalog for men and the
Baro’t Saya for women.
10. 8 Filipinos still make a habit of bringing home gifts or pasalubong
for their friends and family when they return to the Philippines.
35
Glossary
Harmonious Marked by agreement in sentiment or action

Optimism Positive outlook in life
Pre-betrothal Ceremony or affair where the groom and his family ask
permission to marry the bride
Resourcefulness Ability to devise ways and means to meet situations
Subcultures Ethnic, regional, economic or social groups exhibiting
characteristics distinguished from others within the same culture or society
Trait A distinguishing quality
References
Cordero-Fernando, G. (Ed.). Being Filipino. Quezon City: GCF Books. 1981.

Coates, A. Phoenix in December, in Roces, A. (Ed). Filipino Heritage: The
Making of a Nation (Vol. 7). Manila: Lahing Pilipino Publishing. 1978.
Moral Recovery Program National Secretariat. Filipino Values and National
Development: Readings on the Moral Recovery Program. Manila, MRP
National Secretariat. 1996.
36
Module 4
A Discriminating and Analytical Learner
Overview
Purposeful learning requires discriminating and analytical reading and thinking because of the
explosion of knowledge and information brought about by modern technology. You should learn to
discriminate whether or not the information at hand suits your purpose. You must also be able to
distinguish whether it is a fact or an opinion, a bias or propaganda and whether it is relevant or
irrelevant to the topic at hand.
This module focuses on helping you become a discriminating and analytical learner. After
going through this module you will hopefully be able to answer the question: Will the information at
hand help me form good judgment and make me arrive at a wise decision?
Objectives
After working on the activities in this
module you will be able to:
1. identify from several meanings that FACT?
which fits context OPINION?
2. recognize synonyms of words
3. determine the main idea of a material
read
4. distinguish fact from opinion and
relevant from irrelevant ideas
5. make inferences and predictions
6. describe a Filipino tradition, a
routine or a scientific fact
7. express on-going action
8. transcode linear information to text
9. write a personal reflection on
friendship/honesty
10. demonstrate understanding of idioms
with hold by using them in
sentences.
1
Instructions
1. Do not write anything on this module as several students will be using it. Do all your work in
your notebook. Be sure to label your work by the module number and title. Keep a
separate notebook for your Reflective Journal.
2. Read each section carefully. If you have not read the first two sections, go over them first.
3. Each module begins with a brief introduction or Overview followed by a list of Objectives
you are expected to learn.
4. Before working on the activities, answer the Pretest first. Find out how well you did by
checking your answer against the answers given under the Self-Check of the pretest.
5. As you work on the activities, try to relate them to the objectives of this module. What skill
or strategy does the activity develop?
6. After each activity go over the Self-Check that follows to find out how well you fared in that
activity. Pay attention to the items you missed. Learn from your mistakes.
7. After working on all the activities take the Posttest.
Now take the pretest. Please do your best.
Pretest
I. Choosing from several meanings
Write the letter of the meaning which best fits each sentence containing the underlined word.
Choose from the list below:
a. identify
b. a sharp end
c. a small mark or dot
d. the main idea
e. a particular time
f. an item
1. I missed the point of your story.

2. At that point, the child fell asleep.
3. He answered the argument point by point.
4. The pencil has a sharp point.
5. Marlon forgot to add the decimal point.
II. Getting the main idea and picking out the irrelevant sentence.
Read the paragraphs below then write the letter of your answers to the questions that follow.
6. Young lion cubs can be as affectionate as kittens. If you hold one of them on your lap it will
relax comfortably in your arms, almost as if it were a baby. Pat it on the head or stroke its fur
2
and you will hear it purr and wait for you to do it again. If mama lioness is near, she will be
growling softly to warn you to be careful with her affectionate baby. But the cub will pay no
attention. It just wants you to go on patting it.
The paragraph is about a/an

a. domesticated lion cub
b. troublesome lion cub
c. affectionate lion cub
7. Blossoms sprouted everywhere, growing from stems that sprang up from the ground and out
of tree trunks. Rizza had never seen so many plants before! These growths were shaped like
the green plants of Earth, but they were in totally different colors. The leaves were red and
orange and the flowers were streaked with pinks and yellows, browns and blues.
The paragraph describes

a. earth
b. plants
c. colors
8. Leonardo da Vinci is best known as a painter, but he was also a sculptor and a musician. He
was a talented engineer and inventor and an important figure in the history of science.
Leonardo da Vinci was a man of many talents.
The paragraph is chiefly about the

a. many talents of Leonardo da Vinci.
b. well-known paintings of Leonardo da Vinci
c. contributions of Leonardo da Vinci to science.
9. 1) Antonio always gives people the impression that he is tired. 2) Because he was requested
by his mother to close the main door, he hurriedly obeyed. 3) His pace was as fast as a
turtle’s with broken limbs. 4) Some people always walk slowly. 5) He appeared to have had a
hard day’s work, and the first impression everybody in the family got upon seeing him was a
picture of exhaustion and fatigue.
Which sentence does not belong to the paragraph?

a. Sentence 2
b. Sentence 4
c. Sentence 5
10. 1) The santa cruzan is a Maytime street pageant. 2) It recalls the searching and finding of the
true cross by St. Helena and Constantine. 3) It is sponsored by the National Press Club. 4)
Prominent ladies or popular movie stars in elegant ternos walk underneath flowered arches.
5) Each participant plays the role of a Biblical character. 6) The glow of candles and luces
and the smell of sampaguitas lend beauty to a truly enchanting summer ritual.
3
What sentence does not belong to the paragraph?
a. Sentence 5
b. Sentence 2
c. Sentence 3
III. Write the letter of the correct verb form to complete the sentence.
11. Green plants _________ food by means of photosynthesis.

A. made B. make C. is making D. does make
12. Photosynthesis _________ water and carbon dioxide into a sugar.
A. combines B. do combine C. combine D. is combining
13. Green plants _________ carbon dioxide from the atmosphere.
A. is absorbing B. does absorb C. absorb D. absorbs
14. The plants _________ water from the soil through the roots.
A. takes B. are taking C. does take D. take
15. Light _________ the energy for photosynthesis.
A. supply B. supplies C. do supply D. are supplying
16. Chlorophyll _________ it possible for green plants to use the energy of light.
A. do make B. made C. are making D. makes
17. Green plants _________ oxygen to the atmosphere.
A. is returning B. does return C. returns D. return
18. Photosynthesis _________ within the leaves of green plants specifically within the
chloroplasts.
A. occur B. are occurring C. occurs D. do occur
19. Green plants _________ the sugar they make into a starch.
A. converts B. convert C. does convert D. is converting
20. Plants also _________ fats and proteins.
A. synthesize B. is synthesizing C. does synthesize D. synthesizes
IV. Complete each sentence with the correct form of the verb in parenthesis.
21. The earth _________ (be) the fifth largest planet in space.
22. It _________ (rotate) on its axis and _________ (revolve) around the sun as it
23. _________ (move) through space along with the sun.
24.
25. Geologists _________ (believe) the earth to be about 4.6 billion years old.
26. The earth _________ (consist) of the lithosphere, atmosphere and hydrosphere.
27. The lithosphere _________ (be) the solid part of the earth which _________
28. (consist) of the crust, mantle and core.
29. The earth _________ (have) a magnetic field and ________(exert) the force of
30. gravity.
4
Self-check
Here are the answers to the questions. Did you get them all right? Check your answers and
find out how you fared.
I. Choosing from several meanings
1. d 3. f 5. c
2. e 4. b
II. Getting the main idea and picking out the irrelevant sentence.
6. c 8. a 10. c
7. b 9. b
III. Using correct verb form
11. b 16. d
12. a 17. d
13. c 18. c
14. d 19. b
15. b 20. a
IV. Completion
21. is 26. consists

22. rotates 27. is
23. revolves 28. consists
24. moves 29. has
25. believe 30. exerts
Perfect score is 30. Did you get a perfect score? That’s great!
Congratulations! Nevertheless, study the module well so as to improve your
skills.
If you scored between 22 to 29, very good! Keep it up. You will find the
module very helpful in enhancing your skills.
If you scored between 14 to 21, you did just fine. Work on the module well and read more
and more so you will do better.
If you scored 13 or lower that’s alright. Read, read and read. Study the module thoroughly
and do all the activities well to improve your score. Good luck.
5
Words Unlocked
While reading, you may come across words that are new to you. Do not ignore these words,
they may be very important to the meaning of what you are reading. First, try to figure out their
meaning from context clues. Second, look for clues in the prefixes, suffixes and stems. In this way
you may be able to work out enough meaning for the word to permit you to get on with your reading.
This portion of the module will develop your skill to do that.
A. Choosing the Correct Meaning
In the dictionary, the word forge, which is used in the selection you are about to read, has
several meanings.
Match the italicized word in A with its correct meaning in B. Remember to write letters only.
A B
1. A forge should always install an anti- a. to imitate illegally
pollution device to protect the environment.
2. Left along a deserted road, the wounded hold- b. an apparatus in which metal is heated
up victim tried to forge ahead. and softened before shaping
3. The habitual absentee tried to forge his mother’s c. to heat
signature on the excuse letter.
4. The blacksmith placed the iron rod in the forge. d. to move forward with difficulty
5. Ana, Luisa and May agreed to forge a lasting e. a furnace or industrial plant where
friendship. metal is heated and refined
6. Remember to forge the metal first or you can f. to invent, devise or proceed in order to
never shape it. deceive
7. The dishonest cashier planned to forge an g. to form or make
alibi for his actions.
B. Using synonyms
Synonyms are words with the same meaning.
The word in each circle has four synonyms around it. Connect each synonym to the encircled
word.
filthy hide
soiled irregular deceive trick

dirty cheat
spotless unclean dupe outwit
stained oppose
6
fair
upright deceitful
honest
tricky reliable
truthful
Self-check
Now check your answers against those below to find out how you fared.
A. 1. e 3. a 5. g 7. f
2. d 4. b 6. c
B. filthy
soiled deceive trick
dirty cheat
unclean dupe outwit
stained
fair
upright
honest
reliable
truthful
Perfect score is 19. Perfect? Hats off to you! You learn fast.
Did you score 15-18? Very good! Keep up the good work.
Did you score 11-14? Good! But there is still so much room for improvement.
Continue reading.
Did you score 10 or lower? Well, that’s okay. Keep on reading so you will do
better next time. Happy reading!
Reading Adventure
Pre-reading
Honesty between or among friends is important, isn’t it? How would you feel if you found out
that your friend cheated on you? Why?
7
Look at the title of the selection you are about to read. Guess what literary type it is. Write your
guess in your notebook. Be able to explain your answer.
While Reading
Now read the selection. It is divided into five segments. After each segment, answer the
questions in the box
The Crow and the Sparrow
Once upon a time a sparrow “Then the one who wins will eat
made friends with a crow. One day the other,” said the crow.
when they were hunting for food, the The sparrow laughed and
crow spied some red peppers that agreed for he thought the crow was
were spread out on a mat to dry. joking. Friends do not eat each other.
“Look at those peppers,” said the The sparrow ate each pepper fairly, but
crow to the sparrow. the crow cheated. For each pepper that
“Let’s see who can eat the he ate, he hid three more under the mat
most.” without the sparrow’s seeing.
“All right!” answered the
sparrow.
1. Why did the sparrow agree to the bet?

2. How did the crow cheat?
3. Will the crow cash in on the bet?
Continue reading to find out.
“I’ve won! Now I’m going to “River! River!

eat you!” said the crow. Give me water
Then at last the sparrow To wash my beak,
realized that the crow was serious. To make myself neat,
“All right,” he said, “I’ll keep my The sparrow to eat!”
promise. But before you eat me you The river replied: “You want
must wash your beak for everyone water? Very well, but everyone says
knows that you’re a dirty bird and eat you eat nasty things. If you want to
lots of nasty things.” wash your beak in my water, you must
So the crow went to the river get a pot to put it in and then you can
and cried. have as much water as you like.”
8
4. What condition did the sparrow give before allowing
himself to be eaten by the crow? Why?
5. Why did the river refuse to give water to the crow?
6. What do you think will the crow do?
The crow went to the potter in Bring me some clay and “I’ll make you
the village and cried: a pot.”
“Potter! Potter! The crow went to a field and
Make me a pot began digging up clay with his beak.
To fetch some water. The earth said: “The whole
To wash my beak, world knows that you eat rubbish and
To make myself neat, nasty things. I cannot allow you to dig
The sparrow to eat!” up my clay unless you use a spade.”
The potter replied: “You want
a pot? Very well, but I have no clay.
7. Why can’t the potter give the crow a pot?

8. What did earth require from the crow?
9. What do you think will the crow do?
The crow went to the village To wash my beak,

blacksmith, who was working on a To make myself neat,
wheel. The crow said to him: The sparrow to eat!”
“Blacksmith! Blacksmith! The blacksmith replied: “You

Make me a spade want a spade? Very well, but you see I
To dig some clay, have no fire in the forge. If you want
To make a pot, me to make a spade, you must bring
To fetch some water, me some fire.”
10. Who do you think will the crow approach next?

11. Do you think that somebody will give the crow’s request?
9
The crow went to a farmer’s The farmer’s wife replied:
house nearby. The farmer’s wife was “You want fire? Very well, but how
cooking rice in the courtyard. The will you carry it?”
crow cried: “You can put it on my back,”
“Dear farmer’s wife! said the crow.
Give me fire The farmer’s wife put the fire
To make a spade on the crow’s back and immediately
To dig some clay, his feathers burst into flames. The
To make a pot, greedy crow was burnt to ashes. But
To fetch some water, the honest sparrow lived to a ripe old
To wash my beak, age.
To make myself neat,
The sparrow to eat!” - Retold by Ashraf Siddigui
Post Reading
A. Scanning for Details
Sometimes, you read only those parts of a reading material that will give you the
information you need. One way of doing this is through scanning. This way you hunt-skip-
read search as little as possible. You move your eyes rapidly over the page, reading as little
as possible. You move your eyes rapidly over the page, looking for the information you need.
Now scan the selection for answers to the following questions.
1. Who are the characters in the story? Which of them is the cheat?
2. What was the bet?
3. When did the sparrow realize that the crow meant what he said?
4. How did the sparrow save himself?
5. Whom did the crow approach and for what? Show sequence by writing the events in the
flow chart.
Sparrow wanted crow

to clean his beak.
10
6. What happened to the crow at the end?
B. True or False
Write T if the statement is true and F if it is false. Explain your answer.
1. The sparrow never thought that the crow was serious about the bet.
2. The crow cheated because he really wanted to eat the sparrow.
3. The river had a valid reason for not giving the crow water.
4. The earth gave clay to the crow but it was not enough for a pot.
5. The blacksmith’s request for fire from the crow was only an alibi.
6. The housewife really intended to burn the crow.
7. The sparrow was honest and trusting.
8. The crow was not only a cheat but he was also stupid.
C. Reacting to the Story
Answer the following questions.
1. What kind of friend was the crow? Do you know of people like him?
2. Would you like a friend like the crow? Why or why not?
3. What is the lesson of the fable?
Self-check
Now check your answers against the answers below to find out how you fared.
While Reading
1. Because the sparrow thought that the crow was only joking.
2. For every pepper he eats, he hides three under the mat without being seen by the sparrow.
3. Yes.
4. That the crow washes its beak first.
5. Because the river did not want its water to get dirty.
6. The crow will go to the potter for a pot.
7. Because he has no clay to be made into a pot.
8. That the crow use a spade in digging for clay.
9. The crow will go to the blacksmith.
10. The crow will approach somebody who is cooking – the farmer’s wife.
11. Yes.
11
Post Reading
A. Scanning for details

1. The sparrow and the crow. The crow cheated.
2. The bet was who can eat the most.
3. When the crow won.
4. By asking the crow to wash its beak first
5.
Sparrow wanted crow He went to the He went to the

to clean his beak. river for water. potter for pot.
He went to the He went to the He went to the

farmer’s wife for fire. blacksmith for spade. earth for clay.
6. The crow was burned to death.
B. True or False
1. T. Friends don’t eat each other.
2. T. Crows are predators.
3. T. Its water will become dirty because the crow’s beak is dirty.
4. F. The earth did not give any clay to the crow.
5. T. There was no fire on his forge and he needed it to make a spade.
6. F. The farmer’s wife placed the fire on the crow’s back at his instruction.
7. T. He trusted the crow and ate each pepper honestly.
8. T. He told the farmer’s wife to put the fire on his back which caused his death.
C. Reacting to the Story

1. The crow is dishonest. (Name some people like the crow.)
2. (The expected answer is No. Any explanation will do provided that it supports your
answer.)
3. A dishonest intention will never succeed.
Write Thing
You have read the ideas of the author about friendship. Surely, you have your
own. How about jotting them down.
12
In your Reflective Journal notebook, write a paragraph on your ideas of
friendship. You may use the questions below as guide.
1. How would you define friendship?
2. What is your idea of a friend?
3. What qualities would you want in a friend?
Skills Enhancer
Two basic reading skills essential to comprehension are getting the main idea of a paragraph
and distinguishing relevant from irrelevant ideas in a material read. A third higher level skill is
distinguishing fact from opinion. You should master these skills if you are to become a
discriminating and analytical learner.
Getting the Main Thought/Idea
In reading, it is important to know how to find the meaning of each paragraph or its main
thought. This main thought may be directly stated or it could be implied in the paragraph. When it
is directly stated the sentence that gives the main thought is called the topic or key sentence. It
unlocks the meaning of the paragraph for the reader.
Key Sentence
Try the paragraph that follows.
There are many ways that vegetables may be classified or grouped

together. They may be grouped by color, such as red, yellow or green. They may be
classified according to the part of the plant they represent, such as root, the stem, or
the leaf. They may be grouped according to the season of the year during which
they’re planted. They may be classified according to the way they react to
temperature – that is, their reaction to heat and cold.
The first sentence gives you the paragraph meaning or main thought. It tells you that
vegetables can be grouped together in many different ways. All the other sentences help to explain
this main thought, even though each one is different from the others.
13
Ways of grouping/classifying vegetables
Color Plant Part Season Planted Reaction to

Heat and Cold
Here are some guides to help you find the main thought of a paragraph.
1. Read the whole paragraph carefully.

2. While reading, try to see what the sentences have in common.
3. State to yourself what that common meaning is.
4. Look for a sentence that states this meaning or the main thought of the paragraph.
5. Look for clues which helped you find the main idea of the paragraph.
Do the following exercise.
Exercise 1. There are five paragraphs in this exercise. After each paragraph three topics are
listed. Pick out the letter of the topic that tells best what the paragraph is about. Then find the
sentence that states the main idea of the paragraph and write it in your notebook.
1. Three types of ants, each with a different task to perform, live in an ant colony. There is
usually only one queen ant. She lays the eggs. The male ants fertilize the queen’s eggs.
Female ants or workers do such things as gathering food, defending the colony from
enemies and caring for the young ants.
The paragraph is about

a. the queen ant
b. kinds of ants in a colony
c. workers defending the colony
Key sentence : _______________________________________________________
2. Our country’s interest in bicycling is growing. Bicycle racing, both indoors and outdoors,
is a fast growing sport. Some people join clubs that have racing teams. Others join clubs
that plan tours. These tours may be as short as neighborhood circuits or as long as cross-
country trips. More and more people of all ages are taking these bike tours.
14
a. taking a cross-country bike tour.
b. reasons for joining a bike club.
c. the growing popularity of bicycling.
Key sentence : _______________________________________________________
3. The dictionary is a very important reference. As a student, knowing how to find

information in it in the shortest time possible is necessary. The words in the dictionary are
arranged alphabetically. It is then important to know whether a certain letter is at the
beginning, middle or end of the alphabet so no time will be wasted.
The paragraph is mainly about

a. how words are arranged in a dictionary.
b. the dictionary as an important reference.
c. getting information in the shortest time possible.
Key sentence : _______________________________________________________
4. Herbs, which are flowering plants, have several interesting uses. The leaves, seeds and
even the underground roots can be used as spices when cooking. Fragrances for perfume
and soap often come from herbs. One of the most interesting and perhaps the oldest, use
of these plants is for making medicines. Ancient people believed that herbs had the power
to heal sickness.

a. the uses of herbs.
b. medicine made from herbs.
c. cooking spices from herbs.
Key sentence : _______________________________________________________
5. Bamboo is one of the most useful grasses in the world. In fact, it may be more like a tree
than like a grass. It has leaves as thick as trees. It can be used to make fences, houses,
ladders, toys, umbrellas and rafts. Its leaves are used as food for animals or to make paper.
From the stem are made buckets, water pipes, flutes and flowerpots. The juice from
bamboo is turned into medicine and the young stems are eaten as vegetable. There are
literally hundred of uses for bamboo.
The paragraph is about the

a. many uses of bamboo.
b. similarities of the bamboo and a tree.
c. different parts of bamboo.
Key sentence : _______________________________________________________
15
Self-check
Check your answers against this key to correction.
1. b
Key Sentence: Three types of ants, each with a different task to perform, live in an ant colony.
2. c
Key Sentence: Our country’s interest in bicycling is growing.
3. b
Key Sentence: The dictionary is a very important reference.
4. a
Key Sentence: Herbs, which are flowering plants, have several interesting uses.
5. a
Key Sentence: Bamboo is one of the most useful grasses in the world.
Differentiating Relevant from Irrelevant Ideas in a Paragraph
A relevant idea is something that belongs or is a part of the whole. It may be a detail or a
sentence that supports the main idea to form a unified and coherent composition.
On the other hand, an irrelevant idea is something that does not belong to the group. It is
“odd man out” and destroys the coherence and unity of a composition.
Look at the picture of a woman winnowing rice. The fallen chaffs are the irrelevant ideas.
Those that remain are the main and relevant ideas.
relevant
ideas
. . .
. .
irrelevant
ideas
16
Consider the following example.
1) Today astrology is a billion-dollar business as well as a popular pastime. 2) Astrology

goes back many thousands of years. 3) Computers cough up printouts showing what the
planets and stars mean in your life. 4) Designers, hairdressers and jewelers offer styles suited
to your sign. 5) And if you want to let the rest of the world know what sign you were born
under, you can buy stationery, key chains, T-shirts, handkerchiefs and ball point pens that tell
the world you’re a Leo, an Aries, a Scorpio or a Capricorn.
All the sentences except No. 2 support the main idea of astrology being good business. (sentence
1). So sentence 2. Astrology goes back many thousands of years is the irrelevant idea. Practice
extracting the main idea and eliminating irrelevant ideas by doing the exercise that follows.
Exercise 2. Identify the main idea of each paragraph. Then pick out the sentence that destroys the
unity of the paragraph. Write your answers in your notebook.
1. Like the ocean of water, the ocean of air knows no stillness. It is forever in a ceaseless
motion. Though there may not be enough wind to move a feather, the air is forever in motion.
Air occupies space and has weight. The whole atmosphere is a big and complex system of air
currents and each lesser portion of air has its own lesser circulation. One cannot lift his hand
without causing a tiny breeze, neither can one turn without producing a minute whirlwind.
This is because every separate air movement draws other movements in its train
Main idea: _________________________________________________

_________________________________________________
Irrelevant Idea:_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
2. The cornfield is an oppressively hot place. The soil is hot and dry; the wind comes across the
lazily murmuring leaves full of warm smell drawn from rapidly growing corn. A flood of
blinding object drops upon the field over which the cool shadows run only to make the heat of
the sun more intense. Farther right, a scarecrow dried crisp mutely watches over the growing
ears of corn.
Main idea: _________________________________________________

_________________________________________________
Irrelevant Idea:_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
17
3. I have a regular exercise schedule that helps me stay in shape. This exercise program takes
much time and effort but the good feeling it gives me makes it worth the trouble. On
Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays, I jog. I start warming up with calm, easy stretching
exercises. Then I usually run for about twenty-five minutes and I cover about three kilometers
during that time. After running, I always cool down by doing stretching exercises. On
Tuesdays and Thursdays I lift weights. I save weekends for relaxing. The days in between
give my muscles a chance to recover from the strain.
Main idea: _________________________________________________

_________________________________________________
Irrelevant Idea:_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
4. Glaciers are great masses of ice formed by snow. Snow collects on mountains for years then
melts and freezes. Each new snowfall supplies ice for the glacier as it packs, melts and freezes
again. Glaciers change the earth by pushing and moving rocks, soil and even huge boulders.
Mount Everest, which is the highest mountain in the world, has plenty of huge boulders. The
rocks and boulders that are pushed along by a glacier cut into the soil and wear away stone.
Main idea: _________________________________________________

_________________________________________________
Irrelevant Idea:_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
5. The Philippines has many folk festival. The Ati-Atihan festival in Aklan, which
commemorates the historic sale of Panay and recalls the peace pact between the Negritos and
the Malays who settled in Aklan, is one of them. This event also commemorates the feast day
of the Sto. Niño. The Sto. Niño is well-loved in Aklan. Townspeople and their guests paint
their faces and wear colorful costumes as they dance the streets of Kalibo. A Sunday evening
procession in honor of the Sto. Niño brings a solemn end to the week of gaiety.
Main idea: _________________________________________________

_________________________________________________
Irrelevant Idea:_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
18
Self-check
Let’s see how you fared. Check your answers against the answers below. Give one check for
every correct main idea and another check for each correct irrelevant idea. If all your answers are
correct you should score 10.
1. Main Idea: The ocean of air is forever in ceaseless motion.

Irrelevant Idea: Air occupies space and has weight.
2. Main Idea: The cornfield is an oppressively hot place.

Irrelevant Idea: Farther right, a scarecrow dried crisp mutely watches over the growing ears of
corn.
3. Main Idea: I have a regular exercise schedule that helps me stay in shape.
Irrelevant Idea: This exercise program takes much time and effort but the good feeling it
gives me makes it worth the trouble.
4. Main Idea: Glaciers are great masses of ice formed by snow.

Irrelevant Idea: Mount Everest, which is the highest mountain in the world has plenty of huge
boulders.
5. Main Idea: The Philippine has many folk festivals.

Irrelevant Idea: The Sto. Niño is well-loved in Aklan.
Perfect? Congratulations! You’re simply great!

Is your score 8 or 9? Very good! Keep it up.
Is your score 6 or 7? Fair enough but you should read some more to improve your score.
But if your score is 5 or lower, please put more diligence in your studies. Develop your skill
by reading more, more and more.
Distinguishing Fact from Opinion
Do you know the difference between an acceptable fact and an opinion?
A fact is something that everyone agrees is true. It is something that can be proved to
exist or happen and can be verified by observation, experiment or research.
An opinion, on the other hand, is something that someone thinks is true. It is not
verifiable and can differ from one person to another.
19
Study the expressions used in presenting
facts or opinions.
FACTS
Based on research/experiments…
It is recorded and verifiable…
According to studies/observations…
OPINIONS
I guess…
People say…
Some believe…
Most people think…
Consider the following example.
George, the Chimp

George is a lovable, friendly little young animals seem to enjoy looking at
guy. Right now, the most important thing one another.
in his life is his blanket. If someone takes
it away, he stomps his feet, then lies on George needs care twenty-four
the floor, and throws a screaming hours a day. He needs bottle feeding,
tantrum. Some people say that if you vitamins, baths, and when time permits,
took George’s blanket away from him, he some playful attention from the zoo
would cease to live. keeper.
George was born in a zoo and Other babies staying in the

he is one of the most appealing little nursery at the present time, one of the
chimpanzees you will ever see. He zoo’s most popular and delightful areas,
never fails to charm his many visitors. include Thor, a grizzly bear who weighed
George lives in a temperature- only twenty-one ounces at birth; David
controlled nursery with other babies and Daniel, a pair of young lion cubs
who began life in one of the zoo’s about two months old; a young
hospital incubators. As soon as these chimpanzee named Charlie Brown; and a
babies are able to leave their baby jaguar, named Mr. Cat.
incubators, they are moved into
separate rooms. The public and the
20
Identify the following statements as accepted fact or opinion.
1. George was born in a zoo.

2. Some people say that if you took George’s blanket away from him, he would cease to live.
3. George needs care twenty-four hours a day.
4. Many people think the nursery is the nicest part of the zoo.
5. There are many other babies who begin life in one of the zoo’s hospital incubators.
Exercise 3
Answer the following questions in your notebook.
1. Is this rhyme accepted fact of opinion?
People say…
When the dew is on the grass,
Rain will never come to pass.
2. Is the following paragraph accepted fact or opinion?
Plants lose their heat and get cold at night. Water in the air forms small drops that stick to the
plants. This water is called dew. When rain clouds hang overhead, heat from the plants
cannot rise. Dew, then, does not form so…
When the dew is on the grass,

Rain will never come to pass.
3. Is this rhyme accepted fact or opinion?
People say…
Ring around the moon.

Rain is coming soon.
4. Is this paragraph accepted fact or opinion?
It is a fact that a ring around the moon at night usually means that a storm is coming. But
there is not really a ring around the moon. The fact is however, that we see a ring around the
moon when the moon shines on tiny bits of ice-filled clouds. The light from the moon bends
and scatters to make a ring of light around the moon. These ice-filled clouds will soon
produce a storm, so that a ring around the moon does usually mean that a storm is coming.
21
Self-check
How did you answer the questions? Compare your answers with those below.
1. Opinion that is an accepted fact.

2. Accepted fact that supports the opinion expressed by the rhyme.
3. Opinion that is an accepted fact.
4. Accepted fact supporting the opinion expressed in the rhyme.
Sometimes an opinion may be an accepted fact and accepted facts can support an opinion.
If you answered all four numbers correctly, kudos to you!
If you missed them just read some more on distinguishing fact from opinion.
Exercise 4
Read the following interaction in a science class. Pick out statements of facts and statements
of opinions. Use the boxes following the reading material for your answers.
Rainbow
The science class are discussing the nature and formation of rainbows.
Ms. Jose: What is a rainbow and when and where can you see one?
Lando: A rainbow is an arch of bright colors that is sometimes seen in the sky after a rain or in the
mist of a waterfall. It is seen only when the sun is shining against a passing shower or in
the mist that rises from a waterfall. A rainbow appears in the part of the sky that is
opposite the sun.
Ms. Jose: Very good! Now, what beliefs about rainbows do you know?
Ric: Ma’am, primitive people thought that rainbows were special signs put by the gods in the
sky to tell people when terrible wars or storms would happen.
Jun: Some people of Kenya once believed that the gods made rainbows to stop the rain from
falling when it was not needed.
Ms. Jose: Do you think these beliefs are true, Rita?
Rita: I don’t think so Ma’am, although I heard some people say that if one could travel at the
end of the rainbow, he would find a pot of gold.
FACTS
1.
2.
3.
22
OPINIONS
1.
2.
3.
Self-check
Want to find out how you fared? Check your answers against those below. Score every
correct answer 1 point.
Facts Opinions
1. A rainbow is an arch of bright 1. Primitive people thought rainbows
colors seen in the sky. were special signs from the gods.
2. A rainbow is seen only when the sun 2. Some people believed the gods made
is shining against a passing shower rainbows to stop rain from falling
or in the mist rising from waterfalls. when it was not needed.
3. A rainbow appears in the part of the 3. People say that at the end of the
sky opposite the sun. rainbow there is a pot of gold.
All correct? That’s great! You’re fast becoming a discriminating and analytical learner.
Congratulations!
One mistake? That’s fine. Keep up the good work, don’t rest on your laurels.
If you missed three items or more you better put more dedication in your studies. You need
more than luck to improve your score.
Now read the preceding interaction orally. Observe proper phrasing and intonation.
Language Focus
Study the following sentences. Observe the tense of the verbs used.
1. A rainbow is an arch of bright colors in the sky.

2. Rainbows appear after a rain.
3. A rainbow visually appears in the part of the sky opposite the sun.
4. The students are studying the nature of rainbows today.
5. We do see rainbows in the rising mist of waterfalls.
23
What generalizations about the uses of the present tense can you draw from the sentences? Check
your answer against the generalization in the box below.
The simple present tense of a verb is used to express
1. A general truth or scientific fact

Example:
Light is a form of energy
2. A permanent condition
Example:
Metro Manila lies in Luzon.
3. A habitual action
Example:
Brushing one’s teeth regularly prevents cavities.
4. A present action or event
Example:
The children are viewing television now.
5. A future event or action
Example:
The regional reading proficiency contest is a month from now.
Forms of the present tense:
The present tense has three forms
1. Ordinary form – This is formed by the base form of the verb except in the
third person singular where s or es is added to the base form.
I sing.
He sings.
2. Progressive form – This is formed by am, is, are + -ing form of the main verb.
I am listening to you.
She is reading.
They are running.
3. Emphatic form – This is formed by does or do + base form of verb.
I do love you.
He does care.
24
Let’s try practicing what you have just learned. Do the practice activities below.
Practice Activities
Activity 1: Describing a Filipino Tradition
Read the following sentences aloud giving the correct present ordinary form of the verb in
parentheses.
1. The Filipino _________ (have) a lot of traditions peculiar to him and one of these _________
(be) the celebration of All Saints’ Day.
2. For him it _________ (be) the time for remembering the beloved dead.
3. In preparation for the event the graves _________ (be) cleaned and the weeds around the
tombs _________ (be) pulled out and burnt.
4. Tombs _________ (be) whitewashed or scrubbed and crosses repainted.
5. After the mass early in the morning of November 1, everybody _________ (go) to the
cemetery.
6. The graves _________ (be) profusely decorated with fresh flowers in wreaths, garlands or
baskets until the whole cemetery _________ (look) like a vast flower garden.
7. At night the flickering lights of innumerable candles and bulbs _________ (transform) the
cemetery into a sort of star-studded fairy land. The flickering lights also _________
(resemble) myriads of fireflies into which the spirits of the departed _________ (have) been
transformed.
8. Some families _________ (stay) in the cemetery from early morning through midnight. To
enliven the tedious vigil, they _________ (bring) food and refreshments.
9. Some _________ (set) up improvised tents or pavilions where they _________ (receive)
friends who drop in.
10. The general atmosphere of the occasion _________ (be) gay, except for those who _________
(have) recently lost a loved one.
- Adapted
Self-check
See if you got the correct answers. Each answer has an explanation.
1. has; is. The subject of the first blank is third person singular, Filipino hence, the third person
singular of the present tense is used. The same is true with the second blank whose subject is
one.
2. is. The subject it is third person singular.
3. are; are . The subjects of the two verbs grasses and weeds are plural, so the verb is also plural.
25
4. are. The subject tombs is plural.
5. goes. The subject everybody is an indefinite pronoun requiring a singular verb in the third
person hence the verb used ends in es.
6. are, looks. Graves the subject on the first blank is plural, hence the verb used is plural;
however, the subject in the second blank, cemetery is singular, third person so the verb used is
singular and ends in s.
7. transform, resemble, have. The subjects of all these verbs lights, lights and spirits are plural
so the plural form of the verb is used.
8. stay, bring. Again, the subjects: families and they are plural, so the plural form of the verb is
used.
9. set, receive. Some is an indefinite pronoun that may use a singular or plural verb. Here, the
reference of some is families and the other subject they is plural hence the plural form of the
verb in the present tense is used.
10. is, have. The subject of the first blank is third person singular, atmosphere hence the singular
form of the verb is used. The second subject which is the referent of the relative pronoun who
is those, plural hence the plural form of the verb.
If your score is 10, hats off to you!

If you got 8 or 9, keep it up.
If you got 6 or 7 keep on trying
But if your score is 5 or lower, you need to read and practice more.
Activity 2. Describing a Routine
Study the following schedule and answer the questions based on the information given in
the schedule. Answer in complete sentences.
A Day in the Life of Lyneth, a Working Student
4:30 a.m. - say morning prayers

4:45 - cook breakfast and clean the house
7:00 - work as service crew in a fast food chain
1:30 p.m. - attend classes
8:30 - eat dinner and do laundry
9:30 - study lessons
11:00 - say evening prayers and go to bed
1. How does Lyneth start her day?

2. What household chores does she do every morning?
3. Where does she work?
4. What time does she attend classes?
5. What does she do at 9:00 p.m.?
6. How long does she study her lessons?
7. What does she do before going to bed?
26
Self-check
Let’s see how you fared this time. Check your answers.
1. Lyneth starts her day at 4:30 a.m. by saying her morning prayers.
2. She cooks breakfast and cleans the house.
3. She works at a fast food chain.
4. She attends classes at 1:30 p.m.
5. She does the laundry.
6. She studies her lessons for one and a half hours.
7. She says her evening prayers before going to bed.
Did you get a perfect score? If you did, that’s great. If not, do your best in the next activity.
Activity 3. From Table to Paragraph
Science and mathematics books contain a lot of tables and graphs that you must read and
interpret correctly to get your desired information. The following table was taken from a science
book. It shows the sizes, number of moons and distances of the planets of our solar system from the
sun. Study it carefully.
THE PLANETS
Planets Distance from Diameter Number Planet’s year- Planet’s day earth
the sun (million of (in kilometers) of moons earth time time (Rotation)
kilometers) (Revolution)
Mercury 58 4,840 0 88 days 59 days
Venus 108 12,300 0 225 days 244 days
Earth 150 12,750 1 365 ½ days 23 hrs. 56 mins.
Mars 228 6,790 2 687 days 24 hrs. 37 mins.
Jupiter 778 142,800 12 12 years 9 hrs. 50 mins.
Saturn 1,427 119,300 9 29 ½ years 10 hrs. 14 mins.
Uranus 2,870 47,100 5 84 years 10 hrs. 49 mins.
Neptune 4,497 44,800 2 165 years 15 hrs. 48 mins.
Pluto 5,907 5,900 0 248 ½ years 6 ½ days
Now answer the following questions based on the foregoing Table.
1. Which planet in our solar system is the biggest? the smallest?

2. Which planet has the most number of moons?
3. On which planet is a day longer than its year? Why is this so?
27
4. Why does a day in Mercury last 59 earth days?
5. Which of the planets makes the fastest rotation?
6. How long does it take Neptune to complete one revolution?
7. Which two planets are almost the same in size?
8. Why does it take Pluto the longest time to make a complete revolution around the sun?
Self-check
How did you find the last activity? Were you able to understand the Table? Check your
answers.
1. The biggest planet in our solar system is Jupiter while the smallest is Mercury.
2. Jupiter has the most number of moons.
3. In Planet Venus the day is longer than its year.
4. A day in Mercury lasts 59 earth days because of its slow rotation on its axis.
5. The planet that makes the fastest rotation is Jupiter.
6. It takes Neptune 165 years to complete one revolution.
7. Planet Venus and Earth are almost the same in size.
8. It takes Pluto the longest time to complete one revolution around the sun because it is farthest
from the sun.
Did you get a perfect score? That’s really great! If you did not, how about studying the Table
again and find out what you overlooked? Good luck.
Write Thing
Are you ready to put down in writing the information you got from the Table? I’m sure you
do.
In your notebook, write a paragraph about one of the planets of our solar system using the data
found on the preceding Table. Follow the example below.
Planet Earth
Earth is the third planet from the sun and the fifth largest planet in our
solar system. It has a diameter of 12,756 kilometers and is 150 million
kilometers away from the sun. Planet Earth tilts and rotates on its axis as it
revolves around the sun in an elliptical orbit. One complete rotation of
Planet Earth is 23 hours and 56 minutes while its complete revolution is
365 ¼ days. Planet Earth has one moon.
28
Activity 4. Expressing On-going Action
There is another use of the present tense. Actions going on at the moment of speaking are
expressed through the present continuous or progressive form. It is formed by the correct form of be
+ –ing form of the main verb.
A. Read the following sentences aloud giving the correct form of the verb in parentheses before the
numbers. Then write your answers in your answer sheet. Number 1 is done for you.
(leave) 1. Lydia generally leaves for school at six o’clock.

She is leaving now.
(call) 2. Miss Santos generally __________ on me to recite.
She __________ on me now.
(hold) 3. The teachers usually __________ meeting in the faculty room.
They __________ one now.
(walk) 4. Nilo usually __________ to school every morning.
He __________ to school now.
(read) 5. Ella often __________ a pocketbook before sleeping.
She __________ one now.
(watch)6. We usually __________ HBO movies on weekends.
We __________ one now.
B. Read the sample dialog that follows.
Student A: Rene doesn’t usually play badminton.

Student B: How come he is playing badminton today?
Now make your own dialogs using the cue in parentheses.
1. (talk a great deal)

A: My sister doesn’t usually __________.
B: How come she __________?
2. (wear jeans)
A: Jojo doesn’t usually __________.
B: How come he __________?
3. (leave)
A: Rina doesn’t usually __________.
B: How come she __________?
4. (do the laundry)
A: ______________________________.
B: ______________________________?
5. (drink pineapple juice)
A: ______________________________.
B: ______________________________?
29
C. Change the simple present to the progressive form like the example given.
Example: Joseph usually works indoors.
But today he is working under the big mango tree.
1. We usually eat lunch at 12:00.
But today we ____________________.
2. Leo usually takes coffee during breakfast.
But today he ____________________.
3. The secretary usually makes a lot of typing errors.
But today she ___________________.
4. Lulu usually complain about her seatmate.
_______________________________.
5. Mercy usually calls me up before lunch.
_______________________________.
Self-check
I bet you are interested to find out how you fared. Check your answers with those below.
A. 1. leaves; is leaving 4. walks; is walking
2. calls; is calling 5. reads; is reading
3. hold; are holding 6. watch; are watching
B. 1. A: My sister doesn’t usually talk a great deal.

B: How come she is talking a great deal now?
2. A: Jojo doesn’t usually wear jeans.
B: How come he is wearing jeans now?
3. A: Rina doesn’t usually leave before eight o’clock.
B: How come she is leaving now?
4. A: Aling Nitang doesn’t usually do the laundry on weekdays.
B: How come she is doing the laundry today, a Wednesday?
5. A: I don’t usually drink pineapple juice.
B: How come you are drinking pineapple juice now?
C. 1. But today we are eating lunch at 1:30 p.m.

2. But today he is taking chocolate during breakfast.
3. But today she is not making any typing errors.
4. But today she is not complaining about her.
5. But today she is not calling me up.
Perfect score is 27. Did you get them all right? Terrific! Congratulations!
Did you get 13 above? Very good! You’re doing fine. Keep it up.
But if you scored 12 or lower, please put in more diligence in your work. Go
back to the learning tasks you failed to do well and study each very carefully.
You should perform in the posttest as good as if not better than in the pretest.
30
Everyday Expressions
Often, when words are put together in phrases, they do not mean the same thing as they mean
separately. For example wrap it up does not always mean “to enclose something in a covering.”
Often it means “to finish.” The first usage is literal; the second usage is idiomatic.
An idiom is an expression that has developed naturally in a language. Because they are
usually short but forceful they are often used by journalists.
An idiomatic expression cannot be changed nor can the arrangement of words be modified so
you must carefully note the exact arrangement of words.
Following are idiomatic expressions using hold. Literally hold means to grasp or to keep or
have in hand. Combined with different prepositions hold takes on an idiomatic meaning.
hold against hold on

hold back hold out
hold down hold over
hold off hold to
hold with hold up
See if you can match the underlined idioms with its meaning on the right.
1. The police tried to hold back the crowd. a. fend off or keep at a
2. Don’t hold it against him that he has different distance
political views. b. keep at a low level
3. Petroleum dealers promised to hold down prices c. control or restrain
for as long as they could. d. allow something to
4. The soldiers managed to hold off the rebel attack influence one’s
on their detachment. judgment
5. I’m very thirsty but I’ll hold out until I get home. e. cling
6. The hostage hold on to the hope of an early release. f. commit armed robbery
7. Don’t try to get out of this agreement because we g. endure
will hold you to it. h. delay
8. We will hold our decision over till after the contest. i. make somebody keep
9. There was a daring hold up of a bank adjacent a a promise
police station yesterday. j. postpone or defer
10. Nothing must hold up the delivery of goods to the
flood victims.
31
Self-check
Exercise 1
Let’s find out how you fared. Check your answers against those below.
1. c 6. e
2. d 7. i
3. b 8. j
4. a 9. f
5. g 10.h
If you scored 6 or higher, congratulations! You did a very good job.

If you scored 5 or lower, do better in the next exercise.
Exercise 2.
Fill in the blank with the appropriate idiom chosen from the circle
hold out
hold back
hold up
hold on
hold with
hold down
hold off
hold to
hold against
1. The massive dike DPWH built cannot ________________ the flood waters so the town
proper became flooded.
2. How long can a person _______________ without water for days.
3. Please don’t ____________ it __________ me that I have a different ideology.
4. The young man tried to __________________ his hand to the old woman.
5. When the little boy fell into the swollen river he tried to ________________ to a piece of
floating lumber.
6. The manufacturer lost so much because production was _____________ by a strike.
7. Mang Ambo was shot when he attempted to ______________ the kidnappers of his boss.
8. Manufacturers promised to _____________ prices of canned goods until the year ends.
9-10. Armed men attempted to ______________ the rural bank but the local police
____________ them.
11. Please don’t __________________ any information. Tell everything you know about the
operation to the police.
32
Self-check
Let’s find out how much you’ve learned about the idiom with HOLD. Check your answers.
1. hold back 6. held up

2. hold out 7. hold off
3. hold against 8. hold down
4. hold on 9. hold up
5. hold on 10. held off
11. hold back
Exercise 3. Can you now use the two-word verbs in your own sentences? I think you can. So,
write them in your notebook.
You are almost finished with the module. To determine the extent of the benefits you
got from it evaluate your gains by taking the posttest.
Posttest
I. Choosing from Several Meanings

Write the letter of the meaning which best fits each sentence containing the underlined word.
Choose from the list below
a. to stop an activity and relax
b. to stand on or lie on
c. remainder
d. to lean
e. a mark in music to show a pause
1. After practicing for more than an hour her fingers were tired and she stopped to rest them.
2. He played the right notes but the song sounded all wrong because he neglected to stop at the rests.
3. Andrei slouched in his seat and rested his head against the back of the chair.
4. The tall building rests on solid rock.
5. “I’ve done enough for today,” he said. The rest will have to wait till tomorrow.”
II. Getting the main idea and picking out the irrelevant sentences.
Read the following paragraphs then write the letter of your answers to the questions that
follow.
1. Crickets make their chirping sounds with their wings. They are really fiddlers and not
songsters. On one wing, they have a coarse membrane like a saw. When crickets rub one
wing over the other, they can make several different tones just as a fiddler does when he draws
his bow across the strings. On a quiet, windless night, the sound of a cricket can carry for
more than a mile.
33
a. the characteristics of crickets.
b. how crickets make sound.
c. the abilities of crickets.
2. And surely, of all smells in the world the smell of many trees is the sweetest and most
fortifying. The sea has a rude pistoling sort of odor, that takes you in the nostrils like snuff,
and carries with it a fine sentiment of open water and tall ships; but the smell of a forest,
which comes nearest to this in tonic quality, surpasses it by many degrees in the quality of
softness. Again, the smell of the sea has little variety, but the smell of a forest is definitely
changeful, it varies with the hour of the day, not in strength merely, but in character; and the
different sort of trees, as you go from one zone of the woods to another, seem to live among
different kinds of atmosphere.
The paragraph is about the

a. smell of many trees.
b. smell of the sea.
c. different kinds of smell.
3. Visible light is a form of energy. Man uses the energy of light to see the things around him.
Since light supplies the energy which green plants use to make food for themselves, man
depends on light for the plant he grows and for the food he eats. In addition, it has many
practical applications in man’s everyday life. There are house lights, car lights, signal lights
and decorative lights. Man’s cameras, mirrors, microscopes, telescopes and projectors are
useless without light. Indeed, man could hardly live without light.
The paragraph is mainly about the

a. different kinds of light.
b. sources of lights.
c. importance of lights.
4. 1) A number of theories exist about why the pyramids were originally built. 2) One of the
most popular theories is that they were used as tombs for the Egyptian pharaohs. 3) Some of
these gigantic structures were constructed over a twenty-year period. 4) Other people theorize
that the pyramids were intended to be massive shelters during the time of the predicted great
flood. 5) Others believe that they were used as instruments to predict future events, such as
floods or good crop season. 6) Some historians argue that they were merely great sun dials.
Which sentence does not belong to the paragraph?

a. Sentence 6
b. Sentence 4
c. Sentence 3
5. 1) Prayer is a force as real as universal gravitation. 2) There are many reasons why man pray.
3) Although many people regard prayer as a formalized routine of words. I have seen men and
women being transformed by it. 4) I have seen men lifted out of disease and melancholy by
34
the serene effects of prayer. 5) I have witnessed prayer effecting cure which can be termed as
miraculous, even after all other therapy has failed. 6) I know men and women who have
discovered that prayer can supply them with a steady flow of sustaining power in their daily
lives.
What sentence does not belong to the paragraph?

a. Sentence 2
b. Sentence 3
c. Sentence 5
III. Language
A. Write the letter of the correct verb form to complete the sentence
1. We _________ on a water covered planet.

a. lives b. is living c. live d. does live
2. The oceans _________ seventy-five percent of the earth’s surface.
a. does cover b. cover c. is covering d. covers
3. This vast expanse of water _________ the adventurer who _________ to explore it.
a. defy; seek b. are defying; seeks c. defies; seeks d. does defy; seek
4. It also _________ the scientists who _________ eager to understand it.
a. challenge; are b. challenge; is c. is challenging; is d. challenges; are
5. Great mountain ranges _________ for thousands of miles.
a. extend b. extends c. is extending d. does extend
6. Volcanoes _________ and earthquakes _________ huge trenches.
a. are rising; is opening b. rise; open c. rises; opens d. rise; does open
7. Man _________ much to gain from an exploration of the oceans.
a. have b. do have c. are having d. has
8. Oceanography _________ a study of the oceans which _________ all the branches of science.
a. is; involves b. is; is involving c. is; involve d. is; do involve
9. To explore the oceans, the oceanographer _________ upon his knowledge of geology, chemistry,
physics and biology.
a. calls b. call c. do call d. are calling
10. The specialized branches of oceanography _________ physical oceanography, chemical
oceanography, geological oceanography and biological oceanography.
a. does include b. includes c. is including d. include
B. Write the correct form of the verb in parentheses.
The biosphere, that part of the earth on which life exists (1) _________ (be)
only a thin film on the surface of our planet. It (2) _________ (extend) about 8 or 10
kilometers above sea level and a few meters down into the soil, as far as roots (3)
_________ (penetrate) and micro-organisms (4) _________ (be) found. It (5)
_________ (include) all of the surface water and ocean depths. It (6) _________ (be)
patchy, differing in both depth and density.
The sun (7) _________ (power) the biosphere. It (8) _________ (be)
responsible for the wind, the weather and the energy flow that (9) _________
35
(characterize) life. The earth (10) _________ (receive) about 1024 calories of energy
from the sun each year.
Self-check
Now check your answers against those below. You should score higher than you did in the
pretest.
I. Choosing from Several Meanings

1. a 4. b
2. e 5. c
3. d
II. Getting the Main Idea and Picking out irrelevant sentences
1. b 4. c
2. a 5. a
3. c
III. Language
A. 1. c 4. d 7. d 10. d
2. b 5. a 8. a
3. c 6. b 9. a
B. 1.. is 6. is
2. extends 7. powers
3. penetrate 8. is
4. are 9. characterizes
5. includes 10. receives
Perfect score is 30. Did you perfect the test? Wonderful! Congratulations!
Now you are ready to move on to the next module. It’s an honor working with
you.
If your score is between 21 to 29 very good! You have made very good use of
this module and I’m happy for you. Keep up the good work!
If your score is between 11 to 20 you did good but you can do better. So, put in more
dedication and concentration in the modules to come.
But if your score is 10 or lower please spend more time studying. Perhaps it would do you
well if you study this module again.
36
37

English G7 PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

English G7 PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Learning Package

Grade 7 English Learning Package 1

Welcome to a new year of discoveries and explorations!

This package is intended to assist you in your journey into

1. explore real-life themes, tasks, and situations;

We encourage you to take good care of this material. Your

Have a meaningful journey!

The Learning Area Team

Grade 7 English Learning Package 2

1. Express whether a statement is true or false based on what you know.

YOUR INITIAL TASKS

Task 1. True or False?

On a half-sheet of paper, write T if the statement is true according to what you

_____ 1. Philippine literature existed even before the Spaniards came.

_____ 2. Proverbs express the unending wisdom of the old.

_____ 3. Proverbs communicate only traditional beliefs and values.

_____ 4. The form of proverbs is chiefly poetic.

_____ 5. It is difficult to preserve proverbs.

Grade 7 English Learning Package 3

Complete the grid below as you listen to the recording.

Recording Descriptions Descriptions

Task 3. Similar or Opposite?

In terms of meaning, a word may be synonymous (similar) or antonymous

compiled native ancestors gathered

In Filipino, proverbs are called salawikain or sawikain. They prescribe norms,

Walang ligaya sa lupa na di dinilig ng luha. (Tagalog)

Say liket ban-bantayey ermen. (Pangasinan)

Ang kapalaran ko di ko man hanapin, dudulog lalapit kung talagang akin.

2. Ethical proverbs recommending certain virtues and condemning certain vices

Walang utang na di pinagbayaran. (Tagalog)

Dai mo pagpaagahan an magigibo mo ngonyan. (Bikol)

Ayau mo in kahui pila‟a ha kawa‟an mo bunga. (Tausug)

3. Proverbs expressing a system of values

Ti nasadot a baro cas carne a nadangro. (Ilokano)

Ang mga tulo singgot sa taong mangguibuhaton paga bayran gayud sa

Isa ka tuig nga tiponon, isa ka takna wagwagon. (Hiligaynon)

Huli man at magaling, ay naihahabol din. (Tagalog)

Ti saan a matimtemec, nauyong no macaunget. (Ilokano)

Ing mayap a babai, maiguit ya karing rubi. (Pampango)

Ang gugma sang tigulang daw igui nga nagakamang. (Hiligaynon)

Ako kanhi cabalyero nga wala‟y kabilinggan; pagdawat sa matrimonio, sa

Kay tagal nanindahan, kabili-bili‟y balindang. (Tagalog)

6. Miscellaneous proverbs (typically expressive of specific realities to a certain

Ing matudtud a pemangca e na balu lebasa‟ ng sapa. (Pampango)

Mapipia nu sumavat ka a maysaosaod su sagap as canu caviden mu du

Dica agcapcapoy no bassit ti inapoy; dica agnengnengneng no bassit ti

Grade 7 English Learning Package 6

YOUR DISCOVERY TASKS

Task 1. Locate, Reflect, Evaluate!

Locate information in the selection to determine whether each statement is true

_____ 1. Only a few people work on compiling folk literature.

____ 1. Matibay ang walis, palibhasa'y magkabigkis.

____ 2. Sa taong walang takot, walang mataas na bakod.

Grade 7 English Learning Package 7

____ 4. Aanhin pa ang damo, kung patay na ang kabayo.

____ 5. Kung may isinuksok, may madudukot.

____ 6. Ang magalang na sagot, nakakapawi ng pagod.

____ 7. Ang hindi marunong magmahal sa sariling wika, daig pa ang

____ 8. Ang mabigat ay gumagaan, kung pinagtutulungan.

___ 10. Ang pili ng pili, natatapat sa bungi.

Task 3. Tune in!

Characteristics Characteristics Quality of Conversation Difficulties in Listening

Grade 7 English Learning Package 8